Toyota 2010 Camry Owners Manual

2015-09-07

: Toyota Toyota-2010-Camry-Owners-Manual-763042 toyota-2010-camry-owners-manual-763042 toyota pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 555 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

CUSTOMER EXPERIENCE CENTER
1-800-331-4331
00505-QRG10-CAM
Printed in U.S.A. 1/09
08-TCS-02939
413262M2.indd 2 1/8/09 10:25:07 AM
QUICK REFERENCE
GUIDE
CAMRY
2010
413262M2_r1.indd 3 1/12/09 4:12:03 PM
2010
Camry
!A word about safe vehicle operations
This Quick Reference Guide is a summary of basic vehicle
operations. It contains brief descriptions of fundamental
operations so you can locate and use the vehicle’s main
equipment quickly and easily.
The Quick Reference Guide is not intended as a substitute for
the Owner’s Manual located in your vehicle’s glove box. We
strongly encourage you to review the Owner’s Manual and
supplementary manuals so you will have a better understanding
of your vehicle’s capabilities and limitations.
Your dealership and the entire staff of Toyota Motor Sales,
U.S.A., Inc. wish you many years of satisfied driving in your
new Camry.
This Quick Reference Guide is not a full description of
Camry operations. Every Camry owner should review the
Owner’s Manual that accompanies this vehicle.
Pay special attention to the boxed information highlighted in
color throughout the Owner’s Manual. Each box contains safe
operating instructions to help you avoid injury or equipment
malfunction.
All information in this Quick Reference Guide is current at
the time of printing. Toyota reserves the right to make
changes at any time without notice.
25
OVERVIEW FEATURES/OPERATIONS SAFETY AND EMERGENCY FEATURES
Spare tire & tools
Tool location
Jack handle
Wheel nut wrench
Jack
Spare tire
With compact spare tire
Without compact spare tire
Removing the spare tire
(1) Loosen and remove the nut.
(2) Remove the spare tire cover.
(3) Loosen and remove the bolt.
(4) Remove the spacer (with aluminum
wheels).
Trunk-Internal release
Pull up
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4) Refer to the Owner’s Manual for tire changing
and jack positioning procedures.
1
OVERVIEW FEATURES/OPERATIONS SAFETY AND EMERGENCY FEATURES
INDEX
Engine maintenance 9
Fuel tank door release and cap 8
Hood release 9
Indicator symbols 4-5
Instrument cluster 4
Instrument panel 2-3
Keyless entry1,2 6
Light control-Instrument panel 8
Smart Key system1,2 7
Air Conditioning/Heating 18-19
Audio 20-21
Auto lock functions210
Automatic Transmission 10
Clock 18
Cruise control 16
Cup holders 22
Garage door opener (HomeLink®)316
Lights1& turn signals 14
Moonroof 12
Multi-information display 15
Parking brake 11
Power outlets-12V DC 15
Seat adjustments-Front 13
Seat adjustments-Rear 13
Seat heaters 19
Seats-Head restraints 12
Steering lock release 11
Steering wheel switches 21
Sunshade-Rear 17
Telephone controls (Bluetooth®)17
Tilt and telescopic steering wheel 11
Windows-Power 12
Windshield wipers & washers 14
Child comfort guide 24
Door locks 23
Doors-Child safety locks 23
Seatbelts 23
Seatbelts-Shoulder belt anchor 24
Spare tire & tools 25
Tire Pressure Monitoring (warning) System 24
Trunk-Internal release 25
OVERVIEW
FEATURES/OPERATIONS
SAFETY AND
EMERGENCY FEATURES
1Visit your Toyota dealer for information on customizing this feature.
2 Programmable by customer. Refer to the Owner’s Manual for instructions and
more information.
3HomeLink®is a registered trademark of Johnson Controls, Inc.
2
OVERVIEW
Instrument panel
Steering wheel audio controls2
Steering wheel climate controls1
Multi-information display button1
Voice command button1,2
Telephone controls1,2
“ENGINE START STOP” button (Smart Key)1
Ignition switch (standard key)1
Headlight and turn signal controls/Headlight, turn signal and front fog
light1 controls
Wiper and washer controls
Emergency flasher button
Steering wheel controls
Steering wheel controls
XLE and LE models
SE model
3
OVERVIEW FEATURES/OPERATIONS SAFETY AND EMERGENCY FEATURES
Audio system2
Tire Pressure Monitoring (warning) System
Cruise control
Tilt and telescopic steering lock release
VSC OFF switch
Power outside rearview mirror controls
Air Conditioning controls
Outside rearview mirror1/Rear window defogger button
AUX or USB/AUX audio jack
12V DC Power outlet
Seat heater controls1
1If equipped
2For details, refer to the “Navigation System Owner’s Manual.”
Automatic Air Conditioning
Manual Air Conditioning
4
OVERVIEW
Instrument cluster
Engine coolant temperature
Service indicator and reminder
Tachometer
Speedometer
Fuel gauge
Trip meter reset/Instrument panel light control
Multi-information display
Automatic Transmission shift position indicator
Sequential shift display (if equipped)
Odometer, two trip meters and outside temperature display
With multi-information display
Without multi-information display
Indicator symbols
Brake system warning1
For details, refer to “Indicators and warning lights,” Section 2-2, 2010
Owner’s Manual.
1If indicator does not turn off within a few seconds of starting engine, there may
be a malfunction. Have vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.
5
OVERVIEW FEATURES/OPERATIONS SAFETY AND EMERGENCY FEATURES
Charging system warning1
Front passenger occupant classification or front passenger AIR BAG
ON/OFF indicator1
2If this light flashes, refer to “Cruise control,” Section 2-4, 2010 Owner’s Manual.
Cruise control set indicator2
Headlight low/high beam indicator
Turn signal indicator
Slip indicator1
Cruise control indicator2
Low Tire Pressure Warning1
Theft deterrent/Engine immobilizer system indicator
Open door warning
Airbag SRS warning1
Master warning
Low windshield washer fluid level warning1
Driver seatbelt reminder
(alarm will sound if speed is over 12 mph)
Front passenger seatbelt reminder
(alarm will sound if speed is over 12 mph)
Low engine oil pressure warning1
Malfunction/Check Engine indicator1
Engine oil replacement reminder1
Low fuel level warning
Front fog light indicator
Smart Key System warning
Anti-lock Brake System warning1
Traction Control OFF indicator1
Vehicle Stability Control OFF indicator1
6
OVERVIEW
Keyless entry (if equipped)
Push
Push ONCE: Driver door
TWICE: All doors
Locking operation
Unlocking operation
Without Smart Key system With Smart Key system
Without Smart Key system With Smart Key system
Panic button
Push and hold
NOTE: If a door is not opened within 60 seconds of unlocking, all doors will
relock for safety.
Trunk lid
Without Smart Key system With Smart Key system
Push and hold
7
OVERVIEW FEATURES/OPERATIONS SAFETY AND EMERGENCY FEATURES
Smart Key system (if equipped)
Start function
Accessories such as the radio will operate.
Power ON; the engine not running.
All systems OFF.
ACC
ON
OFF
NOTE: Gear shift lever must be in Park and brake pedal depressed.
Push
Depress
brake pedal
Carrying
Green indicator ON
Without depressing the brake pedal, pressing the “ENGINE START STOP”
switch will change the operation mode in succession from:
* Driver door unlocking function can be programmed to unlock driver door
only, or all doors. Grasping front passenger door handle will unlock all
doors.
NOTE: Doors may also be locked/unlocked using remote.
Power (without starting engine)
Back door lock/unlock
Push
Locking operation Unlocking operation
Carry remote to lock/unlock Carry remote to lock/unlock
Push
Front door lock
Grasp
Carry remote to lock/unlock
Front door unlock*
8
Fuel tank door release and cap
NOTE: Tighten until one click is heard. If the cap is not tightened
enough, Check Engine “ ” indicator may illuminate.
Pull up
Tu r n
Store
Light control-Instrument panel
Brightness
control
-+
OVERVIEW
9
OVERVIEW FEATURES/OPERATIONS SAFETY AND EMERGENCY FEATURES
Hood release
Pull up latch and raise hood
Pull
Engine oil filler cap
Engine oil level dipstick
Windshield washer fluid tank
Engine coolant reservoir
Note: Regularly scheduled maintenance, including oil changes, will
help extend the life of your vehicle and maintain performance.
Please refer to the “Owner’s Warranty Information Booklet,”
“Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or “Owner’s Manual
Supplement.”
Engine maintenance
4 cylinder (2AR-FE) engine
6
cylinder
(2GR-FE) engine
10
FEATURES/OPERATIONS
Automatic Transmission (if equipped)
* The “ENGINE START STOP”/engine switch must be “ON” and the brake
pedal depressed to shift from Park.
Downshifting increases power going uphill, or provides engine braking
downhill. For best fuel economy during normal driving conditions, always
drive with the shift lever in the “D” position.
Floor shift type:
+: Upshifting (push and release)
-: Downshifting (pull and release)
“S” (Sequential) mode
Shift the shift lever to “S” position from “D” position.
Park*
Reverse
Neutral
Drive
N
“S” mode
Auto lock functions
Automatic door locks can be programmed to operate in four different
modes, or turned OFF.
-Doors lock when shifting from Park.*
-Doors lock when the vehicle speed goes above approximately 12 mph.
-Doors unlock when shifting into Park.*
Vehicles without Smart Key system
-Doors unlock when the engine switch is set from “ON” to “ACC” or
“LOCK” and driver’s door is opened.
Vehicles with Smart Key system
-Doors unlock when the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is set to OFF and
driver’s door is opened.
* Automatic Transmission only
Refer to the Owner’s Manual for more details.
11
OVERVIEW FEATURES/OPERATIONS SAFETY AND EMERGENCY FEATURES
Steering lock release
Tu r n
Tu r n
Smart Key system* Without Smart Key system
Push
Tu r n
Parking brake
Lever type Pedal type
Set: Depress
Release: Depress again
Pull
(2) Push
Set Release
(3) Lower
Hold wheel, push lever down, set angle and length, and return lever.
Lock release lever
Note: Do not attempt to adjust while the vehicle is in motion.
Tilt and telescopic steering wheel
* Gently turn wheel while pressing the ENGINE
START STOP switch. If the lock does not
release, the switch will flash green.
Angle
Length
(1) Pull
slightly
12
FEATURES/OPERATIONS
Moonroof (if equipped)
Sliding operation Tilting operation
Open
Tilt
Close
Close
Recommended driving position
to minimize wind noise.
Seats-Head restraints
Lock release button
Windows-Power
Up
Down
Driver side
Window lock switch
Automatic operation Push the switch completely down or pull it
completely up and release to fully open or close. To stop window midway,
lightly push the switch in the opposite direction.
Window lock switch Deactivates all passenger windows. Driver’s window
remains operable.
Push once to open; moonroof will automatically stop at the recommended
position. Push again to open completely.
Push once to open partway;
again to open completely.
13
OVERVIEW FEATURES/OPERATIONS SAFETY AND EMERGENCY FEATURES
Seat adjustments-Front
Manual seat Power seat
Seat position (forward/backward)
Height crank (driver side only)
Seatback angle
Position, cushion angle (driver side only) and height (driver side only)
Lumbar support (driver side only)
Seat adjustments-Rear (if equipped)
Reclining type (XLE model)
Seatback angle
lever
Fold down type (LE model)
Pull
Fold down
Refer to the Owner’s Manual for more details.
14
Lights & turn signals
Turn signals
Headlights
High beam flasher
Low beam
Front fog lights (if equipped)
Headlights
-Daytime Running Light system (DRL) Automatically turns on the
headlights at a reduced intensity.
-Automatic light cut off system Automatically turns lights off after a
delay of 30 seconds, or the lock switch on remote may be pushed after
locking.
Parking lights
Right turn
Lane change
Lane change
Left turn
High beam
Auto
DRL OFF
Tu r n
Windshield wipers & washers
Adjust frequency*
Pull to wash and wipe
Single wipe
Interval wipe
Slow
Fast
Front fog lights come on only when the headlights are on low beam.
FEATURES/OPERATIONS
* Intermittent windshield wiper frequency adjustment
Rotate to increase/decrease wipe frequency.
15
OVERVIEW FEATURES/OPERATIONS SAFETY AND EMERGENCY FEATURES
Power outlets-12V DC
Front console
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch/engine switch must be in the “ACC” or
“ON” position to be used.
Center console (if equipped)
Multi-information display (if equipped)
Push “DISP” to change information in the following:
(1) Outside temperature
(2) Miles left on remaining fuel
(3) Current gas mileage
(4) Running distance from engine start
(5) Average vehicle speed from engine start
(6) Multi-information display OFF
(7) Zoom display of odometer and trip meter
16
FEATURES/OPERATIONS
Cruise control
1 The set speed may also be cancelled by depressing the brake pedal or
clutch pedal (Manual Transmission only).
2 The set speed may be resumed once vehicle speed exceeds 25 mph.
Turning system ON/OFF
Functions
System ON/OFF
Increase speed
Decrease speed
Cancel1
Resume2
Garage door opener (HomeLink®)*
(if equipped)
Garage door openers manufactured under license from HomeLink®* can
be programmed to operate garage doors, estate gates, security lighting, etc.
Refer to “Garage door opener,” Section 3-7 in the Owner’s Manual for
more details.
For programming assistance, contact the Toyota Customer Experience
Center at 1-800-331-4331, or visit http://www.homelink.com.
* HomeLink®is a registered trademark of Johnson Controls, Inc.
Set
17
OVERVIEW FEATURES/OPERATIONS SAFETY AND EMERGENCY FEATURES
Bluetooth®technology allows dialing or receipt of calls without taking
hands from the steering wheel or using a cable to connect the compatible
telephone and the system.
Refer to “Hands-free phone system (for cellular phone),” Section 3-4 in
the Owner’s Manual for more details.
Telephone controls (Bluetooth®)
(if equipped)
Microphone
Audio unit
Steering wheel telephone switches
SE model
XLE and LE models
Voice command
button
Volume
Start call
End call
Volume
Start call
End call
Voice command
button
Sunshade-Rear (if equipped)
18
FEATURES/OPERATIONS
Air Conditioning/Heating
M
anual Air Conditioning
Fan speed
Temperature selector
Airflow vent
In “ ” mode, use fresh air (“ ” indicator OFF) to reduce
window fogging. “ ” mode uses fresh air only.
Outside rearview mirror*/Rear defogger
Air Conditioning ON/OFF
Use fresh air to quickly cool interior, then change to recirculate for
cooler air.
Select for maximum cooling. Air intake will automatically be set to
recirculate. It is not possible to change intake to fresh, or to turn A/C
OFF in this mode.
Fresh or recirculated cabin air
* If equipped
Clock
H-Hour set
M-Minute set
19
OVERVIEW FEATURES/OPERATIONS SAFETY AND EMERGENCY FEATURES
A
utomatic Air Conditioning
Temperature selector (driver side)
“DUAL” button
Indicator ON: Separate temperature settings for driver and
passengers.
Indicator OFF: Synchronize temperature settings for driver and
passengers.
Fan speed
Airflow vent
In “ ” mode, use fresh air (“ ” indicator OFF) to reduce
window fogging. “ ” mode uses fresh air only.
Temperature selector (passenger side)
Air Conditioning ON/OFF
Fresh or recirculated cabin air
Outside rearview mirror/Rear defogger
Windshield airflow/defogger
Climate control OFF
Automatic climate control ON
Adjusting the temperature setting will cause the airflow vents, air
intake and fan to adjust automatically.
Seat heaters (if equipped)
Driver seat
Front passenger seat
20
FEATURES/OPERATIONS
Audio
CD PLAYER
To scan tracks on a disc Push and hold “SCAN.” Push again to hold
selection.
CD changer (Type 2 only)
-To load one disc Push “LOAD” and insert one disc.
-To load multiple discs Push and hold “LOAD” until you hear a beep.
Insert one disc. Shutter will close and then re-open for next disc.
To select a file (MP3/WMA only) Turn “TUNE.FILE” OR “TUNE.SCROLL.”
To select a folder (MP3/WMA only) Push either side of “FOLDER.”
Type 2 additional functions
Eject CD
Push to turn
ON/OFF
Push to adjust
tone & balance
Seek station/
CD track select Station/CD
track scan
Mode
Preset buttons - functions in other
modes indicated above number
Load CD(s)
View CD text
Type 1
Push to skip
up/down folder
Mute/pause
Type 3
Eject CD
Push to turn
ON/OFF Push to adjust
tone & balance
Seek station/
CD track select
Mode
Preset buttons - functions in other modes
indicated above number
Push to skip
up/down folder
View CD textStation/CD track scan
21
OVERVIEW FEATURES/OPERATIONS SAFETY AND EMERGENCY FEATURES
Steering wheel switches (if equipped)
Audio control
(XLE and LE models)
A/C control
(XLE and LE models only)
-In radio mode Push to select a preset station; push and hold to seek the
next strong station.
-In CD mode Push to skip up or down to next/previous track.
“MODE”
Push to turn audio ON and select an audio mode. Push and hold to turn
the audio system OFF.
v
v
Volume control
Temperature
selector
Auto A/C
ON
A/C OFF
By inserting a mini plug into the AUX or USB/AUX audio jack, you can
listen to music from a portable audio device through the vehicle’s speaker
system while in AUX or USB/AUX mode.
AUX or USB/AUX audio jack
Volume control
(SE model)
Wire pass through
AUX audio jack
RADIO
To preset stations Tune in the desired station and hold down a preset
button until you hear a beep. Push desired preset button to select.
To scan stations Push and hold “SCAN” to scan preset stations. Push again
to hold selection.
USB/AUX audio jack
(if equipped)
22
Rear
LE modelXLE and SE models
FEATURES/OPERATIONS
Cup holders
Front
Manual Transmission models
Not removable
Automatic Transmission models
LE modelXLE and SE models
Pull to open
Push to open
23
OVERVIEW FEATURES/OPERATIONS SAFETY AND EMERGENCY FEATURES
Door locks
Lock
Unlock
SAFETY AND EMERGENCY FEATURES
Moving the lever to “LOCK” will allow the door to be opened only from
the outside.
Rear door
Doors-Child safety locks
If belt is fully extended, then retracted even slightly, it cannot be
re-extended beyond that point, unless fully retracted again. This feature
is used to help hold child restraint systems securely.
To find more information about seatbelts, and how to install a child
restraint system, refer to the Owner's Manual.
Keep as low on
hips as possible
Take up slack
Too high
Seatbelts
24
Rear seat outside
position guides provide
added comfort for
children who have
outgrown child
restraints.
Child comfort guide
SAFETY AND EMERGENCY FEATURES
Push up, or
squeeze lock
release to lower
System reset initialization
1. Push and hold “ SET” button
until the indicator blinks three
times.
2. Wait a few minutes to allow
initialization to complete.
Seatbelts-Shoulder belt anchor
Tire Pressure Monitoring (warning)
System
After adjusting tire pressures, or after tires have been rotated or
replaced, turn the ignition switch to “ON” and press and hold the
SET” button until indicator blinks three times. Let the vehicle sit for a
few minutes to allow initialization to complete.
Refer to the load label on the door jamb or the Owner’s Manual for tire
inflation specifications.
If the tire pressure indicator flashes for more than 60 seconds and then
remains on, take the vehicle to your local Toyota dealer.
Note: The warning light may come on due to temperature changes or
changes in tire pressure from natural air leakage. If the system has not
been initialized recently, setting the tire pressures to factory
specifications should turn off the light.
522
Abbreviation list
Abbreviation/Acronym list
ABBREVIATIONS MEANING
A/C Air Conditioning
ABS Anti-lock Brake System
ACC Accessory
ALR Automatic Locking Retractor
CRS Child Restraint System
DISP Display
ECU Electronic Control Unit
EDR Event data recorder
ELR Emergency Locking Retractor
GAWR Gross Axle Weight Ratings
GVWR Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
I/M Emission inspection and maintenance
LATCH Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children
LED Light Emitting Diode
MMT Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl
M + S Mud and Snow
MTBE Methyl Tertiary Butyl Ether
OBD On Board Diagnostics
SRS Supplemental Restraint System
TIN Tire Identification Number
TPMS Tire Pressure Warning System
TRAC Traction Control
VIN Vehicle Identification Number
VSC Vehicle Stability Control
TABLE OF CONTENTS Index
2
1-1. Key information
Keys ..................................... 24
1-2. Opening, closing and
locking the doors
and trunk
Smart key system................. 27
Wireless remote control ....... 38
Doors.................................... 42
Trunk .................................... 47
1-3. Adjustable components
(seats, mirrors,
steering wheel)
Front seats ........................... 51
Rear seats............................ 53
Head restraints..................... 55
Seat belts ............................. 57
Steering wheel ..................... 65
Anti-glare inside rear view
mirror.................................. 66
Outside rear view
mirrors................................ 68
1-4. Opening and closing
the windows
Power windows .................... 70
Moon roof ............................. 72
1-5. Refueling
Opening the fuel tank
cap ..................................... 76
1-6. Theft deterrent system
Engine immobilizer
system ................................ 80
Alarm .................................... 82
Theft prevention labels
(for U.S.A.) ......................... 84
1-7. Safety information
Correct driving posture ......... 85
SRS airbags ......................... 87
Front passenger occupant
classification system........... 99
Child restraint systems ....... 104
Installing child restraints ..... 108
2-1. Driving procedures
Driving the vehicle .............. 120
Engine (ignition) switch
(vehicles with smart
key system) ...................... 131
Engine (ignition) switch
(vehicles without smart
key system) ...................... 135
Automatic transmission ...... 138
Manual transmission........... 142
Turn signal lever ................. 144
Parking brake ..................... 145
Horn.................................... 146
2-2. Instrument cluster
Gauges and meters ............ 147
Indicators and warning
lights ................................. 151
Multi-information display..... 155
1Before driving
2When driving
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
3
2-3. Operating the lights
and wipers
Headlight switch.................. 159
Fog light switch ................... 163
Windshield wipers and
washer .............................. 164
2-4. Using other driving systems
Cruise control...................... 166
Driving assist systems ........ 170
2-5. Driving information
Cargo and luggage ............. 175
Vehicle load limits ............... 178
Winter driving tips ............... 179
Trailer towing ...................... 183
Dinghy towing (automatic
transmission) .................... 191
Dinghy towing (manual
transmission) .................... 192
3-1. Using the air conditioning
system and defogger
Automatic air conditioning
system .............................. 196
Manual air conditioning
system .............................. 204
Rear window and outside
rear view mirror
defoggers.......................... 209
3-2. Using the audio system
Audio system types............. 211
Using the radio.................... 215
Using the CD player ........... 223
Playing MP3 and WMA
discs ................................. 232
Operating an iPod®
player ............................... 240
Operating a USB memory
player ............................... 246
Optimal use of the audio
system.............................. 253
Using the AUX adapter....... 258
Using the steering wheel
audio switches.................. 260
3-3. Using the Bluetooth®
audio system
Bluetooth® audio system.... 263
Using the Bluetooth®
audio system .................... 266
Operating a Bluetooth®
enabled portable player.... 271
Setting up a Bluetooth®
enabled portable player.... 273
Bluetooth® audio system
setup ................................ 278
3-4. Using the hands-free
phone system
(for cellular phone)
Hands-free phone system
(for cellular phone)
features ............................ 279
Using the hands-free
phone system
(for cellular phone) ........... 283
Making a phone call ........... 292
Setting a cellular phone...... 296
Security and system
setup ................................ 301
Using the phone book ........ 305
3Interior features
TABLE OF CONTENTS Index
4
3-5. Using the interior lights
Interior lights list ................. 313
Interior light ...................... 314
Personal lights ................. 315
3-6. Using the storage features
List of storage features....... 316
Glove box......................... 317
Console box ..................... 317
Cup holders...................... 319
Auxiliary boxes................. 321
3-7. Other interior features
Sun visors .......................... 324
Vanity mirrors ..................... 325
Clock .................................. 326
Ashtray ............................... 327
Power outlets ..................... 328
Seat heaters....................... 330
Armrest............................... 332
Rear sunshade................... 333
Trunk storage extension..... 334
Floor mat ............................ 335
Trunk features .................... 336
Garage door opener........... 338
Compass ............................ 343
4-1. Maintenance and care
Cleaning and protecting
the vehicle exterior ........... 348
Cleaning and protecting
the vehicle interior ............ 350
4-2. Maintenance
Maintenance
requirements .................... 353
General maintenance ......... 355
Emission inspection and
maintenance (I/M)
programs .......................... 358
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Do-it-yourself service
precautions....................... 359
Hood ................................... 362
Positioning a floor jack........ 363
Engine compartment .......... 365
Tires.................................... 382
Tire inflation pressure ......... 392
Wheels................................ 396
Air conditioning filter ........... 398
Key battery ......................... 401
Checking and replacing
fuses................................. 405
Light bulbs .......................... 418
4Maintenance and care
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
5
5-1. Essential information
Emergency flashers ............ 424
If your vehicle needs to
be towed ........................... 425
If you think something
is wrong ............................ 428
Fuel pump shut off
system .............................. 429
Event data recorder ............ 430
5-2. Steps to take in an
emergency
If a warning light turns
on or a warning buzzer
sounds... .......................... 432
If a warning message is
displayed (vehicles
with multi-information
display) ............................. 444
If you have a flat tire............ 454
If the engine will not start .... 465
If the shift lever cannot be
shifted from P (automatic
transmission) .................... 467
If you lose your keys ........... 468
If the electronic key does
not operate properly
(vehicles with smart
key system)....................... 469
If the battery is
discharged ........................ 471
If your vehicle overheats ..... 475
If the vehicle becomes
stuck ................................. 478
6-1. Specifications
Maintenance data
(fuel, oil level, etc.) ........... 482
Fuel information.................. 495
Tire information .................. 498
6-2. Customization
Customizable features........ 510
6-3. Initialization
Items to initialize................. 514
Reporting safety defects
for U.S. owners ................ 516
Seat belt instructions
for Canadian owners
(in French)........................ 517
Abbreviation list........................ 522
Alphabetical index .................... 523
What to do if... .......................... 533
5When trouble arises 6Vehicle specifications
7For owners
Index
18
For your information
Main Owner’s Manual
Please note that this manual covers all models and all equipment, including
options. Therefore, you may find some explanations for equipment not
installed on your vehicle.
All specifications provided in this manual are current at the time of printing.
However, because of the Toyota policy of continual product improvement, we
reserve the right to make changes at any time without notice.
Depending on specifications, the vehicle shown in the illustrations may differ
from your vehicle in terms of equipment.
Noise from under vehicle after turning off the engine
Approximately five hours after the engine is turned off, you may hear sound
coming from under the vehicle for several minutes. This is the sound of a fuel
evaporation leakage check and, it does not indicate a malfunction.
Accessories, spare parts and modification of your Toyota
A wide variety of non-genuine spare parts and accessories for Toyota
vehicles are currently available on the market. You should know that these
parts are not covered by Toyota warranty and that Toyota is not responsible
for their performance, repair, or replacement, or for any damage they may
cause to, or adverse effect they may have on, your Toyota vehicle.
This vehicle should not be modified with non-genuine Toyota products.
Modification with non-genuine Toyota products could affect its performance,
safety or durability, and may even violate governmental regulations. In
addition, damage or performance problems resulting from the modification
may not be covered under warranty.
19
Installation of a mobile two-way radio system
As the installation of a mobile two-way radio system in your vehicle may
affect electronic systems such as the multi-port fuel injection system/sequen-
tial multi-port fuel injection system, cruise control system, anti-lock brake
system, SRS airbag system or seat belt pretensioner system, be sure to
check with your Toyota dealer for precautionary measures or special instruc-
tions regarding installation.
Scrapping of your Toyota
The SRS airbag and seat belt pretensioner devices in your Toyota contain
explosive chemicals. If the vehicle is scrapped with the airbags and seat belt
pretensioners left as they are, this may cause an accident such as fire. Be
sure to have the systems of the SRS airbag and seat belt pretensioner
removed and disposed of by a qualified service shop or by your Toyota
dealer before you scrap your vehicle.
Perchlorate Material
Special handling may apply, See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlor-
ate.
Your vehicle has components that may contain perchlorate. These compo-
nents may include airbags, seat belt pretensioners, and wireless remote con-
trol batteries.
20
CAUTION
General precautions while driving
Driving under the influence: Never drive your vehicle when under the influ-
ence of alcohol or drugs that have impaired your ability to operate your vehi-
cle. Alcohol and certain drugs delay reaction time, impair judgment and
reduce coordination, which could lead to an accident that could result in
death or serious injury.
Defensive driving: Always drive defensively. Anticipate mistakes that other
drivers or pedestrians might make and be ready to avoid accidents.
Driver distraction: Always give your full attention to driving. Anything that dis-
tracts the driver, such as adjusting controls, talking on a cellular phone or
reading can result in a collision with resulting death or serious injury to you,
your occupants or others.
General precaution regarding children’s safety
Never leave children unattended in the vehicle, and never allow children to
have or use the key.
Children may be able to start the vehicle or shift the vehicle into neutral.
There is also a danger that children may injure themselves by playing with
the cigarette lighter, the windows, or other features of the vehicle. In addi-
tion, heat build-up or extremely cold temperatures inside the vehicle can be
fatal to children.
21
Symbols used throughout this manual
Cautions & Notices
Symbols used in illustrations
CAUTION
This is a warning against anything which may cause death or injury to people if
the warning is ignored. You are informed about what you must or must not do
in order to reduce the risk of injury to yourself and others.
NOTICE
This is a warning against anything which may cause damage to the vehicle or
its equipment if the warning is ignored. You are informed about what you must
or must not do in order to avoid or reduce the risk of damage to your Toyota
and its equipment.
Safety symbol
The symbol of a circle with a slash through it means “Do not”, “Do
not do this”, or “Do not let this happen”.
Arrows indicating operations
Indicates the action (pushing, turning,
etc.) used to operate switches and other
devices.
Indicates the outcome of an operation
(e.g. a lid opens).
22
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1
1Before driving Adjusting and operating features such as door locks,
mirrors, and steering column.
2When driving Driving, stopping and safe-driving information.
3Interior fea-
tures
Air conditioning and audio systems, as well as other in-
terior features for a comfortable driving experience.
4Maintenance
and care
Cleaning and protecting your vehicle, performing do-it-
yourself maintenance, and maintenance information.
5When trouble
arises
What to do if the vehicle needs to be towed, gets a flat
tire, or is involved in an accident.
6Vehicle
specifications Detailed vehicle information.
7For owners Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners and seat belt
instructions for Canadian owners
Index Alphabetical listing of information contained in this
manual.
6
Headlights (low beam)
P. 159
Pictorial index Exterior
Fog lights
P. 163
Turn signal lights
P. 144
Hood
P. 362
Windshield wipers
P. 164
Outside rear view
mirrors
P. 68
Side marker/parking lights
P. 159
Headlights (high beam)
P. 160
Moon roof
P. 72
7
Tires
Rotation
Replacement
Inflation pressure
Information
P. 382
P. 454
P. 491
P. 498
Trunk
P. 47
Doors
P. 42
Fuel filler door
P. 76
Rear turn signal lights
P. 144
Rear window defogger
P. 209
Stop/tail lights
P. 159
: If equipped
Rear side marker light
P. 159
8
Glove box
P. 317
Front seats
P. 51
SRS side airbags
P. 87
Power window
switches
P. 70
Seat belts
P. 57
SRS front passenger
airbag
P. 87
SRS driver airbag
P. 87
A
Console box
P. 317
Interior
Pictorial index
Floor mat
P. 335
Head restraints
P. 55
Armrest
P. 332
Cup holder
P. 319
9
A
Interior light
P. 313
Vanity mirrors
P. 325
Moon roof switches
P. 72
Sun visors
P. 324
SRS curtain shield airbags
P. 87
Compass
P. 343
Garage door opener switches
P. 338
Auxiliary box
P. 321
: If equipped
Vehicles with moon roof
Front personal lights
P. 315
Rear personal lights
P. 315
Anti-glare inside rear view mirror
P. 66
10
Interior light
P. 314
Vanity mirrors
P. 325
Sun visors
P. 324
SRS curtain shield airbags
P. 87
Compass
P. 343
Garage door opener switches
P. 338
Auxiliary box
P. 321
Front personal lights
P. 315
Anti-glare inside rear view mirror
P. 66
Pictorial index Interior
A
Vehicles without moon roof
11
B
Window lock switch
P. 70
Power window switches
P. 70
Door lock switch
P. 42
Inside lock button
P. 43
: If equipped
12
C
Automatic transmission shift lever
P. 138
Cup holders
P. 319
Automatic transmission
Manual transmission
Pictorial index Interior
Auxiliary box
P. 321
Power outlet
P. 328
Parking brake lever
P. 145
Manual transmission shift lever
P. 142
Cup holders
P. 319
Shift lock override
button
P. 467
13
Gauges and meters
Multi-information display
P. 147
P. 155
Tilt and telescopic steering control lever
P. 65
Pictorial index
Trunk opener
P. 47
Headlight switch
Turn signal lever
Fog light switch
P. 159
P. 144
P. 163
Instrument panel
Audio system
Navigation system *1
P. 211
Windshield wiper and washer switch
P. 164
Clock
Security indicator
P. 326
P. 80, 82
Outside rear view
mirror switches
P. 68
Tire pressure warning
reset switch
P. 384
Parking brake pedal
P. 145
Hood lock release
lever
P. 362
Fuel filler door opener
P. 76
Auxiliary box
P. 321
: If equipped
*1: Refer to “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.
Emergency
flasher switch
P. 424
VSC OFF switch
P. 171
Horn
P. 146
14
Rear window and outside rear view mirror defogger switch
P. 209
A
Automatic air conditioning system
Manual air conditioning system
Air conditioning system
P. 196
Rear window defogger switch
Outside rear view mirror defogger switch
P. 209
P. 209
Air conditioning system
P. 204
Pictorial index Instrument panel
15
B
Engine (ignition) switch
(vehicles with smart
key system)
P. 131
Cruise control switch
P. 166
Talk switch *
1
P. 284
Air conditioning remote
control switches
P. 201
Engine (ignition) switch
(vehicles without smart
key system)
P. 135
“DISP” switch
P. 156
Telephone switches *
1
P. 284
Audio remote control
switches *1
P. 260
Type A
: If equipped
*1: Refer to “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.
16
B
Type B
Cruise control switch
P. 166
Talk switch *
1
P. 284
Engine (ignition) switch
(vehicles without smart
key system)
P. 135
Telephone switches
*1
P. 284
Audio remote control
switches *1
P. 260
Pictorial index Instrument panel
Engine (ignition) switch
(vehicles with smart key system)
P. 131
17
C
Power outlet
P. 328
USB/AUX adapter
AUX adapter
P. 240, 246
P. 258
Cable pass-through
P. 323
Seat heater switches
P. 330
: If equipped
*1: Refer to “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.
24
1-1. Key information
Keys
The following keys are provided with the vehicle.
Vehicles with smart key system
Electronic keys
Operating the smart key
system (P. 27)
Operating the wireless
remote control function
(P. 38)
Mechanical keys
Key number plate
Vehicles without smart key system (type A)
Master keys
Operating the wireless remote
control function (P. 38)
Valet key
Key number plate
Vehicles without smart key system (type B)
Master keys
Valet key
Key number plate
25
1-1. Key information
1
Before driving
Using the mechanical key (vehicles with smart key system)
Take out the mechanical key.
After using the mechanical key,
store it in the electronic key. Carry
the mechanical key together with
the electronic key. If the electronic
key battery is depleted or the
entry function does not operate
properly, you will need the
mechanical key. (P. 469)
When required to leave a key to the vehicle with a parking attendant
Lock the glove box and the trunk storage extension as circumstances
demand. Set the luggage security system. (P. 48, 317, 334)
Vehicles with smart key system: Remove the mechanical key for your own
use and provide the attendant with the electronic key only.
Vehicles without smart key system: Carry the master key for your own use
and leave the valet key only with the attendant.
Key number plate
Keep the plate in a safe place such as your wallet, not in the vehicle. In the
event that a key is lost, a new key can be made by your Toyota dealer using
the key number plate. (P. 468)
When riding in an aircraft
When bringing a key with wireless remote control function onto an aircraft,
make sure you do not press any buttons on the key while inside the aircraft
cabin. If you are carrying the key in your bag etc, ensure that the buttons are
not likely to be pressed accidentally. Pressing a button may cause the key to
emit radio waves that could interfere with the operation of the aircraft.
26
1-1. Key information
NOTICE
To prevent key damage
Do not subject the keys to strong shocks, expose them to high tempera-
tures by placing them in direct sunlight, or get them wet.
Do not expose the keys to electromagnetic materials or attach any mate-
rial that blocks electromagnetic waves to the key surface.
Do not disassemble the key.
27
1
Before driving
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
Smart key system
The following operations can be performed simply by carrying the
electronic key on your person, for example in your pocket.
(The driver should always carry the electronic key.)
Locks and unlocks the doors (P. 2 8 )
Unlocks the trunk (P. 2 8)
Starts the engine (P. 131)
: If equipped
28
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
Unlocking and locking the doors (front door handles only)
Grip the handle to unlock the
door.
Make sure to touch the sensor on
the back of the handle.
The door cannot be unlocked for
3 seconds after the door is
locked.
Press the lock button to lock the
door.
Unlocking the trunk
Press the button to unlock the
trunk.
29
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
1
Before driving
Antenna location and effective range
Antenna location
Antennas outside the cabin
Antenna outside the trunk
Antenna inside the trunk
Antennas inside the cabin
30
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
Effective range (areas within which the electronic key is
detected)
When locking or unlocking
the doors
The system can be operated
when the electronic key is
within about 2.3 ft. (0.7 m) of
either of the outside front
door handles. (Only the
doors detecting the key can
be operated.)
When starting the engine
or changing “ENGINE
START STOP” switch
modes
The system can be operated
when the electronic key is
inside the vehicle.
When unlocking the trunk
The system can be operated
when the electronic key is
within about 2.3 ft. (0.7 m) of
the trunk release button.
Operation signals
A buzzer sounds and the emergency flashers flash to indicate that the doors
have been locked/unlocked. (Locked: Once; Unlocked: Twice)
Conditions affecting operation
The smart key system uses weak radio waves. In the following situations,
the communication between the electronic key and the vehicle may be
affected, preventing the smart key system and wireless remote control from
operating properly. (Ways of coping: P. 469)
When the electronic key battery is depleted
31
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
1
Before driving
Near a TV tower, electric power plant, gas station, radio station, large dis-
play, airport or other facility that generates strong radio waves or electri-
cal noise
When carrying a portable radio, cellular phone, cordless phone or other
wireless communication devices
When the electronic key has come into contact with, or is covered by, a
metallic object
When multiple electronic keys are in the vicinity
When carrying or using the electronic key together with the following
devices that emit radio waves
Another vehicle’s electronic key
A wireless key that emits radio waves
Personal computer
If window tint with a metallic content or metallic objects are attached to
the rear window
Switching the door unlock function
It is possible to set which doors the entry function unlocks.
Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF.
When the indicator on the key surface is off, press and
hold , , or for approximately 5 seconds while
pressing on the key.
The setting changes each time an operation is performed, as shown below.
(When changing the setting continuously, release the buttons, wait for at
least 5 seconds, and repeat step 2.)
STEP
1
STEP
2
Multi-information
display Unlocking doors Beep
Hold the driver's door han-
dle to unlock only the
driver's door. Exterior: Beeps three
times
Interior: Pings once
Hold the front passenger's
door handle to unlock all
doors
Hold either front door han-
dle to unlock all doors
Exterior: Beeps twice
Interior: Pings once
32
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
Unlock the doors using the electronic key and open one of the
doors.
If a door is not opened within 60 seconds after is pressed, the
doors will be locked again and the alarm will automatically be set.
In case that the alarm is triggered, immediately stop the alarm.
(P. 82)
Battery-saving function
In the following circumstances, the entry function is disabled in order to pre-
vent the vehicle and electronic key batteries from discharging.
When the entry function has not been used for 2 weeks or more
When the electronic key has been left within approximately 6 ft. (2 m) of
the vehicle for 10 minutes or more
The system will resume operation when...
The vehicle is locked using the door handle lock switch.
The vehicle is locked/unlocked using the wireless remote control func-
tion. (P. 3 8)
The vehicle is locked/unlocked using the mechanical key. (P. 469)
Electronic key battery depletion
The standard battery life is 1 to 2 years. (The battery becomes depleted
even if the electronic key is not used.) If the smart key system or the
wireless remote control function does not operate, or the detection area
becomes smaller, the battery may be depleted. Replace the battery when
necessary. (P. 401)
To avoid serious deterioration, do not leave the electronic key within 3 ft.
(1 m) of the following electrical appliances that produce a magnetic field.
•TVs
Personal computers
Recharging cellular phones or cordless phones
Table lamps
To operate the system properly
Make sure to carry the electronic key when operating the system. Do not get
the electronic key too close to the vehicle when operating the system from
the outside of the vehicle.
Depending on the position and holding condition of the electronic key, the
key may not be detected correctly and the system may not operate properly.
(The alarm may go off accidentally, or the door lock prevention may not func-
tion.)
STEP
3
33
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
1
Before driving
Note for the smart key system
Even when the electronic key is within the effective range (detection
areas), the system may not operate properly in the following cases.
The electronic key is too close to the window or outside door handle,
near the ground, or in a high place when the doors are locked or
unlocked.
The electronic key is near the ground or in a high place, or too close to
the rear bumper center when the trunk is unlocked.
The electronic key is on the instrument panel, package tray, floor, or in
the auxiliary box of the driver's side instrument panel or glove box
when the engine is started or “ENGINE START STOP” switch modes
are changed.
As long as the electronic key is within the effective range, the doors may
be locked or unlocked by anyone.
Even if the electronic key is not inside the vehicle, it may be possible to
start the engine if the electronic key is near the window.
The doors may unlock if a large amount of water splashes on the door
handle, such as in the rain or in a car wash. (The doors will automatically
be locked after approximately 60 seconds if the doors are not opened
and closed.)
Gripping the door handle when wearing a glove may not unlock the door.
If the wireless remote control is used to lock the doors when the elec-
tronic key is near the vehicle, there is a possibility that the door may not
be unlocked by the entry function. (Use the wireless remote control to
unlock the doors.)
A sudden approach to the effective range or door handle may prevent the
doors from being unlocked. In this case, return the door handle to the
original position and check that the doors unlock before pulling the door
handle again.
When the vehicle is not driven for extended periods
To prevent theft of the vehicle, do not leave the electronic key within 6 ft. (2
m) of the vehicle.
Security feature
If a door is not opened within approximately 60 seconds after the vehicle is
unlocked, the security feature automatically locks the vehicle again.
34
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
Alarms and warning indicators
A combination of exterior and interior alarms as well as warning messages
shown on the multi-information display are used to reduce the chance of
vehicle theft and accidents resulting from erroneous operation.
When any warning lights come on:
Take appropriate measures according to which warning light comes on.
(P. 432)
When a warning message is shown on the multi-information display
(vehicles with Optitron type meters):
Take appropriate measures according to the warning message on the
multi-information display. (P. 444)
The following table describes circumstances and correction procedures
when only alarms are sounded.
Alarm Situation Correction procedure
Exterior alarm
sounds once for
2 seconds
Tried to lock the doors
using the entry function
while the electronic key is
still inside the passenger
compartment
Retrieve the elec-
tronic key from the
passenger compart-
ment and lock the
doors again.
Closed the trunk while the
electronic key is still inside
the trunk and all doors are
locked
Retrieve the elec-
tronic key from the
trunk and close the
trunk lid.
Exterior alarm
sounds once for
10 seconds
Tried to lock the vehicle
using the entry function
while a door is open
Close all of the doors
and lock the doors
again.
35
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
1
Before driving
If the smart key system does not operate properly
Locking and unlocking the doors and trunk: Use the mechanical key.
(P. 469)
Starting the engine: P. 470
When the electronic key battery is fully depleted
P. 401
Customization that can be configured at Toyota dealer
It is possible to deactivate the smart key system, etc.
(Customizable features P. 510)
Alarm Situation Correction procedure
Exterior alarm
sounds once for
60 seconds
Tried to exit the vehicle
with the electronic key and
lock the doors without first
turning the “ENGINE
START STOP” switch OFF
Turn the “ENGINE
START STOP” switch
OFF and lock the
doors again.
Interior alarm
sounds continu-
ously
Tried to open the door and
exit the vehicle without
shifting the shift lever to P
when the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch is in
ACCESSORY mode or
IGNITION ON mode
Shift the shift lever to
P.
Interior alarm
beeps repeatedly
Turned the “ENGINE
START STOP” switch to
ACCESSORY mode while
the driver's door is open
(Opened the driver's door
when the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch is in
ACCESSORY mode.)
Turn the “ENGINE
START STOP” switch
OFF and close the
driver's door.
Turned the “ENGINE
START STOP” switch OFF
while the driver's door is
open
Close the driver's
door.
36
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
Certification for the smart key system
For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.
FCC ID: NI4TMLF-3
NOTE:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interfer-
ence, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTICE:
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a
Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits
are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference
in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate
radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the
instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. How-
ever, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular
installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or
television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off
and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or
more of the following measures:
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to
which the receiver is connected.
Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
FCC WARNING:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible
for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
For vehicles sold in Canada
NOTE:
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not
cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, includ-
ing interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
37
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
1
Before driving
CAUTION
Caution regarding interference with electronic devices
People with implanted pacemakers or cardiac defibrillators should keep
away from the smart key system antennas. (P. 29)
The radio waves may affect the operation of such devices. If necessary,
the entry function can be disabled. Ask your Toyota dealer for details, such
as the frequency of radio waves and timing of emitting the radio waves.
Then, consult your doctor to see if you should disable the entry function.
User of any electrical medical device other than implanted pacemakers
and implanted cardiac defibrillators should consult the manufacturer of the
device for information about its operation under the influence of radio
waves.
Radio waves could have unexpected effects on the operation of such
medical devices.
Ask your Toyota dealer for details for disabling the entry function.
38
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
Wireless remote control
The wireless remote control can be used to lock and unlock the vehi-
cle from outside the vehicle.
Vehicles with smart key system
Locks all doors
Unlocks all doors
Pressing the button unlocks
the driver’s door. Pressing the
button again within 3 seconds
unlocks the other doors.
Unlocks the trunk
(press and hold)
Sounds an alarm
(press and hold)
Vehicles without smart key system
Locks all doors
Sounds an alarm
(press and hold)
Unlocks all doors
Pressing the button unlocks
the driver’s door. Pressing the
button again within 3 seconds
unlocks the other doors.
Unlocks the trunk
(press and hold)
: If equipped
39
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
1
Before driving
Operation signals
Doors: A buzzer sounds and the emergency flashers flash to indicate that
the doors have been locked/unlocked.
(Locked: Once; Unlocked: Twice)
Trunk: A buzzer sounds to indicate that the trunk has been unlocked.
Door lock buzzer
If a door is not fully closed, a buzzer sounds continuously for 10 seconds if
an attempt to lock the door is made. Fully close the door to stop the buzzer,
and lock the vehicle once more.
Panic mode
Vehicles with smart key system
Vehicles without smart key system
When is pressed for longer
than about one second, an alarm will
sound intermittently and the vehicle
lights will flash to deter any person from
trying to break into or damage your
vehicle.
To stop the alarm, press any button on
the electronic key.
When is pressed for longer
than about one second, an alarm will
sound intermittently and the vehicle
lights will flash to deter any person from
trying to break into or damage your
vehicle.
To stop the alarm, press any button on
the wireless remote control.
40
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
Key battery depletion
Vehicles with smart key system
P. 32
Vehicles without smart key system
The standard battery life is 1 to 2 years. (The battery becomes depleted
even if the key is not used.) If the wireless remote control function does not
operate, the battery may be depleted. Replace the battery when necessary.
(P. 401)
Security feature
If a door is not opened within approximately 60 seconds after the vehicle is
unlocked, the security feature automatically locks the vehicle again.
When the electronic key battery is fully depleted (vehicles with smart
key system)
P. 401
Conditions affecting operation
Vehicles with smart key system
P. 30
Vehicles without smart key system
The wireless remote control function may not operate normally in the follow-
ing situations.
Near a TV tower, radio station, electric power plant, airport or other facil-
ity that generates strong radio waves
When carrying a portable radio, cellular phone or other wireless commu-
nication devices
When multiple wireless keys are in the vicinity
When the wireless key has come into contact with, or is covered by, a
metallic object
When a wireless key (that emits radio waves) is being used nearby
When the wireless key has been left near an electrical appliance such as
a personal computer
41
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
1
Before driving
Customization that can be configured at Toyota dealer
Settings (e.g. trunk unlocking function) can be changed.
(Customizable features P. 510)
Certification for wireless remote control
For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.
NOTE:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interfer-
ence, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTICE:
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a
Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits
are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference
in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate
radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the
instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. How-
ever, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular
installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or
television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off
and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or
more of the following measures:
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to
which the receiver is connected.
Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
FCC WARNING:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible
for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
For vehicles sold in Canada
NOTE:
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not
cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, includ-
ing interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
42
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
Doors
The vehicle can be locked and unlocked using the entry function,
wireless remote control, key or door lock switch.
Entry function (vehicles with smart key system)
P. 27
Wireless remote control (if equipped)
P. 38
Key
Vehicles with smart key system
The doors can also be locked and unlocked with the mechanical
key. (P. 469)
Vehicles without smart key system
Locks all doors
Unlocks all doors
Turning the key unlocks the
driver's door. Turning the key
again unlocks the other doors.
Door lock switch
Locks all doors
Unlocks all doors
43
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
1
Before driving
Locking the front doors from the outside without a key
Vehicles with smart key system
The door cannot be locked if the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is
in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode, or the electronic key is
left inside the vehicle.
Depending on the position of the electronic key, the key may not be
detected correctly and the door may be locked.
Vehicles without smart key system
The door cannot be locked if either of the front doors is open and
the key is in the engine switch.
Rear door child-protector lock
The door cannot be opened from
inside the vehicle when the locks
are set.
These locks can be set to prevent
children from opening the rear
doors. Push down on each rear
door switch to lock both rear
doors.
Inside lock button
Unlocks the door
Locks the door
The front doors can be opened
by pulling the inside handle
even if the lock buttons are in
the lock position.
44
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
Automatic door locking and unlocking systems
The following functions can be set or cancelled:
*: Vehicles with an automatic transmission only
Function Operation
Shift position linked
door locking function*
Shifting the shift lever out of P locks all
doors.
Shift position linked
door unlocking func-
tion*
Shifting the shift lever to P unlocks all doors.
Speed linked door lock-
ing function
All doors are locked when the vehicle speed is
approximately 12 mph (20 km/h) or higher.
Driver's door linked door
unlocking function
Vehicles with smart key system
All doors are unlocked when the driver's door
is opened within 10 seconds after turning the
“ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF.
Vehicles without smart key system
All doors are unlocked when the driver's door
is opened within 10 seconds after turning the
engine switch from the “ON” position to the
“ACC” or “LOCK” position.
45
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
1
Before driving
Setting and canceling the functions
To switch between setting and canceling, follow the procedure
below:
Vehicles with smart key system:
Close all the doors and switch the “ENGINE START STOP”
switch to IGNITION ON mode. (Perform the step 2 within 20
seconds.)
Vehicles without smart key system:
Close all the doors and switch the engine switch to the “ON”
position. (Perform step 2 within 10 seconds.)
Shift the shift lever to P or N, and
press and hold the driver's door
lock switch ( or ) for
approximately 5 seconds and
then release.
The shift lever and switch posi-
tions corresponding to the
desired function to be set are
shown as follows.
Use the same procedure to can-
cel the function.
*: Vehicles with an automatic transmission only
STEP
1
STEP
2
Function Shift lever
position
Driver’s door lock
switch position
Shift position linked door lock-
ing function* P
Shift position linked door
unlocking function*
Speed linked door locking func-
tion N
Driver's door linked door unlock-
ing function
46
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
When the setting or canceling operation is complete, all doors are
locked and then unlocked.
Customization that can be configured at Toyota dealer
Settings (e.g. unlocking function using a key) can be changed.
(Customizable features P. 510)
CAUTION
To prevent an accident
Observe the following precautions while driving the vehicle.
Failing to do so may result in a door opening and an occupant falling out,
resulting in death or serious injury.
Always use a seat belt.
Always lock the doors.
Ensure that all doors are properly closed.
Do not pull the inside handle of the doors while driving.
The doors may be opened and the passengers are thrown out of the vehi-
cle and it may result in serious injury or death.
Be especially careful for the front doors, the doors may be opened even if
the inside lock buttons are in locked position.
Set the rear door child protector locks when children are seated in the rear
seat.
47
1
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
Before driving
Trunk
The trunk can be opened using the key, trunk opener, entry function
or wireless remote control.
Opening the trunk from outside the vehicle
Entry function (vehicles with smart key system)
P. 27
Wireless remote control (if equipped)
P. 38
Key (vehicles with smart key system)
The trunk can be opened using the mechanical key. (P. 469)
Key (vehicles without smart key system)
Turn the master key clockwise
to release the trunk lid.
Opening the trunk from inside the vehicle
Pull the lever to release the
trunk lid.
48
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
Luggage security system
To protect luggage stored in the trunk against theft, do the following
procedure.
Turn the master key (vehicles
without smart key system) or
mechanical key (vehicles with
smart key system) counterclock-
wise to lock the trunk opener fea-
ture.
The trunk lid cannot be opened
even with the wireless remote
control or the entry function.
Internal trunk release lever
Trunk light
The trunk light turns on when the trunk is opened.
Which key to the vehicle is to leave with a parking attendant after the
luggage security system is set. P. 2 5
The trunk lid can be opened by pulling up
the glow-in-the-dark lever located on the
inside of trunk lid.
The lever will continue to glow for some
time after the trunk lid is closed.
49
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
1
Before driving
CAUTION
Caution while driving
Keep the trunk lid closed while driving.
If the trunk lid is left open, it may hit near-by objects while driving or lug-
gage in the trunk may be unexpectedly thrown out, causing an accident.
In addition, exhaust gases may enter the vehicle, causing death or a seri-
ous health hazard. Make sure to close the trunk lid before driving.
Before driving the vehicle, make sure that the trunk lid is fully closed. If the
trunk lid is not fully closed, it may open unexpectedly while driving, caus-
ing an accident.
Never let anyone sit in the trunk. In the event of sudden braking or a colli-
sion, they are susceptible to death or serious injury.
When children are in the vehicle
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
Do not allow children to enter the trunk.
If a child is accidentally locked in the trunk, they could overheat or suffo-
cate.
Do not allow a child to open or close the trunk lid.
Doing so may cause the trunk lid to operate unexpectedly, or cause the
child’s hands, head, or neck to be caught by the closing trunk lid.
50
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
CAUTION
Using the trunk
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause parts of the body to be caught, resulting in seri-
ous injury.
Remove any heavy loads, such as snow and ice, from the trunk lid before
opening it. Failure to do so may cause the trunk lid to fall closed again
after it is opened.
When opening or closing the trunk lid, thoroughly check to make sure the
surrounding area is safe.
If anyone is in the vicinity, make sure they are safe and let them know that
the trunk is about to open or close.
Use caution when opening or closing the trunk lid in windy weather as it
may move abruptly in strong wind.
Do not attach any accessories other than genuine Toyota parts to the trunk
lid. Such additional weight on the trunk lid may cause the lid to fall closed
again after it is opened.
The trunk lid may fall if it is not opened
fully. It is more difficult to open or close
the trunk lid on an incline than on a
level surface, so beware of the trunk lid
unexpectedly opening or closing by
itself. Make sure that the trunk lid is fully
open and secure before using the
trunk.
When closing the trunk lid, take extra
care to prevent your fingers etc. from
being caught.
When closing the trunk lid, make sure
to press it lightly on its outer surface.
51
1
Before driving
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Front seats
Power seat
Seat position switch
Seatback angle switch
Seat cushion (front) angle switch (drivers side only)
Vertical height adjustment switch (drivers side only)
Lumbar support switch (drivers side only)
52
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
CAUTION
Seat adjustment
Do not recline the seat more than necessary when the vehicle is in motion
to reduce the risk of sliding under the lap belt.
If the seat is too reclined, the lap belt may slide past the hips and apply
restraint forces directly to the abdomen or your neck may contact the
shoulder belt, increasing the risk of death or serious injury in the event of
an accident.
Manual seat only: After adjusting the seat, make sure that the seat is
locked in position.
Manual seat
Seat position adjustment
lever
Seatback angle adjustment
lever
Vertical height adjustment
lever (driver’s side only)
53
1
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Before driving
Rear seats
Adjusting the rear seat (if equipped)
Pull up the seatback angle
adjustment lever until the lock
is completely released.
54
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
CAUTION
After returning the seatback to the upright position
Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may result in death or
serious injury.
Make sure the seatback is securely locked by pressing forward and rear-
ward on the top of the seatback.
Check that the seat belts are not twisted or caught in the seatback.
NOTICE
When right seatback is folded down
Make sure the luggage loaded in the enlarged trunk will not damage the
webbing of the rear center seat belt.
Folding down rear seatbacks (if equipped)
Pull the seatback lever in the
trunk for the seatback you
wish to fold down.
55
1
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Before driving
Head restraints
Removing the head restraints
Installing the head restraints
Head restraints are provided for all seats.
Up
Pull the head restraints up.
Down
Push the head restraint down
while pushing the lock release
button.
Lock release
button
Pull the head restraint up while pressing
the lock release button.
Align the head restraint with the installa-
tion holes and push it down to the lock
position.
Press and hold the lock release button
when lowering the head restraint.
56
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Adjusting the height of the head restraints
Adjusting the rear center seat head restraint
Always raise the head restraint one level from the stowed position when
using.
CAUTION
Head restraint precautions
Observe the following precautions regarding the head restraints. Failure to
do so may result in death or serious injury.
Use the head restraints designed for each respective seat.
Adjust the head restraints to the correct position at all times.
After adjusting the head restraints, push down on them and make sure
they are locked in position.
Do not drive with the head restraints removed.
Make sure that the head restraints are
adjusted so that the center of the head
restraint is closest to the top of your ears.
57
1
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Before driving
Seat belts
Make sure that all occupants are wearing their seat belts before driv-
ing the vehicle.
Correct use of the seat belts
Extend the shoulder belt so
that it comes fully over the
shoulder, but does not
come into contact with the
neck or slide off the shoul-
der.
Position the lap belt as low
as possible over the hips.
Adjust the position of the
seatback. Sit up straight
and well back in the seat.
Do not twist the seat belt.
Fastening and releasing the seat belt
Fastening the belt
Push the tab into the buckle
until a clicking sound is heard.
Releasing the belt
Press the release button.
Release button
58
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Seat belt comfort guide (outside rear seat)
If the shoulder belt fits close to a person's neck, use the seat belt
comfort guide.
Pull out the comfort guide from
the pocket.
Slide the belt past the slot of the
guide.
The elastic cord must be behind
the seat belt.
Adjusting the height of the belt (front seats)
Down
Up
Move the height adjuster up
and down as needed until you
hear a click.
STEP
1
STEP
2
59
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
1
Before driving
Buckle, position and release the
seat belt.
Seat belt pretensioners (front seats)
The pretensioner helps the seat
belt to quickly restrain the occu-
pant by retracting the seat belt
when the vehicle is subjected to
certain types of severe frontal
collision.
The pretensioner may not acti-
vate in the event of a minor frontal
impact, a side impact or a rear
impact.
STEP
3
60
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Emergency locking retractor (ELR)
The retractor will lock the belt during a sudden stop or on impact. It may also
lock if you lean forward too quickly. A slow, easy motion will allow the belt to
extend so that you can move around fully.
Automatic locking retractor (ALR)
When a passenger's shoulder belt is completely extended and then
retracted even slightly, the belt is locked in that position and cannot be
extended. This feature is used to hold the child restraint system (CRS) firmly.
To free the belt again, fully retract the belt and then pull the belt out once
more. (P. 108)
Pregnant women
People suffering illness
Obtain medical advice and wear the seat belt in the proper way.
Obtain medical advice and wear the seat
belt in the proper way. (P. 57)
Women who are pregnant should position
the lap belt as low as possible over the
hips in the same manner as other occu-
pants. Extend the shoulder belt com-
pletely over the shoulder and position the
belt across the chest. Avoid belt contact
over the rounding of the abdominal area.
If the seat belt is not worn properly, not
only a pregnant woman, but also the fetus
could suffer death or serious injury as a
result of sudden braking or a collision.
61
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
1
Before driving
Child seat belt usage
The seat belts of your vehicle were principally designed for persons of adult
size.
Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child, until the child
becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle's seat belt. (P. 104)
When the child becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle's seat
belt, follow the instructions on P. 57 regarding seat belt usage.
Replacing the belt after the pretensioner has been activated
If the vehicle is involved in multiple collisions, the pretensioner will activate
for the first collision, but will not activate for the second or subsequent colli-
sions.
Seat belt extender
Rear seat belt
If your seat belts cannot be fastened
securely because they are not long
enough, a personalized seat belt
extender is available from your Toyota
dealer free of charge.
Use the seat belt after passing it through
the guide if the seat belt comes free from
the guide.
62
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
CAUTION
Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of injury in the event of
sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident.
Failing to do so may cause death or severe injury.
Wearing a seat belt
Ensure that all passengers wear a seat belt.
Always wear a seat belt properly.
Each seat belt should be used by one person only. Do not use a seat belt
for more than one person at once, including children.
Toyota recommends that children be seated in the rear seat and always
use a seat belt and/or an appropriate child restraint system.
Do not recline the seat any more than necessary to achieve a proper seat-
ing position. The seat belt is most effective when the occupants are sitting
up straight and well back in the seats.
Do not wear the shoulder belt under your arm.
Always wear your seat belt low and snug across your hips.
Adjustable shoulder anchor
Always make sure the shoulder belt is positioned across the center of your
shoulder. The belt should be kept away from your neck, but not falling off
your shoulder. Failure to do so could reduce the amount of protection in an
accident and cause death or serious injuries in the event of a sudden stop,
sudden swerve or collision. (P. 58)
Seat belt pretensioners
Do not place anything, such as a cushion, on the front passenger's seat.
Doing so will disperse the passenger's weight, which prevents the sensor
from detecting the passenger's weight properly. As a result, the seat belt
pretensioner for the front passenger's seat may not activate in the event of
a collision.
If the pretensioner has activated, the seat belt becomes locked: it cannot
be further extended, nor will it return to the stowed position. The seat belt
cannot be used again and must be replaced at your Toyota dealer.
63
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
1
Before driving
CAUTION
Child restraint lock function belt precaution
Do not allow children to play with the child restraint lock function belt. If the
belt becomes twisted around a child’s neck, it will not be possible to pull the
belt out leading to choking or other serious injuries that could result in death.
If this occurs and the buckle cannot be unfastened, scissors should be used
to cut the belt.
Seat belt damage and wear
Do not damage the seat belts by allowing the belt, plate, or buckle to be
jammed in the door.
Inspect the seat belt system periodically. Check for cuts, fraying, and loose
parts. Do not use a damaged seat belt until it is replaced. Damaged seat
belts cannot protect an occupant from death or serious injury.
Ensure that the belt and tab are locked and the belt is not twisted.
If the seat belt does not function correctly, immediately contact your Toyota
dealer.
Replace the seat assembly, including the belts, if your vehicle has been
involved in a serious accident, even if there is no obvious damage.
Do not attempt to install, remove, modify, disassemble or dispose of the
seat belts. Have any necessary repairs carried out by your Toyota dealer.
Inappropriate handling of the pretensioner may prevent it from operating
properly resulting in death or serious injury.
Always make sure the shoulder belt passes through the guide when using
the seat belt. Failure to properly position the belt may reduce the amount
of protection in an accident and could lead to serious injures in a collision
or sudden stop.
Always make sure that the seat belt is not twisted, does not get caught in
the guide or the seatback and is arranged in the proper position.
64
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
CAUTION
Using a seat belt comfort guide
Make sure the belt is not twisted and that it lies flat. The elastic cord must
be behind the belt and the guide must be on the front.
To reduce the chance of injury in case of a sudden stop, sudden swerve or
accident while driving, remove and store the comfort guide in its pocket
when it is not in use.
Always make sure the shoulder belt is positioned across the center of the
shoulder. The belt should be kept away from the neck, and should not fall
off the shoulder.
Failure to observe these precautions could reduce the effectiveness of the
seat belt in an accident, causing death or serious injury.
Using a seat belt extender
Do not wear the seat belt extender if you can fasten the seat belt without
the extender.
Do not use the seat belt extender when installing a child restraint system
because the belt will not securely hold the child restraint system, increas-
ing the risk of death or serious injury in the event of an accident.
The personalized extender may not be safe on another vehicle, when
used by another person, or at a different seating position other than the
one originally intended.
NOTICE
When using a seat belt extender
When releasing the seat belt, press on the buckle release button on the
extender, not on the seat belt.
This helps prevent damage to the vehicle interior and the extender itself.
65
1
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Before driving
Steering wheel
CAUTION
Caution while driving
Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving.
Doing so may cause the driver to mishandle the vehicle and cause an acci-
dent, resulting in death or serious injury.
After adjusting the steering wheel
Make sure that the steering wheel is securely locked.
Otherwise, the steering wheel may move suddenly, possibly causing an
accident and resulting in death or serious injury.
The steering wheel can be adjusted to a comfortable position.
Hold the steering wheel and
press the lever down.
Adjust to the ideal position by
moving the steering wheel
horizontally and vertically.
After adjustment, pull the lever
up to secure the steering
wheel.
STEP
1
STEP
2
66
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Anti-glare inside rear view mirror
Glare from the headlights of vehicles behind can be reduced by
using the following functions.
Manual anti-glare inside rear view mirror
Normal position
Anti-glare position
Auto anti-glare inside rear view mirror
In automatic mode, sensors are used to detect the headlights of
vehicles behind and the reflected light is automatically reduced.
Turns automatic mode on/off
The indicator comes on when
automatic mode is turned on.
Vehicles with smart key sys-
tem:
The mirror will revert to the
automatic mode each time the
“ENGINE START STOP”
switch is turned to IGNITION
ON mode.
Vehicles without smart key
system:
The mirror will revert to the
automatic mode each time the
engine switch is turned to the
“ON” position.
67
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
1
Before driving
To prevent sensor error (vehicles with auto anti-glare inside rear view
mirror)
CAUTION
Caution while driving
Do not adjust the position of the mirror while driving.
Doing so may lead to mishandling of the vehicle and an accident, resulting in
death or serious injury.
To ensure that the sensors operate prop-
erly, do not touch or cover them.
68
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Outside rear view mirrors
Mirror angle can be adjusted when
Vehicles with smart key system
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON
mode.
Vehicles without smart key system
The engine switch is in the “ACC” or “ON” position.
When the mirrors are fogged up (vehicles with mirror defoggers)
Turn on the mirror defoggers to defog the mirrors. (P. 209)
Mirror angle can be adjusted using the switch.
Select a mirror to adjust.
Left
Right
Adjust the mirror.
Up
Right
Down
Left
STEP
1
STEP
2
69
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
1
Before driving
CAUTION
When driving the vehicle
Observe the following precautions while driving.
Failing to do so may result in loss of control of the vehicle and cause an acci-
dent, resulting in death or serious injury.
Do not adjust the mirrors while driving.
Both the driver and passenger side mirrors must be properly adjusted
before driving.
When a mirror is moving
To avoid injury and mirror malfunction, be careful not to get your hand
caught by the moving mirror.
When the mirror defoggers are operating (vehicles with mirror defog-
gers)
Do not touch the rear view mirror surfaces, as they can become very hot and
burn you.
70
1-4. Opening and closing the windows
Power windows
Lock switch
Press the switch down to lock
passenger window switches.
Use this switch to prevent chil-
dren from accidentally opening or
closing a passenger window.
The power windows can be opened and closed using the following
switches.
Closing
One-touch closing*
Opening
One-touch opening*
*: Pressing the switch in the
opposite direction will stop win-
dow travel partway.
71
1-4. Opening and closing the windows
1
Before driving
The power windows can be operated when
Vehicles with smart key system
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
Vehicles without smart key system
The engine switch is in the “ON” position.
Operating the power windows after turning the engine OFF
Vehicles with smart key system
The power windows can be operated for approximately 45 seconds after the
“ENGINE START STOP” switch is turned to ACCESSORY mode or turned
OFF. They cannot, however, be operated once either front door is opened.
Vehicles without smart key system
The power windows can be operated for approximately 45 seconds after the
engine switch is turned to the “ACC” or “LOCK” position. They cannot, how-
ever, be operated once either front door is opened.
Jam protection function
If an object becomes caught between the window and the window frame,
window travel is stopped and the window is opened slightly.
CAUTION
Closing the windows
Observe the following precautions.
Failing to do so may result in death or serious injury.
Check to make sure that all passengers do not have any part of their body
in a position where it could be caught when a window is being operated.
Do not allow children to operate the power windows.
Closing a power window on someone can cause serious injury, and in
some instances, even death.
Jam protection function
Never try jamming any part of your body to activate the jam protection
function intentionally.
The jam protection function may not work if something gets caught just
before the window fully closes.
72
1-4. Opening and closing the windows
Moon roof
Use the overhead switches to open, close, and tilt the moon roof up
and down.
Opening and closing
Open
The moon roof stops slightly
before the fully open position.
Push the switch again to fully
open.
Close
Push the switch in either direction
to stop the moon roof partway.
Tilt up and down
Tilt up
Tilt down
Push the switch in either direction
to stop the moon roof partway.
: If equipped
73
1-4. Opening and closing the windows
1
Before driving
The moon roof can be operated when
Vehicles with smart key system
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
Vehicles without smart key system
The engine switch is in the “ON” position.
Operating the moon roof after turning the engine OFF
Vehicles with smart key system
The moon roof can be operated for approximately 45 seconds after the
“ENGINE START STOP” switch is turned to ACCESSORY mode or turned
OFF. They cannot, however, be operated once either front door is opened.
Vehicles without smart key system
The moon roof can be operated for approximately 45 seconds after the
engine switch is turned to the “ACC” or “LOCK” position. It cannot, however,
be operated once either front door is opened.
Jam protection function
If an object is detected between the moon roof and the frame while closing
or tilting down, travel is stopped and the moon roof opens slightly.
To reduce wind noise
Drive with the moon roof opened to slightly before the fully open position as
driving with the moon roof opened fully will cause wind noise.
Sunshade
The sunshade can be opened and closed manually. However, the sunshade
will open automatically when the moon roof is opened.
Moon roof open reminder function
Vehicles with smart key system
An alarm will sound when the driver’s door is opened with the moon roof not
fully closed and the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF.
Vehicles without smart key system
An alarm will sound when the driver’s door is opened with the moon roof not
fully closed and the engine switch OFF.
74
1-4. Opening and closing the windows
When the moon roof does not close normally
Perform the following procedure:
If the moon roof closes but then re-opens slightly
Press and hold the open/close switch in the close position.*1
The moon roof will close, reopen and pause for approximately 10
seconds.*2 Then it will close again, tilt up and pause for approxi-
mately 1 second. Finally, it will tilt down, open and close.
Check to make sure that the moon roof is completely closed and
then release the switch.
If the moon roof tilts down but then tilts back up
Press and hold the “UP” switch*1 until the moon roof moves into the
tilt up position and stops.
Release the “UP” switch once and then press and hold the “UP”
switch again.*1
The moon roof will pause for approximately 10 seconds in the tilt up
position.*2 Then it will adjust slightly and pause for approximately 1
second. Finally, it will tilt down, open and close.
Check to make sure that the moon roof is completely closed and
then release the switch.
*1: If the switch is released at the incorrect time, the procedure will
have to be performed again from the beginning.
*2: If the switch is released after the above mentioned 10 second
pause, automatic operation will be disabled. In that case, press
and hold the open/close switch in the close position or press
and hold the “UP” switch. The moon roof will tilt up and pause
for approximately 1 second. Then it will tilt down, open and
close. Check to make sure that the moon roof is completely
closed and then release the switch.
If the moon roof does not fully close even after performing the above proce-
dure correctly, have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
75
1-4. Opening and closing the windows
1
Before driving
CAUTION
Opening the moon roof
Observe the following precautions.
Failing to do so may cause death or serious injury.
Do not allow any passengers to put their hands or heads outside the vehi-
cle while it is moving.
Do not sit on top of the moon roof.
Closing the moon roof
Observe the following precautions.
Failing to do so may result in death or serious injury.
Check to make sure that all passengers do not have any part of their bod-
ies in a position where they could be caught when the moon roof is being
operated.
Do not allow children to operate the moon roof.
Closing the moon roof on someone can cause death or serious injury.
Jam protection function
Never try jamming any part of your body to activate the jam protection
function intentionally.
The jam protection function may not work if something gets caught just
before the moon roof fully closes.
76
1-5. Refueling
Opening the fuel tank cap
Perform the following steps to open the fuel tank cap.
Before refueling the vehicle
Vehicles with smart key system
Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF and ensure that
all the doors and windows are closed.
Vehicles without smart key system
Turn the engine switch to the “LOCK” position and ensure that
all the doors and windows are closed.
Opening the fuel tank cap
Pull the lever to open the fuel
filler door.
Turn the fuel tank cap slowly
to open.
STEP
1
STEP
2
77
1-5. Refueling
1
Before driving
Closing the fuel tank cap
When replacing the fuel tank
cap, turn it until a clicking sound
is heard.
After releasing your hand, the cap
will turn slightly to the opposite
direction.
Hang the fuel tank cap on the
back of the fuel filler door.
STEP
3
Fuel type
Unleaded gasoline (Octane rating 87 [Research Octane Number 91] or
higher)
Fuel tank capacity
18.5 gal. (70 L, 15.4 Imp. gal.)
78
1-5. Refueling
CAUTION
Refueling the vehicle
Observe the following precautions while refueling the vehicle.
Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
Touch the vehicle or some other metal surface to discharge any static
electricity.
Sparks resulting from discharging static electricity may cause the fuel
vapors to ignite.
Always hold the grips on the fuel tank cap and turn it slowly to remove it.
A whooshing sound may be heard when the fuel tank cap is loosened.
Wait until the sound cannot be heard before fully removing the cap.
In hot weather, pressurized fuel may spray out of the filler neck and cause
injury.
Do not allow anyone that has not discharged static electricity from their
bodies to come close to an open fuel tank.
Do not inhale vaporized fuel.
Fuel contains substances that are harmful if inhaled.
Do not smoke while refueling the vehicle.
Doing so may cause the fuel to ignite and cause a fire.
Do not return to the vehicle or touch any person or object that is statically
charged.
This may cause static electricity to build up, resulting in a possible ignition
hazard.
When replacing the fuel cap
Do not use anything but a genuine Toyota fuel tank cap designed for your
vehicle. Doing so may cause a fire or other incident which may result in
death or serious injury.
79
1-5. Refueling
1
Before driving
NOTICE
Refueling
Do not spill fuel during refueling.
Doing so may damage the vehicle, such as causing the exhaust systems to
operate abnormally or damaging fuel system components or the vehicle's
painted surface.
80
1-6. Theft deterrent system
Engine immobilizer system
System maintenance
The vehicle has a maintenance-free type of engine immobilizer system.
Conditions that may cause the system to malfunction
If the key is in contact with a metallic object
If the key is in close proximity to or touching a key to the security system
(key with a built-in transponder chip) of another vehicle
The vehicle's keys have built-in transponder chips that prevent the
engine from starting if the key has not been previously registered in
the vehicle's on-board computer.
Never leave the keys inside the vehicle when you leave the vehicle.
Vehicles with smart key sys-
tem: The indicator light flashes
after the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch has been turned
OFF to indicate that the sys-
tem is operating.
Vehicles without smart key
system: The indicator light
flashes after the key has been
removed from the engine
switch to indicate that the sys-
tem is operating.
81
1-6. Theft deterrent system
1
Before driving
Certifications for the engine immobilizer system (for vehicles sold in
U.S.A.)
Vehicles with smart key system
FCC ID: NI4TMIMB-1
Vehicles without smart key system
FCC ID: MOZRI-20BTY (Made in Japan)
FCC ID: MOZRI-21BTY (Made in Canada)
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interfer-
ence, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired operation.
Certifications for the engine immobilizer system (for vehicles sold in
Canada)
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not
cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, includ-
ing interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
CAUTION
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible
for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
NOTICE
To prevent damage to the key
Do not modify, remove or disable the engine immobilizer system. If any
unauthorized changes or modifications are made, the proper operation of
the system cannot be guaranteed.
82
1-6. Theft deterrent system
Alarm
The system sounds the alarm and flashes lights when forcible entry
is detected.
Triggering of the alarm
The alarm is triggered in the following situations:
A locked door or trunk is unlocked or opened without the key,
wireless remote control or entry function of the smart key sys-
tem.
The hood is opened while the vehicle is locked.
The battery is reconnected.
Setting the alarm system
Close the doors, trunk and
hood, and lock all doors. The
system will be set automati-
cally after 30 seconds.
The indicator light changes
from being on to flashing when
the system is set.
Deactivating or stopping the alarm
Do one of the following to deactivate or stop the alarm.
Unlock the doors or trunk.
Start the engine.
: If equipped
83
1-6. Theft deterrent system
1
Before driving
Items to check before locking the vehicle
To prevent unexpected triggering of the alarm and vehicle theft, make sure
of the following.
Nobody is in the vehicle.
The windows and moon roof are closed before the alarm is set.
No valuables or other personal items are left in the vehicle.
Triggering of the alarm
The alarm may be triggered in the following situations.
(Stopping the alarm deactivates the system.)
A person inside the vehicle opens a door, the trunk or hood.
The battery is recharged or replaced when the vehicle is locked.
When the battery is disconnected
Be sure to deactivate the alarm system.
If the battery is discharged before deactivating the alarm system, the alarm
may be triggered when the battery is reconnected.
84
1-6. Theft deterrent system
Theft prevention labels (for U.S.A.)
These labels are attached to
the vehicle to reduce vehicle
theft by facilitating the tracing
and recovery of parts from sto-
len vehicles. Do not remove
under penalty of law.
85
1
Before driving
1-7. Safety information
Correct driving posture
Drive in a good posture as follows:
Sit upright and well back in
the seat. (P. 5 1 )
Adjust the position of the
seat forward or backward to
ensure the pedals can be
reached and easily
depressed to the extent
required. (P. 51)
Adjust the seatback so that
the controls are easily oper-
able.
Adjust the tilt and telescopic
positions of the steering
wheel downward so the air-
bag is facing your chest.
(P. 65)
Lock the head restraint in
place with the center of the
head restraint closest to the
top of your ears. (P. 55)
Wear the seat belt correctly.
(P. 57)
86
1-7. Safety information
CAUTION
While driving
Do not adjust the position of the driver's seat while driving.
Doing so could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.
Do not place a cushion between the driver or passenger and the seatback.
A cushion may prevent correct posture from being achieved, and reduce
the effectiveness of the seat belt and head restraint, increasing the risk of
death or serious injury to the driver or passenger.
Do not place anything under the front seats.
Objects placed under the front seats may become jammed in the seat
tracks and stop the seat from locking in place. This may lead to an acci-
dent. The adjustment mechanism may also be damaged.
Adjusting the seat position
Take care when adjusting the seat position to ensure that other passen-
gers are not injured by the moving seat.
Do not put your hands under the seat or near the moving parts to avoid
injury.
Fingers or hands may become jammed in the seat mechanism.
87
1
1-7. Safety information
Before driving
SRS airbags
The SRS airbags inflate when the vehicle is subjected to certain
types of severe impacts that may cause significant injury to the
occupants. They work together with the seat belts to help reduce the
risk of death or serious injury.
Front airbags
Driver airbag/front passenger airbag
Can help protect the head and chest of the driver and front pas-
senger from impact with interior components.
Driver knee airbag
Can help provide driver protection.
Side and curtain shield airbags
Side airbags
Can help protect the torso of the front seat occupants.
Curtain shield airbags
Can help protect primarily the head of occupants in the outer
seats.
88
1-7. Safety information
Airbag system components
Front airbag sensors
Front passenger occupant
classification system (ECU
and sensors)
Side and curtain shield air-
bag sensors
Front passenger airbag
Side airbags
Curtain shield airbags
“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR
BAG OFF” indicator lights
SRS warning light
Front passenger’s seat belt
buckle switch
Airbag sensor assembly
Curtain shield airbag sen-
sors
Driver airbag
Driver’s seat position sen-
sor (with power seat)
Driver’s seat belt buckle
switch
Driver’s seat position sen-
sor (with manual seat)
Driver knee airbag
89
1-7. Safety information
1
Before driving
Your vehicle is equipped with ADVANCED AIRBAGS designed based
on US motor vehicle safety standards (FMVSS208). The airbag sys-
tem controls airbag deployment power for the driver and front pas-
senger. The driver airbag system consists of the driver seat's position
sensor etc. The front passenger's airbag system consists of the front
passenger occupant classification sensor etc.
The main SRS airbag system components are shown above. The
SRS airbag system is controlled by the airbag sensor assembly. The
airbag sensor assembly consists of a safing sensor and an airbag
sensor.
In certain types of severe frontal or side impacts, the SRS airbag sys-
tem triggers the airbag inflators. A chemical reaction in the inflators
quickly fills the airbags with non-toxic gas to help restrain the motion
of the occupants.
90
1-7. Safety information
SRS warning light
This warning light system monitors the airbag sensor assembly, front airbag
sensors, side and curtain shield airbag sensors, curtain shield airbag sen-
sors, driver's seat position sensor, driver's seat belt buckle switch, front pas-
senger occupant classification system, “AIR BAG ON” indicator light, “AIR
BAG OFF” indicator light, front passenger's seat belt buckle switch, seat belt
pretensioner assemblies, inflators, interconnecting wiring and power
sources. (P. 433)
If the SRS airbags deploy (inflate)
Bruising and slight abrasions may result from contact with a deploying
(inflating) SRS airbag.
A loud noise and white powder will be emitted.
Parts of the airbag module (steering wheel hub, airbag cover and inflator)
as well as the front seats, and parts of the front and rear pillars and roof
side rail, may be hot for several minutes. The airbag itself may also be
hot.
The front windshield may crack.
SRS airbag deployment conditions (front airbags)
The front SRS airbags will deploy in the event of an impact that exceeds
the set threshold level (the level of force corresponding to a 12 - 18 mph
[20 - 30 km/h] frontal collision with a fixed wall that does not move or
deform).
However, this threshold velocity will be considerably higher if the vehicle
strikes an object, such as a parked vehicle or sign pole, which can move or
deform on impact, or if the vehicle is involved in an underride collision (e.g.
a collision in which the front of the vehicle “underrides”, or goes under, the
bed of a truck, etc.).
It is possible that in some collisions where the forward deceleration of the
vehicle is very close to the designed threshold level, the SRS front air-
bags and the seat belt pretensioners may not activate together.
The SRS front passenger airbag will not activate if there is no passenger
sitting in the front passenger seat. However, the front passenger airbag
may deploy if luggage is put in the seat, or the seat belt is fastened, even
if the seat is unoccupied. (P. 9 9 )
91
1-7. Safety information
1
Before driving
SRS airbag deployment conditions (side airbags and curtain shield air-
bags)
The SRS side airbags and SRS curtain shield airbags will deploy in the
event of an impact that exceeds the set threshold level (the level of force
corresponding to the impact force produced by a 3300 lb. [1500 kg] vehi-
cle colliding with the vehicle cabin from a direction perpendicular to the
vehicle orientation at a speed of 12 - 18 mph [20 - 30 km/h]).
The SRS side airbag on the passenger seat will not activate if there is no
passenger sitting in the front passenger seat. However, the side airbag
on the passenger seat may deploy if luggage is put in the seat, even if
the seat is unoccupied. (P. 99)
Conditions under which the SRS airbags may deploy (inflate), other
than a collision
The SRS front airbags may also deploy if a serious impact occurs to the
underside of your vehicle. Some examples are shown in the illustration.
Types of collisions that may not deploy the SRS airbag (front airbags)
The SRS front airbags are generally not designed to inflate if the vehicle is
involved in a side or rear collision, if it rolls over, or if it is involved in a low-
speed frontal collision. But, whenever a collision of any type causes suffi-
cient forward deceleration of the vehicle, deployment of the SRS front air-
bags may occur.
Hitting a curb, edge of pavement or
hard surface
Falling into or jumping over a deep hole
Landing hard or vehicle falling
Collision from the side
Collision from the rear
Vehicle rollover
92
1-7. Safety information
Types of collisions that may not deploy the SRS airbag
(side airbags and curtain shield airbags)
The SRS side airbags and curtain shield airbag system may not activate if
the vehicle is subjected to a collision from the side at certain angles, or a col-
lision to the side of the vehicle body other than the passenger compartment.
The SRS side airbags and curtain shield airbags are not generally designed
to inflate if the vehicle is involved in a frontal or rear collision, if it rolls over,
or if it is involved in a low-speed side collision.
Collision from the side to the vehicle
body other than the passenger com-
partment
Collision from the side at an angle
Collision from the front
Collision from the rear
Vehicle rollover
93
1-7. Safety information
1
Before driving
When to contact your Toyota dealer
In the following cases, contact your Toyota dealer as soon as possible. Do
not disconnect the battery cables before contacting your Toyota dealer.
Any of the SRS airbags have been inflated.
The front of the vehicle is damaged or
deformed, or was involved in an acci-
dent that was not severe enough to
cause the SRS airbags to inflate.
A portion of a door is damaged or
deformed, or the vehicle was involved
in an accident that was not severe
enough to cause the SRS side airbags
and curtain shield airbags to inflate.
The pad section of the steering wheel
or dashboard or lower portion of the
instrument panel is scratched, cracked,
or otherwise damaged.
The surface of the seats with the side
airbag is scratched, cracked, or other-
wise damaged.
The portion of the front pillars, rear pil-
lars or roof side rail garnishes (padding)
containing the curtain shield airbags
inside is scratched, cracked or other-
wise damaged.
94
1-7. Safety information
CAUTION
SRS airbag precautions
Observe the following precautions regarding the airbags.
Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.
The driver and all passengers in the vehicle must wear their seat belts
properly.
The SRS airbags are supplemental devices to be used with the seat belts.
The SRS driver airbag deploys with considerable force, and can cause
death or serious injury especially if the driver is very close to the airbag.
The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (“NHTSA”) advises:
Since the risk zone for the driver’s airbag is the first 2 - 3 in. (50 - 75 mm)
of inflation, placing yourself 10 in. (250 mm) from your driver airbag pro-
vides you with a clear margin of safety. This distance is measured from the
center of the steering wheel to your breastbone. If you sit less than 10 in.
(250 mm) away now, you can change your driving position in several
ways:
Move your seat to the rear as far as you can while still reaching the
pedals comfortably.
Slightly recline the back of the seat.
Although vehicle designs vary, many drivers can achieve the 10 in.
(250 mm) distance, even with the driver seat all the way forward, sim-
ply by reclining the back of the seat somewhat. If reclining the back of
your seat makes it hard to see the road, raise yourself by using a firm,
non-slippery cushion, or raise the seat if your vehicle has that feature.
If your steering wheel is adjustable, tilt it downward. This points the air-
bag toward your chest instead of your head and neck.
The seat should be adjusted as recommended by NHTSA above, while
still maintaining control of the foot pedals, steering wheel, and your view of
the instrument panel controls.
95
1-7. Safety information
1
Before driving
CAUTION
SRS airbag precautions
The SRS front passenger airbag also deploys with considerable force, and
can cause death or serious injury especially if the front passenger is very
close to the airbag. The front passenger seat should be as far from the air-
bag as possible with the seatback adjusted, so the front passenger sits
upright.
Improperly seated and/or restrained infants and children can be killed or
seriously injured by a deploying airbag. An infant or child who is too small
to use a seat belt should be properly secured using a child restraint sys-
tem. Toyota strongly recommends that all infants and children be placed in
the rear seats of the vehicle and properly restrained. The rear seats are
the safest for infants and children. (P. 104)
If the seat belt extender has been con-
nected to the driver's seat belt buckle
but the seat belt extender has not also
been fastened to the latch plate of the
driver's seat belt, the SRS driver's air-
bag system will judge that the driver is
wearing the seat belt even though the
seat belt has not been connected. In
this case, the driver's airbag may not
activate correctly in a collision, resulting
in death or serious injury in the event of
collision. Be sure to wear the seat belt
with the seat belt extender.
Do not sit on the edge of the seat or
lean against the dashboard.
96
1-7. Safety information
CAUTION
SRS airbag precautions
Do not allow a child to stand in front of
the SRS front passenger airbag unit or
sit on the knees of a front passenger.
Do not drive the vehicle while the driver
or passenger has items resting on their
knees.
Do not lean against the door, the roof
side rail or the front, side and rear pil-
lars.
Do not allow anyone to kneel on the
passenger seat toward the door or put
their head or hands outside the vehicle.
Do not attach anything to or lean any-
thing against areas such as the dash-
board, steering wheel pad or lower
portion of the instrument panel.
These items can become projectiles
when SRS driver, front passenger and
knee airbags deploy.
97
1-7. Safety information
1
Before driving
CAUTION
SRS airbag precautions
If a vinyl cover is put on the area where the SRS knee airbag will deploy,
be sure to remove it.
Do not use seat accessories which cover the parts where the SRS side
airbags inflate as they may interfere with inflation of the airbags.
Do not strike or apply significant levels of force to the area of the SRS air-
bag components (P. 88).
Doing so can cause the SRS airbags to malfunction.
Do not touch any of the component parts immediately after the SRS air-
bags have deployed (inflated) as they may be hot.
Do not attach anything to areas such as
the door, windshield glass, side door
glass, front and rear pillars, roof side
rail or assist grip.
Do not hang coat hangers or other hard
objects on the coat hooks. All of these
items could become projectiles and
seriously injure or kill you, should the
SRS curtain shield airbag deploy.
Vehicles without smart key system: Do
not attach any heavy, sharp or hard
objects such as keys or accessories to
the key. The objects may restrict the
SRS knee airbag inflation or be thrust
into the driver's seat area by the force
of the deploying airbag, thus causing a
danger.
98
1-7. Safety information
CAUTION
SRS airbag precautions
If breathing becomes difficult after the SRS airbag has deployed, open a
door or window to allow fresh air in, or leave the vehicle if it is safe to do
so. Wash off any residue as soon as possible to prevent skin irritation.
If the areas where the SRS airbags are stored, such as the steering wheel
pad and front and rear pillars garnishes, are damaged or cracked, have
them replaced by your Toyota dealer.
Modification and disposal of SRS airbag system components
Do not dispose of your vehicle or perform any of the following modifications
without consulting your Toyota dealer.
The SRS airbags may malfunction or deploy (inflate) accidentally, causing
death or serious injury.
Installation, removal, disassembly and repair of the SRS airbags.
Repairs, modifications, removal or replacement of the steering wheel,
instrument panel, dashboard, seats or seat upholstery, front, side and rear
pillars or roof side rail.
Repairs or modifications of the front fender, front bumper, or side of the
occupant compartment.
Installation of snow plows, winches, etc. to the front grille (bull bars, kan-
garoo bar etc.).
Modifications to the vehicle's suspension system.
Installation of electronic devices such as mobile two-way radios or CD
players.
Modifications to your vehicle for a person with a physical disability.
99
1
1-7. Safety information
Before driving
Front passenger occupant classification system
Your vehicle is equipped with a front passenger occupant classifica-
tion system. This system detects the conditions of the front passen-
ger seat and activates or deactivates the devices for the front
passenger.
SRS warning light
“AIR BAG OFF” indicator light
“AIR BAG ON” indicator light
Front passenger's seat belt reminder light
100
1-7. Safety information
Conditions and operation of the front passenger occupant classification system
Adult*1
Child*3 or child restraint system*4
Indicator/
warning light
“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF” indicator
lights
“AIR BAG
ON”
SRS warning light Off
Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light Flashing*2
Devices
Front passenger airbag
Activated
Side airbag on the front
passenger seats
Curtain shield airbag in the front
passenger side
Front passenger’s seat belt pretensioner
Indicator/
warning light
“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF” indicator
lights
“AIR BAG
OFF”*5
SRS warning light Off
Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light Flashing*2
Devices
Front passenger airbag
Deactivated
Side airbag on the front
passenger seats
Curtain shield airbag in the front
passenger side Activated
Front passenger’s seat belt pretensioner
101
1-7. Safety information
1
Before driving
Unoccupied
There is a malfunction in the system
*1: The system judges a person of adult size as an adult. When a
smaller adult sits in the front passenger seat, the system may rec-
ognize him/her as a child depending on his/her physique and pos-
ture.
*2: In the event the front passenger does not wear a seat belt.
*3: When a larger child who has outgrown a child restraint system
sits in the front passenger seat, the system may recognize him/
her as an adult depending on his/her physique or posture.
Indicator/
warning light
“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF” indicator
lights Not illuminated
SRS warning light Off
Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light
Devices
Front passenger airbag
Deactivated
Side airbag on the front
passenger seats
Curtain shield airbag in the front
passenger side Activated
Front passenger’s seat belt pretensioner Deactivated
Indicator/
warning light
“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF” indicator
lights
“AIR BAG
OFF”
SRS warning light On
Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light Off
Devices
Front passenger airbag
Deactivated
Side airbag on the front
passenger seats
Curtain shield airbag in the front
passenger side Activated
Front passenger’s seat belt pretensioner
102
1-7. Safety information
*4: Never install a rear-facing child restraint system on the front pas-
senger seat. A forward-facing child restraint system should only
be installed on the front passenger seat when it is unavoidable.
(P. 104)
*5: In case the indicator is not illuminated, consult this manual as for
installing the child restraint system properly. (P. 108)
CAUTION
Front passenger occupant classification system precautions
Observe the following precautions regarding the front passenger occupant
classification system.
Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.
Wear the seat belt properly.
Make sure the front passenger’s seat belt tab has not been left inserted
into the buckle before someone sits in the front passenger seat.
Make sure the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is not illuminated when using
the seat belt extender for the front passenger seat. If the “AIR BAG OFF”
indicator light is illuminated, disconnect the extender tongue from the seat
belt buckle, then reconnect the seat belt. Reconnect the seat belt extender
after making sure the “AIR BAG ON” indicator light is illuminated. If you
use the seat belt extender while the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is illumi-
nated, the front passenger airbag, side airbag on the front passenger side
airbag may not activate correctly, which could cause death or serious
injury in the event of collision.
Do not apply a heavy load to the front passenger seat or equipment.
Do not put weight on the front passenger seat by putting your hands or
feet on the front passenger seat seatback from the rear passenger seat.
Do not let a rear passenger lift the front passenger seat with their feet or
press on the seatback with their legs.
Do not put objects under the front passenger seat.
103
1-7. Safety information
1
Before driving
CAUTION
Front passenger occupant classification system precautions
Do not recline the front passenger seatback so far that it touches a rear
seat. This may cause the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light to be illuminated,
which indicates that the passenger’s airbags will not deploy in the event of
a severe accident. If the seatback touches the rear seat, return the seat-
back to a position where it does not touch the rear seat. Keep the front
passenger seatback as upright as possible when the vehicle is moving.
Reclining the seatback excessively may lessen the effectiveness of the
seat belt system.
If an adult sits in the front passenger seat, the “AIR BAG ON” indicator
light is illuminated. If the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator is illuminated, ask the
passenger to sit up straight, well back in the seat, feet on the floor, and
with the seat belt worn correctly. If the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator still
remain illuminated, either ask the passenger to move to the rear seat, or if
that is not possible, move the front passenger seat fully rearward.
When it is unavoidable to install the forward-facing child restraint system
on the front passenger seat, install the child restraint system on the front
passenger seat in the proper order. (P. 108)
Do not modify or remove the front seats.
Do not kick the front passenger seat or subject it to severe impact. Other-
wise, the SRS warning light may come on to indicate a malfunction of the
detection system. In this case, contact your Toyota dealer immediately.
Child restraint systems installed on the rear seat should not contact the
front seatbacks.
Do not use a seat accessory, such as a cushion or seat cover, that covers
the seat cushion surface.
Do not modify or replace the upholstery of the front seat.
104
1-7. Safety information
Child restraint systems
Points to remember
Studies have shown that installing a child restraint system on a rear
seat is much safer than installing one to the front passenger seat.
Choose a child restraint system that suits your vehicle and is
appropriate to the age and size of the child.
For installation details, follow the instructions provided with the
child restraint system.
General installation instructions are provided in this manual.
(P. 108)
A child restraint system for a small child or baby must be properly
restrained on the seat with the lap portion of the lap/shoulder belt.
The laws of all 50 states of U.S.A. and Canada now require the use of
child restraint systems.
105
1-7. Safety information
1
Before driving
Types of child restraints
Child restraint systems are classified into the following 3 types
according to the age and size of the child.
Rear facing Infant seat/convertible seat
Forward facing Convertible seat
Booster seat
106
1-7. Safety information
Selecting an appropriate child restraint system
Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child until the child
becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle’s seat belt.
If a child is too large for a child restraint system, sit the child on a rear
seat and use the vehicle's seat belt. (P. 57)
CAUTION
Child restraint precautions
For effective protection in automobile accidents and sudden stops, a child
must be properly restrained, using a seat belt or child restraint system
depending on the age and size of the child. Holding a child in your arms is
not a substitute for a child restraint system. In an accident, the child can be
crushed against the windshield, or between you and the vehicle's interior.
Toyota strongly urges the use of a proper child restraint system that con-
forms to the size of the child, installed on the rear seat. According to acci-
dent statistics, the child is safer when properly restrained in the rear seat
than in the front seat.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint system on the front passenger
seat even if the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is illuminated. In the event
of an accident, the force of the rapid inflation of the front passenger airbag
can cause death or serious injury to the child if the rear-facing child
restraint system is installed on the front passenger seat.
A forward-facing child restraint system may be installed on the front pas-
senger seat only when it is unavoidable. A child restraint system that
requires a top tether strap should not be used in the front passenger seat
since there is no top tether strap anchor for the front passenger seat.
Adjust the seatback as upright as possible and always move the seat as
far back as possible even if the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is illumi-
nated, because the front passenger airbag could inflate with considerable
speed and force. Otherwise, the child may be killed or seriously injured.
107
1-7. Safety information
1
Before driving
CAUTION
Child restraint precautions
Do not use the seat belt extender when installing a child restraint system
on the front or rear passenger seat. If installing a child restraint system
with the seat belt extender connected to the seat belt, the seat belt will not
securely hold the child restraint system, which could cause death or seri-
ous injury to the child or other passengers in the event of a sudden stop,
sudden swerve or collision.
Do not allow the child to lean his/her head or any part of his/her body
against the door or the area of the seat, front and rear pillars or roof side
rail from which the side airbags or curtain shield airbags deploy even if the
child is seated in the child restraint system. It is dangerous if the side air-
bags and curtain shield airbags inflate, and the impact could cause death
or serious injury to the child.
Make sure you have complied with all installation instructions provided by
the child restraint manufacturer and that the system is properly secured. If
it is not secured properly, it may cause death or serious injury to the child
in the event of a sudden stop, sudden swerve or an accident.
Child restraint lock function belt precaution
Do not allow children to play with the child restraint lock function belt. If the
belt becomes twisted around a child’s neck, it will not be possible to pull the
belt out leading to choking or other serious injuries that could result in death.
If this occurs and the buckle cannot be unfastened, scissors should be used
to cut the belt.
When the child restraint system is not in use
Keep the child restraint system properly secured on the seat even if it is
not in use.
Do not store the restraint unsecured in the passenger compartment.
If it is necessary to detach the child restraint system, remove it from the
vehicle or store it securely in the trunk. This will prevent it from injuring
passengers in the event of a sudden stop, sudden swerve or accident.
108
1-7. Safety information
Installing child restraints
Follow the child restraint system manufacturer's instructions. Firmly
secure child restraints to the outside rear seats using the LATCH
anchors or a seat belt. Attach the top tether strap when installing a
child restraint.
The lap/shoulder belt can be used if your child restraint system is
not compatible with the LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for Chil-
dren) system.
Child restraint LATCH anchors
LATCH anchors are provided
for the outside rear seats. (But-
tons displaying the location of
the anchors are attached to the
seats.)
Seat belts equipped with a
child restraint locking mecha-
nism (ALR/ELR belts except
driver’s seat belt) (P. 57)
109
1-7. Safety information
1
Before driving
Installation with LATCH system
Vehicles with reclining type rear seat: Adjust the seatback as
upright as possible.
Type A
Widen the gap between
the seat cushion and
seatback slightly.
Latch the hooks of the
lower straps onto the
LATCH anchors.
If the child restraint has a
top tether strap, the top
tether strap should be
latched onto the top
tether strap anchor.
For owners in Canada:
A symbol on a child restraint sys-
tem indicates the presence of a
lower connector system.
Anchor bracket (for top tether
strap)
Anchor brackets are provided
for all rear seats.
STEP
1
Canada only
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
110
1-7. Safety information
Type B
Widen the gap between
the seat cushion and
seatback slightly.
Latch the buckles onto
the LATCH anchors.
If the child restraint has a
top tether strap, the top
tether strap should be
latched onto the top
tether strap anchor.
For owners in Canada:
A symbol on a child restraint sys-
tem indicates the presence of a
lower connector system.
Canada only
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
111
1-7. Safety information
1
Before driving
Installing child restraints using a seat belt (child restraint lock function belt)
Rear facing Infant seat/convertible seat
Place the child seat on the rear
seat facing the rear of the vehi-
cle.
Run the seat belt through the
child seat and insert the plate
into the buckle. Make sure that
the belt is not twisted.
Fully extend the shoulder belt
and then allow it to retract
slightly in order to activate the
ALR lock mode.
Lock mode allows the seat belt to
retract only.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
112
1-7. Safety information
While pushing the child seat
down into the rear seat, allow the
shoulder belt to retract until the
child seat is securely in place.
After the shoulder belt has
retracted to a point where there is
no slack in the belt, pull the belt to
check that in cannot be extended.
Forward facing Convertible seat
Place the child seat on the seat
facing the front of the vehicle.
Run the seat belt through the
child seat and insert the plate
into the buckle. Make sure that
the belt is not twisted.
Fully extend the shoulder strap
and then allow it to retract
slightly into the ALR lock mode.
Lock mode allows the seat belt to
retract only.
STEP
4
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
113
1-7. Safety information
1
Before driving
While pushing the child seat into
the rear seat, allow the shoulder
belt to retract until the child seat
is securely in place.
After the shoulder belt has
retracted to a point where there is
no slack in the belt, pull the belt to
check that it cannot be extended.
If the child restraint has a top tether strap, the top tether strap
should be latched onto the top tether strap anchor. (P. 114)
Booster seat
Place the booster seat on the
seat facing the front of the vehi-
cle.
Sit the child in the booster seat.
Fit the seat belt to the booster
seat according to the manufac-
turer's instructions and insert the
plate into the buckle. Make sure
that the belt is not twisted.
Check that the shoulder belt is
correctly positioned over the
child's shoulder, and that the lap
belt is as low as possible.
(P. 57)
STEP
4
STEP
5
STEP
1
STEP
2
114
1-7. Safety information
Removing a child restraint installed with a seat belt
Push the release button and fully
retract the seat belt.
Child restraint systems with a top tether strap
Secure the child restraint using
the seat belt or LATCH anchors.
Remove the head restraint.
Open the anchor bracket cover,
latch the hook onto the anchor
bracket and tighten the top tether
strap.
Make sure the top tether strap is
securely latched.
STEP
1
STEP
2
115
1-7. Safety information
1
Before driving
Laws and regulations pertaining to anchorages
The LATCH system conforms to FMVSS225 or CMVSS210.2.
Child restraint systems conforming to FMVSS213 or CMVSS213 specifica-
tions can be used.
This vehicle is designed to conform to the SAE J1819.
CAUTION
When installing a booster seat
Do not fully extend the shoulder belt to prevent the belt from going to ALR
lock mode: (P. 60)
ALR mode causes the belt to tighten only which could cause injury or dis-
comfort to the child.
116
1-7. Safety information
CAUTION
When installing a child restraint system
Follow the directions given in the child restraint system installation manual
and fix the child restraint system securely in place.
If the child restraint system is not correctly fixed in place, the child or other
passengers may be seriously injured or even killed in the event of sudden
braking, sudden swerving or an accident.
Vehicles with reclining type rear seat: When installing a child restraint sys-
tem in the rear center position, adjust both seatbacks as upright as possi-
ble. The seatbacks must be adjusted to the same angle. Otherwise, the
child restraint system cannot be securely restrained and this may cause
death or serious injuries in the event of sudden braking, sudden swerving
or an accident.
If the driver's seat interferes with the
child restraint system and prevents it
from being attached correctly, attach
the child restraint system to the right-
hand rear seat.
Adjust the front passenger seat so that
it does not interfere with the child
restraint system.
Only put a forward-facing or booster
child seat on the front seat when
unavoidable. When installing a forward-
facing or booster child seat on the front
passenger seat, move the seat as far
back as possible even if the “AIR BAG
OFF” indicator light is illuminated. Fail-
ing to do so may result in death or seri-
ous injury if the airbags deploy (inflate).
117
1-7. Safety information
1
Before driving
CAUTION
When installing a child restraint system
When a booster seat is installed, always ensure that the shoulder belt is
positioned across the center of the child's shoulder. The belt should be
kept away from the child's neck, but not so that it could fall off the child's
shoulder. Failing to do so may result in death or serious injury in the event
of sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident.
Ensure that the belt and tab are securely locked and the seat belt is not
twisted.
Push and pull the child seat from side to side and forward to be sure it is
secure.
After securing a child restraint system, never adjust the seat.
Follow all installation instructions provided by the child restraint system
manufacturer.
When a child restraint system with a top tether strap is installed, do not
install the head restraint. The head restraint may interfere with the top
tether strap preventing secure installation of the child restraint system.
Make sure to properly store the removed head restraint in a secure place
when you use the child restraint system on the rear seat.
Do not use a seat belt extender
If a seat belt extender is used when installing a child restraint system, the
seat belt will not securely hold the child restraint system, which could cause
death or serious injury to the child or other passengers in the event of sud-
den braking, sudden swerving or a collision.
To correctly attach a child restraint system to the anchors
When using the LATCH anchors, be sure that there are no foreign objects
around the anchors and that the seat belt is not caught behind the child
restraint system. Make sure the child restraint system is securely attached,
or it may cause death or serious injury to the child or other passengers in the
event of a sudden stop, sudden swerve or accident.
118
1-7. Safety information
120
2-1. Driving procedures
Driving the vehicle
The following procedures should be observed to ensure safe driv-
ing:
Starting the engine
P. 131, 135
Driving
Automatic transmission
With the brake pedal depressed, shift the shift lever to D.
(P. 138)
Release the parking brake. (P. 145)
Gradually release the brake pedal and gently depress the
accelerator pedal to accelerate the vehicle.
Manual transmission
With the clutch pedal fully depressed, shift the shift lever to
1. (P. 142)
Release the parking brake. (P. 145)
Gradually release the clutch pedal. At the same time, gently
depress the accelerator pedal to accelerate the vehicle.
Stopping
Automatic transmission
With the shift lever in D, depress the brake pedal.
If necessary, set the parking brake.
When the vehicle is stopped for an extended period of time, shift
the shift lever to P or N. (P. 138)
Manual transmission
With the clutch pedal fully depressed, depress the brake
pedal.
If necessary, set the parking brake.
When the vehicle is stopped for an extended period of time, shift
the shift lever to N. (P. 142)
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
1
STEP
2
121
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
Parking the vehicle
Automatic transmission
With the shift lever in D, depress the brake pedal.
Set the parking brake. (P. 145)
Shift the shift lever to P. (P. 138)
When parking on a hill, if necessary, block the wheels.
Vehicles with smart key system:
Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF and stop the
engine.
Vehicles without smart key system:
Turn the engine switch to the “LOCK” position and stop the
engine.
Lock the door, making sure that you have the key on your
person.
Manual transmission
With the clutch pedal fully depressed, depress the brake
pedal.
Set the parking brake. (P. 145)
Shift the shift lever to N. (P. 142)
When parking on a hill, shift the shift lever to 1 or R. If necessary,
block the wheels.
Turn the engine switch to the “LOCK” position and stop the
engine.
Lock the door, making sure that you have the key on your
person.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
STEP
5
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
STEP
5
122
2-1. Driving procedures
Starting on a steep uphill
Automatic transmission
Firmly set the parking brake and shift the shift lever to D.
Gently depress the accelerator pedal.
Release the parking brake.
Manual transmission
With the parking brake firmly set and the clutch pedal fully
depressed, shift the shift lever to 1.
Lightly depress the accelerator pedal at the same time as
gradually releasing the clutch pedal.
Release the parking brake.
Driving in the rain
Drive carefully when it is raining, because visibility will be reduced, the
windows may become fogged-up, and the road will be slippery.
Drive carefully when it starts to rain, because the road surface will be
especially slippery.
Refrain from high speeds when driving on an expressway in the rain,
because there may be a layer of water between the tires and the road
surface, preventing the steering and brakes from operating properly.
Breaking in your new Toyota
To extend the life of the vehicle, the following precautions are recommended
to observe:
For the first 186 miles (300 km):
Avoid sudden stops.
For the first 994 miles (1600 km):
Do not drive at extremely high speeds.
Avoid sudden acceleration.
Do not drive continuously in the low gears.
Do not drive at a constant speed for extended periods.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
123
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
Drum-in-disc type parking brake system
Your vehicle has a drum-in-disc type parking brake system. This type of
brake system needs bedding-down of the brake shoes periodically or when-
ever the parking brake shoes and/or drum are replaced. Have your Toyota
dealer perform the bedding down.
Operating your vehicle in a foreign country
Comply with the relevant vehicle registration laws and confirm the availability
of the correct fuel. (P. 484)
CAUTION
When starting the vehicle (vehicles with an automatic transmission)
Always keep your foot on the brake pedal while stopped with the engine run-
ning. This prevents the vehicle from creeping.
When driving the vehicle
Do not drive if you are unfamiliar with the location of the brake and accel-
erator pedals to avoid depressing the wrong pedal.
• Accidentally depressing the accelerator pedal instead of the brake
pedal will result in sudden acceleration that may lead to an accident
that could result in death or serious injury.
When backing up, you may twist your body around, leading to a diffi-
culty in operating the pedals. Make sure to operate the pedals properly.
Make sure to keep a correct driving posture even when moving the
vehicle only slightly, allowing you to depress the brake and accelerator
pedals properly.
Depress the brake pedal using your right foot. Depressing the brake
pedal using your left foot may delay response in an emergency, result-
ing in an accident.
Do not drive the vehicle over or stop the vehicle near flammable materials.
The exhaust system and exhaust gases can be extremely hot. This may
cause a fire if there is any flammable material nearby.
Vehicles with an automatic transmission: Do not let the vehicle roll back-
wards while the shift lever is in a driving position, or roll forward while the
shift lever is in R.
Doing so may cause the engine to stall or lead to poor brake and steering
performance, resulting in an accident or damage to the vehicle.
124
2-1. Driving procedures
CAUTION
If the smell of exhaust is noticed inside the vehicle, open the windows and
check that the trunk is closed. Large amounts of exhaust in the vehicle can
cause driver drowsiness and an accident, resulting in death or a serious
health hazard. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immedi-
ately.
On vehicles with an automatic transmission, do not shift the shift lever to P
while the vehicle is moving.
Doing so can damage the transmission and may result in a loss of vehicle
control.
Do not shift the shift lever to R while the vehicle is moving forward.
Doing so can damage the transmission and may result in a loss of vehicle
control.
Do not shift the shift lever to D (vehicles with an automatic transmission) or
1 (vehicles with a manual transmission) while the vehicle is moving back-
ward.
Doing so can damage the transmission and may result in a loss of vehicle
control.
Moving the shift lever to N while the vehicle is moving will disengage the
engine from the transmission. Engine braking is not available when N is
selected.
During normal driving, do not turn off the engine. Turning the engine off
while driving will not cause loss of steering or braking control, but the
power assist to these systems will be lost. This will make it more difficult to
steer and brake, so you should pull over and stop the vehicle as soon as it
is safe to do so.
However, in the event of an emergency, such as if it becomes impossible
to stop the vehicle in the normal way: P. 432
Use engine braking (downshift) to maintain a safe speed when driving
down a steep hill.
Using the brakes continuously may cause the brakes to overheat and lose
effectiveness. (P. 139)
125
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
CAUTION
When stopped on an inclined surface, use the brake pedal and parking
brake to prevent the vehicle from rolling backward or forward and causing
an accident.
Do not adjust the position of the steering wheel, the seat, or the inside or
outside rear view mirrors while driving.
Doing so may result in a loss of vehicle control that can cause accidents
that may result in death or serious injury.
Always check that all passengers' arms, heads or other parts of their bod-
ies are not outside the vehicle, as this may result in death or serious injury.
Do not drive in excess of the speed limit. Even if the legal speed limit per-
mits it, do not drive over 85 mph (140 km/h) unless your vehicle has high-
speed capability tires. Driving over 85 mph (140 km/h) may result in tire
failure, loss of control and possible injury. Be sure to consult a tire dealer
to determine whether the tires on your vehicle are high-speed capability
tires or not before driving at such speeds.
When driving on slippery road surfaces
Sudden braking, acceleration and steering may cause tire slippage and
reduce your ability to control the vehicle, resulting in an accident.
Sudden changes in engine speed, such as engine braking caused by up-
shifting or down-shifting, may cause the vehicle to skid, resulting in an
accident.
After driving through a puddle, lightly depress the brake pedal to make
sure that the brakes are functioning properly. Wet brake pads may prevent
the brakes from functioning properly. If the brakes on only one side are wet
and not functioning properly, steering control may be affected, resulting in
an accident.
When shifting the shift lever
Vehicles with an automatic transmission: Be careful not to shift the shift lever
with the accelerator pedal depressed.
This may lead to unexpected rapid acceleration of the vehicle that may
cause an accident and result in death or serious injury.
126
2-1. Driving procedures
CAUTION
When the vehicle is stopped
Do not race the engine.
If the vehicle is in any gear other than P (automatic transmission only) or N
the vehicle may accelerate suddenly and unexpectedly, and may cause an
accident.
Do not leave the vehicle with the engine running for a long time.
If such a situation cannot be avoided, park the vehicle in an open space
and check that exhaust fumes do not enter the vehicle interior.
Vehicles with an automatic transmission: Always keep a foot on the brake
pedal while the engine is running to prevent an accident caused by the
vehicle moving.
When the vehicle is parked
Do not leave glasses, cigarette lighters, spray cans, or soft drink cans in
the vehicle when it is in the sun.
Doing so may result in the following.
Gas may leak from a cigarette lighter or spray can, and may lead to a
fire.
The temperature inside the vehicle may cause the plastic lenses and
plastic material of eye glasses to deform or crack.
Soft drink cans may fracture, causing the contents to spray over the
interior of the vehicle, and may also cause a short circuit in the vehi-
cle's electrical components.
Always apply the parking brake, shift the shift lever to P (automatic trans-
mission only), stop the engine and lock the vehicle.
Do not leave the vehicle unattended while the engine is running.
Do not touch the exhaust pipe while the engine is running or immediately
after turning the engine off.
Doing so may cause burns.
Do not leave the engine running in an area with snow build-up, or where it
is snowing. If snowbanks build up around the vehicle while the engine is
running, exhaust gases may collect and enter the vehicle. This may lead
to death or a serious health hazard.
127
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
CAUTION
Exhaust gases
Exhaust gases include harmful carbon monoxide (CO) that is colorless and
odorless. Inhaling exhaust gases may lead to death or a serious health haz-
ard.
If the vehicle is in a poorly ventilated area, stop the engine. In a closed
area, such as a garage, exhaust gases may collect and enter the vehicle.
This may lead to death or a serious health hazard.
The exhaust should be checked occasionally. If there is a hole or crack
caused by corrosion, damage to a joint or abnormal exhaust noise, be
sure to have the vehicle inspected and repaired by your Toyota dealer.
Failure to do so may allow exhaust gases to enter the vehicle, resulting in
death or a serious health hazard.
When taking a nap in the vehicle
Always turn the engine off. Otherwise, you may accidentally move the shift
lever or depress the accelerator pedal, which could cause an accident or fire
due to engine overheating. Additionally, if the vehicle is parked in a poorly
ventilated area, exhaust gases may collect and enter the vehicle, leading to
death or a serious health hazard.
128
2-1. Driving procedures
CAUTION
When braking the vehicle
When the brakes are wet, drive more cautiously.
Braking distance increases when the brakes are wet, and may cause one
side of the vehicle to brake differently than the other side. Also the parking
brake may not securely hold the vehicle.
If the power brake assist function does not operate, do not follow other
vehicles closely and avoid downhills or sharp turns that require braking.
In this case, braking is still possible, but it will require more force on the
pedal than usual. Braking distance may also increase.
Do not pump the brake pedal if the engine stalls.
Each push on the brake pedal uses up the reserve for the power-assisted
brakes.
The brake system consists of 2 individual hydraulic systems: If one of the
systems fails, the other will still operate. In this case, the brake pedal
should be depressed more firmly than usual and braking distance
becomes longer.
Do not drive your vehicle with only a single brake system. Have your
brakes fixed immediately.
129
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
NOTICE
When driving the vehicle
Manual transmission
Do not shift gears unless the clutch pedal is fully depressed. After shifting,
do not release the clutch abruptly. Doing so may damage the clutch, trans-
mission and gears.
Do not rest your foot on the clutch pedal while driving.
Doing so may cause clutch trouble.
Do not use any gears other than the first gear when starting off and mov-
ing forward.
Doing so may damage the clutch.
Do not use the clutch to hold the vehicle when stopping on an uphill grade.
Doing so may damage the clutch.
Do not shift into reverse when the vehicle is still moving. Doing so may
damage the clutch, transmission and gears.
Automatic transmission
Do not use the accelerator pedal or depress the accelerator and brake ped-
als together to hold the vehicle on a hill.
When parking the vehicle
Vehicles with an automatic transmission: Always put the shift lever in P. Fail-
ure to do so may cause the vehicle to move or the vehicle may accelerate
suddenly if the accelerator pedal is accidentally depressed.
Avoiding damage to vehicle parts
Do not turn the steering wheel fully in either direction and hold it there for a
long time.
Doing so may damage the power steering motor.
When driving over bumps in the road, drive as slowly as possible to avoid
damaging the wheels, underside of the vehicle, etc.
130
2-1. Driving procedures
NOTICE
If you hear a squealing or scraping noise (brake pad wear limit indica-
tors)
Have the brake pads checked and replaced by your Toyota dealer as soon
as possible.
Rotor damage can result if the pads are not replaced when needed.
It is dangerous to drive the vehicle when the wear limits of the brake pads
and/or that of the brake discs are exceeded.
If you get a flat tire while driving
A flat or damaged tire may cause the following situations. Hold the steering
wheel firmly and gradually press the brake pedal to slow down the vehicle.
It may be difficult to control your vehicle.
The vehicle will make abnormal sounds.
The vehicle will behave abnormally.
Replace a flat tire with a new one. (P. 457)
When encountering flooded roads
Do not drive on a road that has flooded after heavy rain etc. Doing so may
cause the following serious damage to the vehicle.
Engine stalling
Short in electrical components
Engine damage caused by water immersion
In the event that you drive on a flooded road and the vehicle is flooded, be
sure to have your Toyota dealer check the following.
Brake function
Changes in quantity and quality of engine oil, and transaxle fluid etc.
Lubricant condition for the bearings and suspension joints (where possi-
ble) and the function of all joints, bearings, etc.
131
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
Engine (ignition) switch (vehicles with smart key system)
Performing the following operations when carrying the electronic
key on your person starts the engine or changes “ENGINE START
STOP” switch modes.
Starting the engine
Check that the parking brake is set.
Check that the shift lever is set in P.
Sit in the driver’s seat and firmly depress the brake pedal.
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch indicator turns green. If the
indicator does not turn green, the engine cannot be started.
Press the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch.
The engine will crank until it
starts or for up to 25 seconds,
whichever is less. If you press
and hold the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch, the engine will
keep cranking for about 30
seconds maximum.
Continue depressing the brake
pedal until the engine is com-
pletely started.
The engine can be started
from any mode.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
132
2-1. Driving procedures
Changing “ENGINE START STOP” switch mode
Modes can be changed by pressing the “ENGINE START STOP”
switch with the brake pedal released. (The mode changes each
time the switch is pressed.)
OFF*
Emergency flashers can be
used.
ACCESSORY mode
Some electrical components
such as the audio system can
be used.
The “ENGINE START STOP”
switch indicator turns amber.
IGNITION ON mode
All electrical components can
be used.
The “ENGINE START STOP”
switch indicator turns amber.
*: If the shift lever is in a position
other than “P” when turning off
the engine, the “ENGINE
START STOP” switch will be
turned to ACCESSORY mode,
not to OFF.
133
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
Steering lock release
If the engine does not start
The engine immobilizer system may not have been deactivated. (P. 80)
When the “ENGINE START STOP” switch indicator flashes in amber
The system may be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle inspected by your
Toyota dealer immediately.
Auto power OFF function
If the vehicle is left in ACCESSORY mode for more than an hour with the
shift lever in P, the “ENGINE START STOP” switch will automatically turn
OFF.
Key battery depletion
P. 32
When the electronic key battery is discharged
P. 401
Conditions affecting operation
P. 30
Note for the entry function
P. 33
Make sure that the steering wheel lock is
released.
To release the steering wheel lock, gently
turn the wheel left or right while pressing
the “ENGINE START STOP” switch.
If the steering wheel lock does not
release, the “ENGINE START STOP”
switch indicator will flash green.
134
2-1. Driving procedures
CAUTION
When starting the engine
Always start the engine while sitting in the driver's seat. Do not depress the
accelerator pedal while starting the engine under any circumstances.
Doing so may cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.
Stopping the engine in an emergency
If you want to stop the engine in an emergency while driving the vehicle,
push and hold the “ENGINE START STOP” switch for more than 3 seconds.
However, do not touch the "ENGINE START STOP" switch while driving
except in an emergency. Turning the engine off while driving will not cause
loss of steering or braking control, but the power assist to these systems will
be lost. This will make it more difficult to steer and brake, so you should pull
over and stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.
NOTICE
To prevent battery discharge
Do not leave the “ENGINE START STOP” switch in ACCESSORY or IGNI-
TION ON mode for long periods without the engine running.
When starting the engine
Do not race a cold engine.
If the engine becomes difficult to start or stalls frequently, have the engine
checked immediately.
135
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
Engine (ignition) switch (vehicles without smart key system)
Starting the engine
Automatic transmission
Check that the parking brake is set.
Check that the shift lever is set in P.
Sit in the driver’s seat and firmly depress the brake pedal.
Turn the engine switch to the “START” position and start
the engine.
Manual transmission
Check that the parking brake is set.
Check that the shift lever is set in N.
Firmly depress the clutch pedal.
Turn the engine switch to the “START” position and start
the engine.
Changing engine switch mode
“LOCK”
The steering wheel is locked
and the key can be removed.
(Vehicles with an automatic
transmission: The key can be
removed only when the shift
lever is in “P”.)
“ACC”
Some electrical components
such as the audio system can
be used.
“ON”
All electrical components can
be used.
“START”
For starting the engine.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
136
2-1. Driving procedures
Turning the key from “ACC” to “LOCK”
Steering lock release
If the engine does not start
The engine immobilizer system may not have been deactivated. (P. 80)
Key reminder buzzer
A buzzer sounds if the driver’s door is opened while the key is in the “LOCK”
position to remind you to remove the key.
CAUTION
When starting the engine
Always start the engine while sitting in the driver's seat. Do not depress the
accelerator while starting the engine under any circumstances.
Doing so may cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.
Caution when driving
Do not turn the engine switch to the “LOCK” position while driving. If, in an
emergency, you must turn the engine off while the vehicle is moving, turn the
key only to the “ACC” position.
Shift the shift lever to N (manual
transmission) or P (automatic
transmission). (P. 138, 142)
Push in the key and turn to the
“LOCK” position.
STEP
1
STEP
2
When starting the engine, the engine
switch may seem stuck in the “LOCK”
position. To free it, turn the key while turn-
ing the steering wheel slightly in either
direction.
137
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
NOTICE
To prevent battery discharge
Do not leave the key in the “ACC” or “ON” position for long periods if the
engine is not running.
When starting the engine
Do not crank for more than 30 seconds at a time. This may overheat the
starter and wiring systems.
Do not race a cold engine.
If the engine becomes difficult to start or stalls frequently, have the engine
checked immediately.
138
2-1. Driving procedures
Automatic transmission
Select a shift position appropriate for the driving conditions.
Shifting the shift lever
Vehicles with smart key system:
While the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION
ON mode, depress the brake pedal and move the shift lever.
Vehicles without smart key system:
While the engine switch is in the “ON” position, depress the
brake pedal and move the shift lever.
: If equipped
139
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
Changing shift ranges in S mode
When the shift lever is in the S position, the shift lever can be oper-
ated as follows:
Upshifting
Downshifting
The initial shift range in S mode is set automatically to 5 or 4 accord-
ing to vehicle speed. However, the initial shift range may be set to 3 if
AI-SHIFT has operated while the shift lever was in the D position.
(P. 141)
Shift position uses
*1: Shifting to the D position allows the system to select a gear suitable
for the driving conditions.
Setting the shift lever to the D position is recommended for normal
driving.
*2: Selecting shift ranges using S mode restricts the upper limit of the
possible gear ranges, controls engine braking force, and prevents
unnecessary upshifting.
Shift position Function
P Parking the vehicle or starting the engine
R Reversing
N Neutral
D Normal driving*1
SS mode driving*2
(P. 139)
140
2-1. Driving procedures
Shift ranges and their functions
A lower shift range will provide greater engine braking force than a
higher shift range.
Downshifting restrictions
To help ensure safety and driving performance, downshifting operation may
sometimes be restricted. In some circumstances, downshifting may not be
possible even when the shift lever is operated. (The warning buzzer will
sound twice.)
When driving with the cruise control system
Engine braking will not occur during shift range selection in the D position or
S mode, even when downshifting to range 5 or 4. (P. 166)
If the shift lever cannot be shifted from P
P. 467
Shift range Function
6A gear between 1 and 6 is automatically selected
according to vehicle speed and driving conditions.
5A gear between 1 and 5 is automatically selected
according to vehicle speed and driving conditions.
4A gear between 1 and 4 is automatically selected
according to vehicle speed and driving conditions.
3A gear between 1 and 3 is automatically selected
according to vehicle speed and driving conditions.
2A gear between 1 and 2 is automatically selected
according to vehicle speed and driving conditions.
1 Setting the gear at 1.
141
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
If the “S” indicator does not come on even after shifting the shift lever
to S
This may indicate a malfunction in the automatic transmission system. Have
the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately.
(In this situation, the vehicle will operate as if the shift lever is in D.)
S mode
When the shift range is 5 or lower, holding the shift lever toward “+” sets
the shift range to 6.
To prevent the engine from over-revving, upshifting may automatically
occur.
To protect the automatic transmission, a function is adopted that auto-
matically shifts to the top range when the temperature is too hot.
AI-SHIFT
The AI-SHIFT automatically shifts the gear to the suitable position according
to the driver performance and driving conditions.
The AI-SHIFT automatically operates when the shift lever is in the D posi-
tion. (Shifting the shift lever to the S position cancels the function.)
142
2-1. Driving procedures
Manual transmission
Shifting the shift lever
Fully depress the clutch pedal before operating the shift lever, and
then release it slowly.
Shifting the shift lever to R
Shift the shift lever to the R
position while lifting up the ring
section.
: If equipped
143
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
Maximum allowable speeds
Observe the following maximum allowable speeds in each gear when maxi-
mum acceleration is necessary.
mph (km/h)
NOTICE
To prevent damage to the transmission
Do not lift up the ring section except when shifting the lever to R.
Shift the shift lever to R only when the vehicle is stationary.
Shift position Maximum speed
1 32 (52)
2 56 (91)
3 83 (135)
4 118 (191)
5 130 (210)
Do not shift the shift lever to R without
depressing the clutch pedal.
144
2-1. Driving procedures
Turn signal lever
Turn signals can be operated when
Vehicles with smart key system
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in ON mode.
Vehicles without smart key system
The engine switch is in the “ON” position.
If the indicators flash faster than usual
Check that a light bulb in the front or rear turn signal lights has not burned
out.
Right turn
Left turn
Move and hold the lever
partway to signal a lane
change.
The right hand signal will flash
until you release the lever.
Move and hold the lever
partway to signal a lane
change.
The left hand signal will flash
until you release the lever.
145
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
Parking brake
NOTICE
Before driving
Fully release the parking brake.
Driving the vehicle with the parking brake set will lead to brake components
overheating, which may affect braking performance and increase brake
wear.
Manual transmission
Sets the parking brake
Fully apply the parking brake while depressing the brake pedal.
Releases the parking brake
Slightly raise the lever and lower it completely while pressing the but-
ton.
Automatic transmission
Sets the parking brake*
(Depressing the pedal again
releases the parking brake.)
*: Fully depress the parking
brake pedal with your left
foot while depressing the
brake pedal with your right
foot.
U.S.A. Canada
U.S.A. Canada
146
2-1. Driving procedures
Horn
After adjusting the steering wheel
Make sure that the steering wheel is securely locked.
The horn may not sound if the steering wheel is not securely locked.
(P. 65)
To sound the horn, press on or
close to the mark.
147
2
When driving
2-2. Instrument cluster
Gauges and meters
Vehicles with multi-information display
Vehicles with smart key system: The following gauges, meters and
displays illuminate when the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in
IGNITION ON mode.
Vehicles without smart key system: The following gauges, meters
and displays illuminate when the engine switch is in the “ON” posi-
tion.
Engine coolant temperature gauge
Displays the engine coolant temperature.
Tachometer
Displays the engine speed in revolutions per minute.
Speedometer
Displays the vehicle speed.
Multi-information display
P. 155
Fuel gauge
Displays the quantity of fuel remaining in the tank.
148
2-2. Instrument cluster
Odometer/trip meter/instrument panel light control and trip meter
reset button
Switches between odometer and trip meter displays. Pressing and
holding the button will reset the trip meter when the trip meter is being
displayed. To adjust the brightness of the instrument panel light, turn
the button. (P. 150)
Automatic transmission shift position indicator lights
P. 138
Automatic transmission shift range display
P. 138
149
2-2. Instrument cluster
2
When driving
Vehicles without multi-information display
The following gauges, meters and displays illuminate when the
engine switch is in the “ON” position.
Engine coolant temperature gauge
Displays the engine coolant temperature.
Tachometer
Displays the engine speed in revolutions per minute.
Speedometer
Displays the vehicle speed.
Fuel gauge
Displays the quantity of fuel remaining in the tank.
Odometer/trip meter/instrument panel light control and trip meter
reset button
Switches between odometer and trip meter displays. Pressing and
holding the button will reset the trip meter when the trip meter is being
displayed. To adjust the brightness of the instrument panel light, turn
the button. (P. 150)
150
2-2. Instrument cluster
Instrument panel light control
The brightness of the instrument panel lights can be adjusted.
Darker
Brighter
When the headlight switch is
turned to on, the brightness
will be reduced slightly unless
the control dial is turned fully
clockwise.
Odometer, trip meter and outside temperature display
Odometer: Displays the total distance the vehicle has been driven.
Trip meter: Displays the distance the vehicle has been driven since the
meter was last reset. Trip meters A and B can be used to record and
display different distances independently.
Outside temperature: Displays the outside temperature.
Automatic transmission shift position indicator lights
P. 138
Automatic transmission shift range display
P. 138
NOTICE
To prevent damage to the engine and its components
Do not let the indicator needle of the tachometer enter the red zone, which
indicates the maximum engine speed.
The engine may be overheating if the engine coolant temperature gauge is
in the red zone (H). In this case, immediately stop the vehicle in a safe
place, and check the engine after it has cooled completely. (P. 475)
151
2-2. Instrument cluster
2
When driving
Indicators and warning lights
The indicator and warning lights on the instrument cluster and cen-
ter panel inform the driver of the status of the vehicle’s various sys-
tems.
Instrument cluster (vehicles with multi-information display)
Instrument cluster (vehicles without multi-information display)
152
2-2. Instrument cluster
Center panel
153
2-2. Instrument cluster
2
When driving
Indicators
The indicators inform the driver of the operating state of the
vehicle’s various systems.
Turn signal indicator
(P. 144)
(U.S.A.)
Headlight indicator
(P. 159)
Headlight high beam
indicator (P. 160)
(CANADA)
Tail light indicator
(P. 159)
Slip indicator
(P. 170)
(if equipped)
Front fog light indicator
(P. 163)
VSC OFF indicator
(P. 171)
SRS airbag on-off indi-
cator (P. 99)
“TRAC OFF” indicator
(P. 171)
Cruise control indicator
(P. 166)
Engine immobilizer/
alarm system indicator
(P. 80, 82)
Cruise control set indi-
cator (P. 166)
*
*
*
*
154
2-2. Instrument cluster
CAUTION
If a safety system warning light does not come on
Should a safety system light such as the ABS or the SRS airbag warning
light not come on when you start the engine, this could mean that these sys-
tems are not available to help protect you in an accident, which could result
in death or serious injury. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer
immediately if this occurs.
Warning lights
Warning lights inform the driver of malfunctions in any of the
vehicle’s systems. (P. 432)
*: These lights turn on when the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is
turned to IGNITION ON mode (vehicles with smart key system) or
the engine switch is turned to the “ON” position (vehicles without
smart key system) to indicate that a system check is being per-
formed. They will turn off after the engine is started, or after a few
seconds. There may be a malfunction in a system if a light does not
come on, or if the lights do not turn off. Have the vehicle inspected
by your Toyota dealer for details.
(CANADA) (U.S.A.) (if equipped) (CANADA) (U.S.A.) (CANADA)
(U.S.A.) (U.S.A.) (U.S.A.) (if equipped) (if equipped)
(if equipped)
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
155
2-2. Instrument cluster
2
When driving
Multi-information display
The multi-information display presents the driver with a variety of
driving-related data, including the outside temperature.
Outside temperature dis-
play (P. 156)
Indicates the outside tempera-
ture.
Trip information
(P. 156)
Displays driving range, fuel
consumption and other cruis-
ing-related information.
Warning messages
(P. 444)
Automatically displayed when
a malfunction occurs in one of
the vehicle’s systems.
Odometer and trip meter
display
Odometer: Displays the total
distance the vehicle has been
driven.
Trip meter: Displays the dis-
tance the vehicle has been
driven since the meter was last
reset. Trip meters A and B can
be used to record and display
different distances indepen-
dently.
: If equipped
156
2-2. Instrument cluster
Switch the display
Display items can be switched
by pressing the “DISP” button.
The display will return to the out-
side temperature display when
the “DISP” button is pressed and
held.
Outside temperature
Cruising range
Average fuel consumption after refueling
Displays the outside air temperature.
The temperature range that can be displayed is from
-40°F (-40°C) to 122°F (50°C).
Displays the estimated maximum distance that
can be driven with the quantity of fuel remaining.
This distance is computed based on your average
fuel consumption. As a result, the actual distance
that can be driven may differ from that displayed.
When only a small amount of fuel is added to the
tank, the display may not be updated.
Displays the average fuel consumption since the
vehicles was last refueled.
157
2-2. Instrument cluster
2
When driving
Driving distance
Average vehicle speed
Cruise information off
Zoom display of odometer and trip meter
Displays the driving distance since the engine was
started.
Displays the average vehicle speed since the
engine was started.
Displays the odometer and trip meters only.
Displays the odometer and one of the trip meters
simultaneously.
Outside temperature display
In the following situations, the correct outside temperature may not be dis-
played, or the display may take longer than normal to change.
When stopped, or driving at low speeds (less than 12 mph [20 km/h])
When the outside temperature has changed suddenly (at the entrance/
exit of a garage, tunnel, etc.)
158
2-2. Instrument cluster
NOTICE
The multi-information display at low temperatures
Allow the interior of the vehicle to warm up before using the liquid crystal
information display. At extremely low temperatures, the information display
monitor may respond slowly, and display changes may be delayed.
159
2
When driving
2-3. Operating the lights and wipers
Headlight switch
The headlights can be operated manually or automatically.
For U.S.A.
The side marker, park-
ing, tail, license plate
and instrument panel
lights turn on.
The headlights and all
lights listed above turn
on.
The headlights and
parking lights turn on
and off automatically.
(When the “ENGINE
START STOP” switch
or the engine switch is
in ON)
Daytime running light
system is off.
160
2-3. Operating the lights and wipers
Turning on the high beam headlights
With the headlights on, push
the lever forward to turn on the
high beams.
Pull the lever back to the center
position to turn the high beams
off.
Pull the lever toward you to
turn on the high beams.
Release the lever to turn them off.
You can flash the high beams
with the headlights on or off.
For Canada
The side marker, park-
ing, tail, license plate
and instrument panel
lights turn on.
The headlights and all
lights listed above turn
on.
The headlights and
parking lights turn on
and off automatically.
(When the “ENGINE
START STOP” switch
or the engine switch is
in ON)
161
2-3. Operating the lights and wipers
2
When driving
The headlights can be operated automatically when
Vehicles with smart key system
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
Vehicles without smart key system
The engine switch is in the “ON” position.
Daytime running light system
To make your vehicle more visible to other drivers, the headlights turn on
automatically (at a reduced intensity) whenever the engine is started and the
parking brake is released. Daytime running lights are not designed for use at
night.
For U.S.A.: Daytime running lights can be turned off by operating the switch.
Headlight control sensor
The sensor may not function properly if
an object is placed on the sensor, or any-
thing that blocks the sensor is affixed to
the windshield.
Doing so interferes with the sensor
detecting the level of ambient light and
may cause the automatic headlight sys-
tem to malfunction.
162
2-3. Operating the lights and wipers
Automatic light off system
Vehicles with smart key system
When the headlights are on: The headlights and tail lights turn off 30 sec-
onds after all doors are closed with the “ENGINE START STOP” switch
OFF. (The lights turn off immediately if on the key is pressed after
all doors are locked.)
When only the tail lights are on: The tail lights turn off automatically if the
“ENGINE START STOP” switch is turned OFF and the driver’s door is
opened.
To turn the lights on again, turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to IGNI-
TION ON mode, or turn the headlight switch off and then back to or
position.
If any of the doors or trunk lid is kept open, the lights automatically turn off
after 20 minutes.
Vehicles without smart key system
When the headlights are on: The headlights and tail lights turn off 30 sec-
onds after all doors are closed with the engine switch OFF. (Vehicles with
wireless remote control: The lights turn off immediately if on the
key is pressed after all doors are locked.)
When only the tail lights are on: The tail lights turn off automatically if the
engine switch is turned OFF and the driver’s door is opened.
To turn the lights on again, turn the engine switch to the “ON” position, or
turn the headlight switch off and then back to or position.
If any of the doors or trunk lid is kept open, the lights automatically turn off
after 20 minutes.
Customization that can be configured at Toyota dealer
Settings (e.g. Light sensor sensitivity) can be changed.
(Customizable features P. 510)
NOTICE
To prevent battery discharge
Do not leave the lights on longer than necessary when the engine is not run-
ning.
163
2-3. Operating the lights and wipers
2
When driving
Fog light switch
The fog lights improve visibility in difficult driving conditions, such
as in rain or fog. They can be turned on only when the headlights are
on low beam.
Off
Front fog lights on
: If equipped
164
2-3. Operating the lights and wipers
Windshield wipers and washer
Wiper intervals can be adjusted for intermittent operation.
Intermittent windshield
wiper operation
Low speed windshield wiper
operation
High speed windshield
wiper operation
Temporary operation
Increases the intermittent
windshield wiper frequency
Decreases the intermittent
windshield wiper frequency
165
2-3. Operating the lights and wipers
2
When driving
The windshield wiper and washers can be operated when
Vehicles with smart key system
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
Vehicles without smart key system
The engine switch is in the “ON” position.
If no windshield washer fluid sprays
Check that the washer nozzles are not blocked and if there is washer fluid in
the windshield washer fluid reservoir.
NOTICE
When the windshield is dry
Do not use the wipers, as they may damage the windshield.
When there is no washer fluid spray from the nozzle
Damage to the washer fluid pump may be caused if the lever is pulled
toward you and held continually.
When a nozzle becomes blocked
Do not try to clear it with a pin or other object. The nozzle will be damaged.
Wash/wipe operation
Wipers operate automatically.
166
2-4. Using other driving systems
Cruise control
Use the cruise control to maintain a set speed without using the
accelerator.
Indicators
Cruise control switch
Setting the vehicle speed
Turn the “ON-OFF” button on.
At this time, the cruise control
indicator will come on.
Press the button once more to
deactivate the cruise control.
Accelerate or decelerate to
the desired speed and push
the lever down to set the
cruise control speed.
At this time, the cruise control
set indicator will come on.
STEP
1
STEP
2
167
2-4. Using other driving systems
2
When driving
Adjusting the speed setting
Increase speed
Decrease speed
Hold the lever until the desired
speed setting is obtained.
Fine adjustment of the set
speed (approximately 1.0 mph
[1.6 km/h]) can be made by
lightly pushing the lever up or
down and releasing it.
Canceling and resuming regular acceleration
Cancel
Pull the lever towards you to
cancel cruise control.
The speed setting is also can-
celed when the brakes are
applied or the clutch pedal
(manual transmission) is
depressed.
Resume
To resume cruise control and
return to the set speed, push
the lever up.
168
2-4. Using other driving systems
Cruise control can be set when
Automatic transmission:
The shift lever is in D, 4, 5 or 6 range of S.
Vehicle speed is above 25 mph (40 km/h).
Accelerating
The vehicle can be accelerated normally. After acceleration, the set speed
resumes.
Automatic cruise control cancellation
The set speed is automatically canceled in any of the following situations.
Actual vehicle speed falls more than 10 mph (16 km/h) below the preset
vehicle speed.
At this time, the memorized set speed is not retained.
Actual vehicle speed is below 25 mph (40 km/h).
VSC is activated.
If the cruise control indicator light flashes
Press the “ON-OFF” button once to deactivate the system, and then press
the button again to reactivate the system.
If the cruise control speed cannot be set or if the cruise control cancels
immediately after being activated, there may be a malfunction in the cruise
control system. Contact your Toyota dealer and have your Toyota inspected.
169
2-4. Using other driving systems
2
When driving
CAUTION
To avoid operating the cruise control by mistake
Keep the “ON-OFF” button off when not in use.
Situations unsuitable for cruise control
Do not use cruise control in any of the following situations.
Doing so may result in control of the vehicle being lost and could cause an
accident resulting in death or serious injury.
In heavy traffic
On roads with sharp bends
On winding roads
On slippery roads, such as those covered with rain, ice or snow
On steep hills
170
2-4. Using other driving systems
Driving assist systems
When VSC and TRAC are operating
If the vehicle is in danger of slip-
ping or the front wheels spin, the
indicator flashes to indicate that
VSC/TRAC have been engaged.
A buzzer (intermittent) sounds to
indicate that VSC is operating.
To help enhance driving safety and performance, the following sys-
tems operate automatically in response to various driving situations.
Be aware, however, that these systems are supplementary and
should not be relied upon too heavily when operating the vehicle.
ABS (Anti-lock Brake System)
Helps to prevent wheel lock when the brakes are applied suddenly, or if
the brakes are applied while driving on a slippery road surface.
Brake assist
Generates an increased level of braking force after the brake pedal is
depressed, when the system detects a panic stop situation.
VSC (Vehicle Stability Control)
Helps the driver to control skidding when swerving suddenly or turning
on slippery road surfaces.
TRAC (Traction Control)
Maintains drive power and prevents the front wheels from spinning
when starting the vehicle or accelerating on slippery roads.
171
2-4. Using other driving systems
2
When driving
To disable TRAC and/or VSC
If the vehicle gets stuck in fresh snow or mud, TRAC and VSC may
reduce power from the engine to the wheels. You may need to turn
the system off to enable you to rock the vehicle in order to free it.
Turning off TRAC
Quickly push and release the
button to turn off TRAC.
The “TRAC OFF” indicator light
should come on.
Push the button again to turn the
system back on.
Turning off TRAC and VSC
Push and hold the button for
more than 3 seconds while the
vehicle is stopped to turn off
TRAC and VSC.
The “TRAC OFF” and VSC OFF
indicator lights should come on.
Push the button again to turn the
system back on.
172
2-4. Using other driving systems
Automatic reactivation of TRAC and VSC
Vehicles with smart key system
Turning the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF after turning off the TRAC
and VSC systems will automatically re-enable them.
Vehicles without smart key system
Turning the engine switch OFF after turning off the TRAC and VSC systems
will automatically re-enable them.
Automatic TRAC reactivation
If only the TRAC system is turned off, the TRAC system will turn on when
vehicle speed increases.
Automatic TRAC and VSC reactivation
If the TRAC and VSC systems are turned off, the systems will not turn on
even when vehicle speed increases.
Sounds and vibrations caused by ABS, brake assist, VSC and TRAC
A sound may be heard from the engine compartment when the engine is
started or just after the vehicle begins to move. This sound does not indi-
cate that a malfunction has occurred in any of these systems.
Any of the following conditions may occur when the above systems are
operating. None of these indicates that a malfunction has occurred.
Vibrations may be felt through the vehicle body and steering.
A motor sound may be heard after the vehicle comes to a stop.
The brake pedal may pulsate slightly after ABS is activated.
The brake pedal may move down slightly after ABS is activated.
If the slip indicator comes on...
It may indicate a malfunction in the VSC and TRAC. Contact your Toyota
dealer.
173
2-4. Using other driving systems
2
When driving
CAUTION
ABS does not operate effectively when
Tires with inadequate gripping ability are used (such as excessively worn
tires on a snow covered road).
The vehicle hydroplanes while driving at high speed on the wet or slick
road.
Stopping distance when ABS is operating on the wet or slick roads
ABS is not designed to shorten the vehicle's stopping distance. Always
maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front of you in the following situ-
ations.
When driving on dirt, gravel or snow-covered roads
When driving with tire chains
When driving over bumps in the road
When driving over roads with potholes or uneven roads
TRAC may not operate effectively when
Directional control and power may not be achievable while driving on slip-
pery road surfaces, even if the TRAC system is operating.
Do not drive the vehicle in conditions where stability and power may be lost.
174
2-4. Using other driving systems
CAUTION
When VSC is activated
The slip indicator light flashes and a warning buzzer sounds. Always drive
carefully. Reckless driving may cause an accident. Exercise particular care
when the indicator light flashes and a buzzer sounds.
When TRAC and VSC are off
Be especially careful and drive at a speed appropriate to the road condi-
tions. As these are systems to ensure vehicle stability and driving force, do
not turn off TRAC and VSC unless necessary.
Replacing tires
Make sure that all tires are of the same size, brand, tread pattern and total
load capacity. In addition, make sure that the tires are inflated to the recom-
mended tire pressure level.
The ABS and VSC system will not function correctly if different tires are fitted
on the vehicle.
Contact your Toyota dealer for further information when replacing tires or
wheels.
Handling of tires and suspension
Using tires with any kind of problem or modifying the suspension will affect
the driving assist systems, and may cause the system to malfunction.
175
2
When driving
2-5. Driving information
Cargo and luggage
Capacity and distribution
Cargo capacity depends on the total weight of the occupants.
(Cargo capacity) = (Total load capacity) - (Total weight of occupants)
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
(1) Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and
cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your vehi-
cle’s placard.
(2) Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers
that will be riding in your vehicle.
(3) Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from
XXX kg or XXX lbs.
(4) The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and
luggage load capacity.
For example, if the XXX amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will
be five 150 lb. passengers in your vehicle, the amount of avail-
able cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400 - 750
(150 × 5) = 650 lbs.)
(5) Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being
loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the
available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.
Take notice of the following information about storage precau-
tions, cargo capacity and load.
Stow cargo and luggage in the trunk whenever possible.
Be sure all items are secured in place.
Be careful to keep the vehicle level. Placing the weight as far for-
ward as possible helps maintain vehicle balance.
For better fuel economy, do not carry unnecessary weight.
176
2-5. Driving information
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be
transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how
this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of
your vehicle. (P. 183)
Example on your vehicle
Cargo capacity
Total load capacity
When 2 people with the combined weight of 366 lb. (166 kg) are
riding in your vehicle, which has a total load capacity of 900 lb. (410
kg), the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity will be
as follows:
900 lb. - 366 lb. = 534 lb. (410 kg -166 kg = 244 kg)
In this condition, if 3 more passengers with the combined weight of
388 lb. (176 kg) get on, the available cargo and luggage load will be
reduced as follows:
534 lb. - 388 lb. = 146 lb. (244 kg - 176 kg = 68 kg)
As shown in the above example, if the number of occupants
increases, the cargo and luggage load will be reduced by an amount
that equals the increased weight due to the additional occupants. In
other words, if an increase in the number of occupants causes an
excess of the total load capacity (combined weight of occupants plus
cargo and luggage load), you must reduce the cargo and luggage on
your vehicle.
177
2-5. Driving information
2
When driving
CAUTION
Storage precautions
Observe the following precautions.
Failing to do so may result in death or serious injury.
Vehicles with fold-down type rear seat: To prevent cargo and luggage
from sliding forward during braking, do not stack anything in the
enlarged trunk. Keep cargo and luggage low, as close to the floor as
possible.
Vehicles with fold-down type rear seat: Never allow anyone to ride in
the enlarged trunk. It is not designed for passengers. They should ride
in their seats with their seat belts properly fastened. Otherwise, they
are much more likely to suffer death or serious bodily injury, in the
event of sudden braking, sudden swerving or a collision.
Do not place cargo or luggage in or on the following locations as the
item may get under the clutch, brake or accelerator pedal and prevent
the pedals from being depressed properly, block the driver’s vision, or
hit the driver or passengers, causing an accident.
Driver’s feet
Front passenger or rear seats (when stacking items)
Package tray
Instrument panel
• Dashboard
Secure all items in the occupant compartment, as they may shift and
injure someone during sudden braking, sudden swerving or an acci-
dent.
Capacity and distribution
Do not exceed the maximum axle weight rating or the total vehicle
weight rating.
Even if the total load of occupant's weight and the cargo load is less
than the total load capacity, do not apply the load unevenly.
Improper loading may cause deterioration of steering or braking con-
trol which may cause death or serious injury.
178
2-5. Driving information
Vehicle load limits
Total load capacity and seating capacity
These details are also described on the tire and loading information
label. (P. 392)
CAUTION
Overloading the vehicle
Do not overload the vehicle.
It may not only cause damage to the tires, but also degrade steering and
braking ability, resulting in an accident.
Vehicle load limits include total load capacity, seating capacity,
towing capacity and cargo capacity.
Total load capacity: 900 lb. (410 kg)
Total load capacity means the combined weight of occupants, cargo
and luggage.
Seating capacity: 5 occupants (Front 2, Rear 3)
Seating capacity means the maximum number of occupants whose
estimated average weight is 150 lb. (68 kg) per person.
Towing capacity: 1000 lb. (453 kg)
Cargo capacity
Cargo capacity may increase or decrease depending on the weight
and the number of occupants.
179
2-5. Driving information
2
When driving
Winter driving tips
Carry out the necessary preparations and inspections before driving
the vehicle in winter. Always drive the vehicle in a manner appropri-
ate to the prevailing weather conditions.
Pre-winter preparations
Use fluids that are appropriate to the prevailing outside tem-
peratures.
Engine oil
Engine coolant
Washer fluid
Have a service technician inspect the level and specific grav-
ity of battery electrolyte.
Have the vehicle fitted with four snow tires or purchase a set
of tire chains for the front tires.
Ensure that all tires are the same size and brand, and that chains
match the size of the tires.
Before driving the vehicle
Perform the following according to the driving conditions.
Do not try to forcibly open a window or move a wiper that is
frozen. Pour warm water over the frozen area to melt the ice.
Wipe away the water immediately to prevent it from freezing.
To ensure proper operation of the climate control system fan,
remove any snow that has accumulated on the air inlet vents
in front of the windshield.
Remove any ice that has accumulated on the vehicle chassis.
Periodically check for and remove any excess ice or snow
that may have accumulated in the wheel well or on the
brakes.
180
2-5. Driving information
Selecting tire chains
Use the correct tire chain size when mounting the snow chains.
Chain size is regulated for each tire size.
Side chain:
0.12 in. (3 mm) in diameter
0.39 in. (10 mm) in width
1.18 in. (30 mm) in length
Cross chain:
0.16 in. (4 mm) in diameter
0.55 in. (14 mm) in width
0.98 in. (25 mm) in length
Regulations on the use of snow chains
Regulations regarding the use of tire chains vary according to loca-
tion and type of road. Always check local regulations before install-
ing chains.
Install the chains on the front tires.
Retighten the chains after driving 1/4 - 1/2 mile (0.5 - 1.0 km).
When driving the vehicle
Accelerate the vehicle slowly and drive at a reduced speed suit-
able to road conditions.
When parking the vehicle
Park the vehicle and move the shift lever to P (automatic trans-
mission) or R (manual transmission) without setting the parking
brake. The parking brake may freeze up, preventing it from
being released.
181
2-5. Driving information
2
When driving
Tire chains
Observe the following precautions when installing and removing chains.
Install and remove tire chains in a safe location.
Install tire chains on the front tires only. Do not install tire chains on rear
tires.
Install tire chains following the instructions provided in the accompanying
manual.
CAUTION
Driving with snow tires
Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of accidents.
Failing to do so may result in a loss of vehicle control and cause death or
serious injury.
Use tires of the size specified for your vehicle.
Maintain the recommended level of air pressure.
Do not drive in excess of 75 mph (120 km/h), regardless of the type of
snow tires being used.
Use snow tires on all, not just some wheels.
Driving with tire chains
Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of accidents.
Failing to do so may result in the vehicle being unable to be driven safely,
and may cause death or serious injury.
Do not drive in excess of the speed limit specified for the tire chains being
used or 30 mph (50 km/h), whichever is lower.
Avoid driving on bumpy road surfaces or over potholes.
Avoid sudden turns and braking, as use of chains may adversely affect
vehicle handling.
Slow down sufficiently before entering a curve to ensure that vehicle con-
trol is maintained.
182
2-5. Driving information
NOTICE
Repairing or replacing snow tires
Request repairs of and obtain replacement snow tires from Toyota dealers or
legitimate tire retailers.
This is because the removal and attachment of snow tires affects the opera-
tion of the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters.
Fitting tire chains
The tire pressure warning valves and transmitters may not function correctly
when tire chains are fitted.
183
2-5. Driving information
2
When driving
Trailer towing
Your vehicle is designed primarily as a passenger carrying vehicle.
Towing a trailer will have an adverse effect on handling, perfor-
mance, braking, durability, and fuel consumption. For your safety
and the safety of others, do not overload the vehicle or trailer.
Toyota warranties do not apply to damage or malfunction caused by
towing a trailer for commercial purposes.
Weight limits
Confirm that the total trailer weight, gross vehicle weight, gross
axle weight and trailer tongue load are all within the limits.
Gross vehicle weight
The gross vehicle weight must not exceed the Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating (GVWR) indicated on the Certification Label. The
gross vehicle weight is the sum weight of the unloaded vehicle,
driver, passengers, luggage, hitch and trailer tongue load. Also
included is the weight of any special equipment installed on your
vehicle.
Gross axle weight
The load on either the front or rear axle resulting from distribu-
tion of the gross vehicle weight on both axles must not exceed
the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) listed on the Certification
Label.
Certification label
184
2-5. Driving information
Towing a trailer
Contact your Toyota dealer for further information about additional
requirements such as a towing kits, etc.
Hitch
Trailer hitch assemblies have different weight capacities established
by the hitch manufacturer. Even though the vehicle may be rated for
towing a higher weight, the operator must never exceed the maxi-
mum weight rating specified for the trailer hitch.
Trailer tongue load
The trailer cargo load should be distributed so that the tongue
load is 9 to 11% of the total trailer weight, not exceeding the
maximum 100 lb. (45 kg). (Tongue load / Total trailer weight x
100 = 9 to 11%)
The total trailer weight and tongue load can be measured with
platform scales found at highway weighing stations, building
supply companies, trucking companies, junk yards, etc.
Total trailer weight
Tongue load
185
2-5. Driving information
2
When driving
Before towing
Ensure that your vehicle’s tires are properly inflated. (P. 392)
Trailer tires should be inflated according to the trailer manufacturer's rec-
ommendation.
All trailer lights must work in order to be legal.
Confirm all lights work each time you connect them.
Check that your vehicle remains level when a loaded or unloaded trailer
is hitched. Do not drive if the vehicle is not level, and check for improper
tongue load, overloading, worn suspension, or other possible causes.
Make sure the trailer cargo is securely loaded.
Check that your rear view mirrors conform to any federal, state/provincial
or local regulations. If they do not, install rear view mirrors appropriate for
towing purposes.
Break-in schedule
Toyota recommends that you do not use a new vehicle or a vehicle with any
new power train components (engine, transmission, differential, wheel bear-
ings, etc.) to tow a trailer for the first 500 miles (800 km) of driving.
Maintenance
If you tow a trailer, your vehicle will require more frequent maintenance
due to the additional load. (See “Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or
“Owner's Manual Supplement”.)
Retighten the fixing bolts of the towing ball and bracket after approxi-
mately 600 miles (1000 km) of trailer towing.
186
2-5. Driving information
CAUTION
To avoid accident or injury
The total trailer weight (trailer weight plus the weight of cargo) must not
exceed 1000 lb. (453 kg).
Do not exceed the trailer hitch assembly weight, gross vehicle weight,
gross axle weight and trailer tongue load capacities.
Never load more weight in the back than in the front of the trailer. About
60% of the load should be in the front half of the trailer, and the remaining
40% in the rear.
Hitches
If you wish to install a trailer hitch, contact your Toyota dealer.
Use only a hitch that conforms to the total trailer weight requirement.
Follow the directions supplied by the hitch manufacturer.
Lubricate the hitch ball with a light coat of grease.
Remove the trailer hitch whenever you are not towing a trailer. After
removing the hitch, seal any mounting hole in the vehicle body to prevent
entry of any substances into the vehicle.
When towing a trailer
Never tap into your vehicle's hydraulic system, as this will lower the vehi-
cle's braking effectiveness.
Never tow a trailer without using a safety chain securely attached to both
the trailer and the vehicle. If damage occurs to the coupling unit or hitch
ball, there is danger of the trailer wandering into another lane.
187
2-5. Driving information
2
When driving
Trailer towing tips
Your vehicle will handle differently when towing a trailer. The 3 main
causes of vehicle-trailer accidents are driver error, excessive speed
and improper trailer loading. Keep the following in mind when towing.
Before starting out, check the trailer lights and the vehicle-trailer
connections. Recheck after driving a short distance.
Practice turning, stopping and reversing with the trailer attached in
an area away from traffic until you become accustomed to the feel
of the vehicle.
NOTICE
When installing a trailer hitch
Use only the position recommended by your Toyota dealer. Do not install
the trailer hitch on the bumper; this may cause body damage.
Do not use axle-mounted hitches, as they can cause damage to the axle
housing, wheel bearings, wheels or tires.
Brakes
Toyota recommends trailers with brakes that conform to all applicable fed-
eral and state/provincial regulations.
Safety chain
A safety chain must always be used between the towing vehicle and the
trailer. Leave sufficient slack in the chain for turns. The chain should cross
under the trailer tongue to prevent the tongue from dropping to the ground in
the case that it becomes damaged or separated. For the correct safety chain
installation procedure, ask your Toyota dealer.
Do not directly splice trailer lights
Directly splicing trailer lights may damage your vehicle's electrical system
and cause a malfunction.
188
2-5. Driving information
Reversing with a trailer attached is difficult and requires practice.
Grip the bottom of the steering wheel and move your hand to the
left to move the trailer to the left. Move your hand to the right to
move the trailer to right. (This is generally opposite to reversing
without a trailer attached.) Avoid sharp or prolonged turning. Have
someone guide you when reversing to reduce the risk of an acci-
dent.
As stopping distance is increased when towing a trailer, vehicle-to-
vehicle distance should be increased. For each 10 mph (16 km/h)
of speed, allow at least one vehicle and trailer length.
Avoid sudden braking as you may skid, resulting in jackknifing and
loss of control. This is especially true on wet or slippery surfaces.
Avoid jerky starts or sudden acceleration.
Avoid jerky steering and sharp turns, and slow down before mak-
ing turns.
Note that when making a turn, the trailer wheels will be closer than
the vehicle wheels to the inside of the turn. Compensate by making
a larger than normal turning radius.
Crosswinds and rough roads will adversely affect handling of your
vehicle and trailer, causing sway. Periodically check the rear to
prepare for being passed by large trucks or buses, which may
cause your vehicle and trailer to sway. If swaying occurs, firmly grip
the steering wheel, reduce speed immediately but gradually, and
steer straight ahead. Never increase speed. If you make no
extreme correction with the steering or brakes, your vehicle and
trailer will stabilize.
Take care when passing other vehicles. Passing requires consider-
able distance. After passing a vehicle, do not forget the length of
your trailer, and be sure you have plenty of room before changing
lanes.
189
2-5. Driving information
2
When driving
In order to maintain efficient engine braking and electrical charging
performance, do not use overdrive (automatic transmission) or the
5th gear (manual transmission).
Due to the added load of the trailer, your vehicle's engine may
overheat on hot days (at temperatures over 85°F [30°C]) when
driving up a long or steep grade. If the engine coolant temperature
gauge indicates overheating, immediately turn off the air condition-
ing (if in use), pull your vehicle off the road and stop in a safe spot.
(P. 475)
Always place wheel blocks under both the vehicle and the trailer
wheels when parking. Apply the parking brake firmly, and put the
transmission in P (automatic transmission) or in first or R (manual
transmission). Avoid parking on a slope, but if unavoidable, do so
only after performing the following:
Apply the brakes and keep them applied.
Have someone place wheel blocks under both the vehicle and
trailer wheels.
When the wheel blocks are in place, release the brakes slowly
until the blocks absorb the load.
Apply the parking brake firmly.
Shift into first or R (manual transmission) or P (automatic
transmission) and turn off the engine.
When restarting after parking on a slope:
With the transmission in the P position (automatic transmis-
sion) or the clutch pedal (manual transmission) depressed,
start the engine. On vehicles with an automatic transmission,
be sure to keep the brake pedal pressed.
Shift into a forward gear. If reversing, shift into the R position.
Release the parking brake (also brake pedal on vehicles with
automatic transmission), and slowly pull or back away from
the wheel blocks. Stop and apply the brakes.
Have someone retrieve the blocks.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
STEP
5
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
190
2-5. Driving information
CAUTION
To avoid an accident
Do not exceed 45 mph (72 km/h) or posted towing speed limit, whichever
is lower. As instability (swaying) of the towing vehicle-trailer combination
increases as speed increases, exceeding 45 mph (72 km/h) may cause
loss of control.
Slow down and downshift before descending steep or long downhill
grades. Do not make sudden downshifts.
Avoid holding the brake pedal down too long or applying the brakes too
frequently. This could cause the brakes to overheat and result in reduced
braking efficiency.
191
2-5. Driving information
2
When driving
Dinghy towing (automatic transmission)
NOTICE
To avoid serious damage to your vehicle
Do not tow your vehicle with four wheels on the ground.
Your vehicle is not designed to be dinghy towed (with 4 wheels on
the ground) behind a motor home.
192
2-5. Driving information
Dinghy towing (manual transmission)
Towing your vehicle with 4 wheels on the ground
To prevent damage to your vehicle, perform the following procedures
before towing.
Shift the shift lever to neutral.
Switch to the “ACC” position. (P. 135)
Ensure that the audio system and other powered devices have been
turned off.
Release the parking brake.
After towing, run the engine in idle for at least 3 minutes before driv-
ing the vehicle.
Necessary equipment and accessories
Specialized equipment and accessories are required for dinghy towing. Con-
tact the service branch of the motor home manufacturer regarding recom-
mended equipment.
Your vehicle can be dinghy towed in a forward direction (with 4
wheels on the ground) behind a motor home.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
193
2-5. Driving information
2
When driving
NOTICE
Dinghy towing direction
To prevent the steering from locking
Ensure the engine switch is in the “ACC” position.
Do not tow the vehicle backwards.
Doing so may cause serious damage.
196
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Automatic air conditioning system
Air outlets are automatically selected and fan speed is automatically
adjusted according to the temperature setting.
Air conditioning
on/off switch
Front passenger’s side temperature
setting display
Driver’s side temper-
ature control
“DUAL” button
Automatic mode Off
Driver’s side temperature
setting display
Fan speed
(fan speed selector) Outside air or recirculated air mode
Fan speed
display Change the air outlets used
(air flow selector button)
Front passenger’s side
temperature control
Windshield defogger
Air outlet display
: If equipped
197
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
3
Interior features
Using the automatic mode
Press .
The air conditioning system will begin to operate. Air outlets
and fan speed are automatically adjusted according to the
temperature setting.
Turning to the right increases the temperature and
turning to the left decreases the temperature on the
driver’s side.
The temperature for the driver and passenger seats can be set sep-
arately. (P. 197)
Adjusting the settings
Adjusting the temperature setting
Turning to the right increases the temperature and turning
to the left decreases the temperature on the driver’s side.
Turn to the right (increase) or to the left (decrease) on
the passenger’s side to separately adjust the temperature for the pas-
senger’s and driver’s side (dual mode). Press to return the
driver’s and passenger’s side temperatures to the same setting (simulta-
neous mode).
The air conditioning system switches between dual and simultaneous
mode each time is pressed.
STEP
1
STEP
2
198
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Adjusting the fan speed
Press “” (increase) or “” (decrease) on the fan speed selector.
The fan speed is shown on the display. (7 levels)
Press to turn the fan off.
Changing the air outlets
Press the air flow selector button.
The air outlets switch each time the button is pressed. The air flow
shown on the display indicates the following.
Air flows to the upper body.
Air flows to the upper body and
feet.
Air flows to the feet.
199
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
3
Interior features
Air flows to the feet and the
windshield defogger operates.
Recirculated air mode will auto-
matically switch to outside air
mode.
Switching between outside air and recirculated air modes
Press .
The mode switches between outside air mode (indicator off) and recircu-
lated air mode (indicator on) modes each time is pressed.
Defogging the windshield
Defogging
The air conditioning system con-
trol operates automatically.
Recirculated air mode will auto-
matically switch to outside air
mode. It is not possible to return
to recirculated air mode when the
switch is on.
200
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Adjusting the position of and opening and closing the air outlets
Center outlets
Direct air flow to the left or right,
up or down.
Right and left side outlets
Direct air flow to the left or
right, up or down.
Turn the knob right to open the
vent and left to close the vent.
Rear outlets
Direct air flow to the left or
right, up or down.
Turn the knob up to open the
vent and down to close the
vent.
201
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
3
Interior features
Steering wheel switches (if equipped)
Some air conditioning features can be controlled using the switches
on the steering wheel.
Temperature selector
“DUAL” button indicator on: Indi-
vidual setting on the driver's side
only.
“DUAL” button indicator off:
Simultaneous setting on the
driver’s and front passenger’s
sides.
Automatic mode
Off
Using the automatic mode
Press .
The air conditioning system will begin to operate. Air outlets
and fan speed are automatically adjusted according to the
temperature setting. (P. 196)
Press “” to increase the temperature and “” to decrease the
temperature on .
The temperature for the driver and passenger seat can be set sepa-
rately. (P. 197)
Adjusting the temperature setting
Press “” to increase the temperature and “” to decrease the tem-
perature on .
Turning off the air conditioning system
Press .
STEP
1
STEP
2
202
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Using the automatic mode
Fan speed is adjusted automatically in accordance with the temperature set-
ting and ambient conditions. As a result, the following may occur.
Immediately after is pressed, the fan may stop for a while until
warm or cool air is ready to flow.
Cool air may flow to the area around the upper body when the heater is
on.
Using the system in recirculated air mode
The windows will fog up more easily if the recirculated air mode is used for
an extended period.
Switching between outside air and recirculated air modes
Recirculated air mode or outside air mode may be automatically switched to
in accordance with the temperature setting and the inside temperature.
Window defogger feature
Recirculated air mode may automatically switch to outside air mode in situa-
tions where the windows need to be defogged.
When outside air temperature approaches 32°F (0°C)
The air conditioning system may not operate even when is pressed.
When the indicator light on flashes
Press and turn off the air conditioning system before turning it on
once more. There may be a problem in the air conditioning system if the indi-
cator light continues to flash. Turn the air conditioning system off and have it
inspected by your Toyota dealer.
Windshield air flow button
When any of the following conditions occurs, the indicator light on the button
may flash and a motor sound may be heard. This does not indicate a mal-
function.
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in ON mode (vehicles with smart
key system) or the engine switch is in the “ON” position (vehicles without
smart key system) after the battery is reconnected.
Engine starting and stopping is repeated at short intervals.
The engine is started with the low voltage battery.
203
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
3
Interior features
Plasmacluster*
This air conditioning system adopts plasmacluster technology, which helps
to keep good air quality in the cabin by emitting positive and negative ions
through the driver's side vent.
A slight noise may be heard during operation. This is not a malfunction.
Also, static electricity may be discharged near the driver's side vent due to
the high voltage used to operate the system.
To clean the drive's side vent, turn the system off and wipe the vent using a
soft cloth.
*: Plasmacluster technology is manufactured under license from SHARP
Corporation. “Plasmacluster” is a trademark of the SHARP Corporation.
Air conditioning odors
During use, various odors from inside and outside the vehicle may enter
into and accumulate in the air conditioning system. This may then cause
odor to be emitted from the vents.
To reduce potential odors from occurring:
It is recommended that the air conditioning system be set to outside air
mode prior to turning the vehicle off.
The start timing of the blower may be delayed for a short period of time
immediately after the air conditioning system is started in automatic
mode.
CAUTION
To prevent the windshield from fogging up
Do not use during cool air operation in extremely humid weather.
The difference between the temperature of the outside air and that of the
windshield can cause the outer surface of the windshield to fog up, blocking
your vision.
Plasmacluster
Do not disassemble or repair the system because it contains high voltage
parts. Call your Toyota dealer if the system needs repair.
204
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
NOTICE
To prevent battery discharge
Do not leave the automatic air conditioning system on longer than necessary
when the engine is stopped.
To prevent damage to the Plasmacluster
Do not insert anything into the driver's side vent, attach anything to it, or use
sprays around the drive's side vent. These things may cause the system not
to work properly.
205
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
3
Interior features
Manual air conditioning system
Adjusting the settings
Adjusting the temperature setting
Turn the temperature control dial clockwise (warm) or counter-
clockwise (cool).
If is not pressed, the system will blow ambient temperature air or
heated air.
For quick cooling, turn the temperature selector knob to the “MAX A/C”
position. The air conditioning will automatically turn on and the air intake
selector will be set to RECIRCULATE.
Fan speed dial Air outlet selection dial
Air intake mode switch
Air conditioning on/off switch
Temperature control dial
: If equipped
206
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Adjusting the fan speed
Turn the fan speed dial clockwise (increase) or counterclockwise
(decrease).
Set the dial to “OFF” to turn the fan off.
Selecting the air outlets
Set the air outlet selection dial to an appropriate position.
The positions between the air outlet selections shown below can also be
selected for more detailed adjustment.
Air flows to the upper body.
Air flows to the upper body and
feet.
Air flows to the feet.
207
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
3
Interior features
Air flows to the feet and the
windshield defogger operates.
The air intake is automatically
switched to outside air mode.
Pressing to turn the air
conditioning on clears the wind-
shield and side windows faster.
Air flows to the windshield and
side windows.
The air intake is automatically
switched to outside air mode. It is
not possible to return to recircu-
lated air mode when the switch is
on.
Pressing to turn the air
conditioning on clears the wind-
shield and side windows faster.
Switching between outside air and recirculated air modes
Press .
The mode switches between outside air mode (indicator off) and recircu-
lated air mode (indicator on) modes each time is pressed.
208
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Adjusting the position of and opening and closing the air outlets
Center outlets
Direct air flow to the left or right,
up or down.
Right and left side outlets
Direct air flow to the left or
right, up or down.
Turn the knob right to open the
vent and left to close the vent.
Using the system in recirculated air mode
The windows will fog up more easily if the recirculated air mode is used for
an extended period.
Window defogger feature
Vehicles with smart key system
In order to prevent the windows from fogging up, recirculated air mode may
automatically switch to outside air mode if the ambient temperature drops.
This feature can be cancelled by pushing and holding the air intake mode
switch for longer than 2 seconds. The feature will be reactivated when the
“ENGINE START STOP” switch is turned to ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON
mode.
209
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
3
Interior features
Vehicles without smart key system
In order to prevent the windows from fogging up, recirculated air mode may
automatically switch to outside air mode if the ambient temperature drops.
This feature can be cancelled by pushing and holding the air intake mode
switch for longer than 2 seconds. The feature will be reactivated when the
engine switch is turned to the “ACC” or “LOCK” position.
When outside air temperature approaches 32°F (0°C)
The air conditioning system may not operate even when is pressed.
When the indicator light on flashes
Press and turn off the air conditioning system before turning it on
once more. There may be a problem in the air conditioning system if the indi-
cator light continues to flash. Turn the air conditioning system off and have it
inspected by your Toyota dealer.
Air conditioning odors
During use, various odors from inside and outside the vehicle may enter
into and accumulate in the air conditioning system. This may then cause
odor to be emitted from the vents.
To reduce potential odors from occurring:
It is recommended that the air conditioning system be set to outside air
mode prior to turning the vehicle off.
CAUTION
To prevent the windshield from fogging up
Do not set the air outlet selection dial to during cool air operation in
extremely humid weather. The difference between the temperature of the
outside air and that of the windshield can cause the outer surface of the
windshield to fog up, blocking your vision.
210
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
NOTICE
To prevent battery discharge
Do not leave the air conditioning system on longer than necessary when the
engine is stopped.
211
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
3
Interior features
Rear window and outside rear view mirror defoggers
Outside rear view mirror defoggers (if equipped)
Turning the rear window defogger on will turn the outside rear view mirror
defoggers on.
When the indicator light on the switch flashes and a motor sound is
heard (vehicles with manual air conditioning)
If any of the following conditions occurs, it does not indicate a malfunction.
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode (vehicles
with smart key system) or the engine switch is in the “ON” position (vehi-
cles without smart key system) after the battery is reconnected.
Engine starting and stopping is repeated at short intervals.
The engine is started with the low voltage battery.
Clear the rear window using the defogger.
Vehicles with automatic air conditioning system
On/off
The defoggers will automati-
cally turn off the operation
time. The operation time is
between 15 minutes and 1
hour depending on the ambient
temperature and vehicle
speed.
Vehicles with manual air conditioning system
On/off
The defoggers will automati-
cally turn off the operation
time. The operation time is
between 15 minutes and 1
hour depending on the ambient
temperature and vehicle
speed.
212
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
CAUTION
Outside rear view mirror defoggers (if equipped)
The surfaces of the outside rear view mirrors become hot. Do not touch
them to prevent from burning yourself.
211
3
Interior features
3-2. Using the audio system
Audio system types
With navigation system
Owners of models equipped with a navigation system should refer
to the “Navigation System Owner's Manual”.
Without navigation system
Type A: CD player with changer controller and AM/FM radio
Type B: CD player with changer and AM/FM radio
212
3-2. Using the audio system
Type C: CD player with changer controller and AM/FM radio
Title Page
Using the radio P. 215
Using the CD player P. 223
Playing MP3 and WMA discs P. 232
Operating an iPod® player P. 240
Operating a USB memory player P. 246
Optimal use of the audio system P. 253
Using the AUX adapter P. 258
Using the steering wheel audio switches P. 260
213
3-2. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
Language settings (type B and C)
The language used for all voice guidance, voice recognition and mes-
sages may be changed.
Press .
Press that corresponds to “MORE”.
Press that corresponds to “LANG”.
Press that corresponds to the desired language.
For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.
“ENG” (English) or “ESP” (Spanish)
For vehicles sold in Canada
“ENG” (English) or “FRAN” (French)
Using cellular phones
Interference may be heard through the audio system's speakers if a cellular
phone is being used inside or close to the vehicle while the audio system is
operating.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
214
3-2. Using the audio system
CAUTION
For vehicles sold in U.S.A. and Canada
Part 15 of the FCC Rules
FCC Warning:
Any unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment will void the
user’s authority to operate this device.
Laser products
Do not take this unit apart or attempt to make any changes yourself.
This is an intricate unit that uses a laser pickup to retrieve information
from the surface of compact discs. The laser is carefully shielded so
that its rays remain inside the cabinet. Therefore, never try to disas-
semble the player or alter any of its parts since you may be exposed to
laser rays and dangerous voltages.
This product utilizes a laser.
Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other
than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation expo-
sure.
NOTICE
To prevent battery discharge
Do not leave the audio system on longer than necessary with the engine off.
To avoid damaging the audio system
Take care not to spill drinks or other fluids over the audio system.
215
3-2. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
Using the radio
Type A
Type B and C
Volume
Scanning for
receivable stations Station selector
Seeking the frequency
Adjusting the frequency
(AM, FM mode) or channel
(SAT mode)
AMSAT/FM
mode buttons
Power
Displaying radio text
messages
Changing the channel
AM/FM/SAT mode button Station selector
Seeking the frequency
Adjusting the frequency
(AM, FM mode) or channel
(SAT mode)
Displaying radio text messages
Changing
the channel
Scanning
for receivable
stations
VolumePower
Silencing a sound
216
3-2. Using the audio system
Setting station presets (excluding XM® Satellite Radio)
Search for desired stations by turning or or
pressing “” or “” on .
Press and hold a button (from to or one of
) until you hear a beep.
Type B and C: Each time is pressed, station pages are
changed. There are a total of 6 pages.
Scanning radio stations (excluding XM® Satellite Radio)
Scanning the preset radio stations
Press and hold or until you hear a beep.
Preset stations will be played for 5 seconds each.
When the desired station is reached, press or
again.
Scanning all radio stations within range
Press or .
All the stations with reception will be played for 5 seconds each.
When the desired station is reached, press or
again.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
1
STEP
2
217
3-2. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
Displaying radio text messages (for type B and C, FM mode
only)
When a new radio text message is received, “MSG” is shown on
the display. To display the message, press .
If the text continues past the end of the display, “ ” is displayed. Press
and hold until you hear a beep.
Text messages are not displayed while driving.
XM® Satellite Radio (if equipped)
Receiving XM® Satellite Radio
Press or .
The display changes as follows each time or is
pressed.
Type A: AM SAT1 SAT2 SAT3
Type B and C: AM FM SAT
Turn or to select the desired channel in all the
categories or press “” or “” on to select the desired
channel in the current category.
STEP
1
STEP
2
218
3-2. Using the audio system
Setting XM® Satellite Radio channel presets
Select the desired channel. Press and hold a button (from
to or one of ) until you hear a beep.
Type B and C: Each time is pressed, station pages are changed.
There are a total of 6 pages.
Changing the channel category
Press “” or “” on or .
Scanning XM® Satellite Radio channels
Scanning channels in the current category
Press or .
When the desired channel is reached, press or
again.
Scanning the preset channels
Press and hold or until you hear a beep.
When the desired channel is reached, press or
again.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
1
STEP
2
219
3-2. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
Displaying text information
Press or .
Type A: Each time is pressed, the display changes in the following
order:
Channel name Title (song/program title) Name (artist name/feature)
Channel number.
Type B and C: Each time is pressed, the display changes in the fol-
lowing order:
Title (song/program title) Title (song/program title)/Name (artist name/
feature).
220
3-2. Using the audio system
When the battery is disconnected
All preset stations are erased. (type A only)
Reception sensitivity
Maintaining perfect radio reception at all times is difficult due to the con-
tinually changing position of the antenna, differences in signal strength
and surrounding objects, such as trains, transmitters, etc.
The radio antenna is mounted inside the rear window. To maintain clear
radio reception, do not attach metallic window tinting or other metallic
objects to the antenna wire mounted inside the rear window.
XM® Satellite Radio
An XM® Satellite Radio is a tuner designed exclusively to receive broadcasts
provided under a separate subscription. Availability is limited to the 48 con-
tiguous states and 10 Canadian provinces.
XM® subscriptions
For detailed information about XM® Satellite Radio or to subscribe:
U.S.A.
Visit on the web at www.xmradio.com or call 1-800-967-2346.
Canada
Visit on the web at www.xmradio.ca or call 1-877-438-9677.
Radio ID
You will need the radio ID when activating XM® service or reporting a
problem. Select “CH000” using or , and the receiver's 8-
character ID number will appear.
Satellite tuner
The tuner supports only Audio Services (Music and Talk) and the accom-
panying Text Information of XM® Satellite Radio.
221
3-2. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
If XM® Satellite Radio does not operate normally
If a problem occurs with the XM® tuner, a message will appear on the dis-
play. Refer to the table below to identify the problem, and take the suggested
corrective action.
ANTENNA
or
CHECK
ANTENNA
The XM® antenna is not connected. Check
whether the XM® antenna cable is attached
securely.
There is a short-circuit in the antenna or the sur-
rounding antenna cable. See a Toyota certified
dealer.
UPDATING
You have not subscribed to XM® Satellite Radio.
The radio is being updated with the latest encryp-
tion code. Contact XM® Satellite Radio for sub-
scription information. When a contract is canceled,
you can choose the “CH000” and all free-to-air
channels.
The premium channel you selected is not autho-
rized. Wait for about 2 seconds until the radio
returns to the previous channel or “CH001”. If it
does not change automatically, select another
channel. If you want to listen to the premium chan-
nel, contact XM® Satellite Radio.
NO SIGNAL
The XM® signal is too weak at the current location.
Wait until your vehicle reaches a location with a
stronger signal.
LOADING The unit is acquiring audio or program information.
Wait until the unit has received the information.
OFF AIR
or
CHANNEL OFF
AIR
The channel you selected is not broadcasting any
programming. Select another channel.
-----
There is no song/program title or artist name/fea-
ture associated with the channel at this time. No
action needed.
222
3-2. Using the audio system
Contact the XM® Listener Care Center at 1-800-967-2346 (U.S.A.) or 1-877-
438-9677 (Canada)
Certifications for the radio tuner
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a
class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are
designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a
residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate
radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the
instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. How-
ever, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular
installation.
If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television
reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the
user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by trying one or more of
the following:
Reorienting or relocating the receiving antenna.
Increasing the separation between the equipment and receiver.
Connecting the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to
which the receiver is connected.
Consulting the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
---
The channel you selected is no longer available.
Wait for about 2 seconds until the radio returns to
the previous channel or “CH001”. If it does not
change automatically, select another channel.
223
3-2. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
Using the CD player
Type A
Type B and C
Volume
Random playback Repeat play
Playback
Power
CD eject
Displaying text
messages
Selecting
a track
Fast-forward
Reverse
Searching playback
VolumePower
CD eject
Fast-
forwarding
and
reversing
Searching
playback
CD load
(type B only)
Playback/pause
Displaying text
messages
Selector buttonsPlayback
224
3-2. Using the audio system
Loading CDs
Loading a CD (type A and C)
Insert a CD.
Loading a CD (type B)
Press .
When the indicator on the slot turns from amber to green,
insert a CD.
Loading multiple CDs (type B only)
Press and hold until you hear a beep.
When the indicator on the slot turns from amber to green,
insert a CD.
The indicator on the slot turns to amber when the CD is inserted.
When the indicator on the slot turns from amber to green
again, insert the next CD.
Repeat the procedure for the remaining CDs.
To cancel, press . If you do not insert a disc within 15 seconds,
loading will be canceled automatically.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
225
3-2. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
Ejecting CDs
Ejecting a CD (type A and C)
Press and remove the CD.
Ejecting a CD (type B)
To select the CD to be ejected, press that corre-
sponds to “ ” or “ ”.
The selected CD number is shown on the display.
Press and remove the CD.
Ejecting all the CDs (type B only)
Press and hold until you hear a beep, and then remove the
CDs.
Selecting a track
Press “” to move up or “” to move down using until the
desired track number is displayed.
Fast-forwarding and reversing tracks
Type A: Press ( ) or ( ).
Type B and C: Press and hold “” or “” on .
STEP
1
STEP
2
226
3-2. Using the audio system
Scanning tracks
Press or .
The first ten seconds of each track will be played.
To cancel, press or again.
Press or again when the desired track is reached.
Selecting a CD (type B only)
Selecting a CD to play
Press that corresponds to “ ” or “ ”.
Scanning loaded CDs
Press and hold until you hear a beep.
The first ten seconds of the first track on each CD will be played.
To cancel, press again.
Press again when the desired CD is reached.
Playing and pausing tracks (type B and C)
Press .
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
1
STEP
2
227
3-2. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
Random playback
Current CD
Press (RAND) or that corresponds to “RDM”.
Songs are played in random order.
To cancel, press the same button until “OFF” is displayed.
All CDs (type B only)
Press that corresponds to “RDM” twice.
Tracks on all loaded CDs are played in random order.
To cancel, press the button again.
Repeat play
Repeating a track
Press (RPT) or that corresponds to “RPT”.
To cancel, press the same button until “OFF” is displayed.
Repeating all of the tracks on a CD (type B only)
Press that corresponds to “RPT” twice.
To cancel, press the button again.
228
3-2. Using the audio system
Switching the display
Press or .
Type A: Each time is pressed, the display changes in the following
order:
Track no./Elapsed time CD title Track name.
Type B and C: Each time is pressed, the display changes in the fol-
lowing order:
Track title Track name/Artist name Track name/Elapsed time.
Display (type A only)
Up to 12 characters can be displayed at a time.
If there are 13 characters or more, pressing and holding for 1 second
or more will display the remaining characters.
A maximum of 24 characters can be displayed.
If is pressed for 1 second or more again or has not been pressed for 6
seconds or more, the display will return to the first 12 characters.
Depending on the contents recorded, the characters may not be displayed
properly or may not be displayed at all.
229
3-2. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
Error messages
“CD CHECK”: This indicates a problem either with the CD or inside the
player. The CD may be dirty, damaged or inserted up-side
down.
“WAIT” or “PLEASE WAIT”: Operation has stopped due to a high tempera-
ture inside the player. Wait for a while and then
press or . Contact your Toyota
dealer if the CD still cannot be played back.
Discs that can be used
Discs with the marks shown below can be used.
Playback may not be possible depending on the recording format or disc
features, or due to scratches, dirt or deterioration.
CDs with copy-protection features may not be used.
CD player protection feature
To protect the internal components, playback is automatically stopped when
a problem is detected while the CD player is being used.
If CDs are left inside the CD player or in the ejected position for
extended periods
CDs may be damaged and may not play properly.
Lens cleaners
Do not use lens cleaners. Doing so may damage the CD player.
230
3-2. Using the audio system
NOTICE
CDs and adapters that cannot be used
Do not use the following types of CDs, 3 in. (8 cm) CD adapters or Dual
Discs.
Doing so may damage the CD player and/or the CD insert/eject function.
CD player with changer and AM/FM
radio: CDs that have a diameter that is
not 4.7 in. (12 cm)
Low-quality and deformed CDs
CDs with a transparent or translucent
recording area
CDs that have had tape, stickers or CD-
R labels attached to them, or that have
had the label peeled off
231
3-2. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
NOTICE
CD player precautions
Failure to follow the precautions below may result in serious damage to the
CDs or the player itself.
Do not insert anything other than CDs into the CD slot.
Do not apply oil to the CD player.
Store CDs away from direct sunlight.
Never try to disassemble any part of the CD player.
Do not insert more than one CD at a
time.
232
3-2. Using the audio system
Playing MP3 and WMA discs
Type A
Type B and C
Volume
Random playback
Selecting a file
Playback
Power
CD eject
Displaying text messages
Selecting a file
Repeat play
Searching playback
Selecting
a folder
Fast-forwarding
Reversing
VolumePower
Disc eject
Searching
playback
Selecting
a folder
and files
Disc load
(type B only)
Playback/pause
Displaying text messages
Selecting a file
Selector buttons
Fast-
forwarding
and
reversing
Playback
233
3-2. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
Loading and ejecting MP3 and WMA discs
P. 2 24
Selecting MP3 and WMA discs (type B only)
P. 2 25
Selecting and scanning a folder
Selecting folders one at a time
Press “” or “” on or to select the desired folder.
Scanning the first file of all the folders
Press and hold or until you hear a beep.
The first ten seconds of the first file in each folder will be played.
When the desired folder is reached, press or
again.
Returning to the first folder
Press and hold “” on or until you hear a beep.
Selecting and scanning files
Selecting one file at a time
Turn or or press “” or “” on or to
select the desired file.
STEP
1
STEP
2
234
3-2. Using the audio system
Selecting the desired file by cueing the files in the folder
Press or .
When the desired file is reached, press or once again.
Fast-forwarding and reversing files
Type A: Press ( ) or ( ).
Type B and C: Press and hold “” or “” on .
Playing and pausing files (type B and C)
Press .
Random playback
Playing files from a particular folder in random order
Press (RAND) or that corresponds to “RDM”.
To cancel, press the same button until “OFF” is displayed.
Playing all of the files on a disc in random order (type B only)
Press that corresponds to “RDM” twice.
To cancel, press the button again.
235
3-2. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
Repeat play
Repeating a file
Press (RPT) or that corresponds to “RPT”.
To cancel, press the same button until “OFF” is displayed.
Repeating all of the files in a folder
Type A: Press and hold (RPT) until you hear a beep.
Type B and C: Press that corresponds to “RPT” twice.
To cancel, press the same button until “OFF” is displayed.
Repeating all of the files in a disc (type B only)
Press that corresponds to “RPT” three times.
To cancel, press the same button again.
Switching the display
Press or .
Type A: Each time is pressed, the display changes in the following
order:
Folder no./File no./Elapsed time Folder name File name Album
title (MP3 only) Track title Artist name.
Type B and C: Each time is pressed, the display changes in the fol-
lowing order:
Track title Track title/Artist name Track title/Album name Track
title/Elapsed time.
236
3-2. Using the audio system
Display
P. 228
Error messages
“CD CHECK”: This indicates a problem either with the CD or inside the
player. The CD may be dirty, damaged or inserted up-side
down.
“WAIT” or “PLEASE WAIT”: Operation has stopped due to a high tempera-
ture inside the player. Wait for a while and then
press or . Contact your Toyota
dealer if the CD still cannot be played.
Discs that can be used
P. 229
CD player protection feature
P. 229
If CDs are left inside the CD player or in the ejected position for
extended periods
P. 229
Lens cleaners
P. 229
237
3-2. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
MP3 and WMA files
MP3 (MPEG Audio LAYER3) is a standard audio compression format.
Files can be compressed to approximately 1/10 of their original size by using
MP3 compression.
WMA (Windows Media TM Audio) is a Microsoft audio compression format.
This format compresses audio data to a size smaller than that of the MP3
format.
There is a limit to the MP3 and WMA file standards and to the media/formats
recorded by them that can be used.
MP3 file compatibility
Compatible standards
MP3 (MPEG1 LAYER3, MPEG2 LSF LAYER3)
Compatible sampling frequencies
MPEG1 LAYER3: 32, 44.1, 48 (kHz)
MPEG2 LSF LAYER3: 16, 22.05, 24 (kHz)
Compatible bit rates
MPEG1 LAYER3: 64, 80, 96, 112, 128, 160, 192, 224, 256, 320 (kbps)
MPEG2 LSF LAYER3: 64, 80, 96, 112, 128, 144, 160 (kbps)
* Compatible with VBR
• Compatible channel modes: stereo, joint stereo, dual channel and
monaural
WMA file compatibility
Compatible standards
WMA Ver. 7, 8, 9
Compatible sampling frequencies
32, 44.1, 48 (kHz)
Compatible bit rates
Ver. 7, 8: CBR 48, 64, 80, 96, 128, 160, 192 (kbps)
Ver. 9: CBR 48, 64, 80, 96, 128, 160, 192, 256, 320 (kbps)
* Only compatible with 2-channel playback
238
3-2. Using the audio system
Compatible media
Media that can be used for MP3 and WMA playback are CD-Rs and CD-
RWs.
Playback in some instances may not be possible, depending on the status
of the CD-R or CD-RW. Playback may not be possible or the audio may
jump if the disc is scratched or marked with fingerprints.
Compatible disc formats
The following disc formats can be used.
Disc formats: CD-ROM Mode 1 and Mode 2
CD-ROM XA Mode 2, Form 1 and Form 2
File formats: ISO9660 Level 1, Level 2, (Romeo, Joliet)
MP3 and WMA files written in any format other than those listed above
may not play correctly, and their file names and folder names may not
be displayed correctly.
Items related to standards and limitations are as follows.
Maximum directory hierarchy: 8 levels
Maximum length of folder names/file names: 32 characters
Maximum number of folders: 192 (including the root)
Maximum number of files per disc: 255
File names
The only files that can be recognized as MP3/WMA and played are those
with the extension .mp3 or .wma.
Multi-sessions
As the audio system is compatible with multi-sessions, it is possible to play
discs that contain MP3 and WMA files. However, only the first session can
be played.
ID3 and WMA tags
ID3 tags can be added to MP3 files, making it possible to record the track
title and artist name, etc.
The system is compatible with ID3 Ver. 1.0, 1.1, and Ver. 2.2, 2.3 ID3 tags.
(The number of characters is based on ID3 Ver. 1.0 and 1.1.)
WMA tags can be added to WMA files, making it possible to record the
track title and artist name in the same way as with ID3 tags.
239
3-2. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
MP3 and WMA playback
When a disc containing MP3 or WMA files is inserted, all files on the disc
are first checked. Once the file check is finished, the first MP3 or WMA file
is played. To make the file check finish more quickly, we recommend you
do not write in any files other than MP3 or WMA files or create any unnec-
essary folders.
If the discs contain a mixture of music data and MP3 or WMA format data,
only music data can be played.
Extensions
If the file extensions .mp3 and .wma are used for files other than MP3 and
WMA files, they will be mistakenly recognized and played as MP3 and
WMA files. This may result in large amounts of interference and damage
to the speakers.
Playback
To play MP3 files with steady sound quality, we recommend a fixed bit
rate of 128 kbps and a sampling frequency of 44.1 kHz.
CD-R or CD-RW playback may not be possible in some instances,
depending on the characteristics of the disc.
There is a wide variety of freeware and other encoding software for
MP3 and WMA files on the market, and depending on the status of the
encoding and the file format, poor sound quality or noise at the start of
playback may result. In some cases, playback may not be possible at
all.
When files other than MP3 or WMA files are recorded on a disc, it may
take more time to recognize the disc. In some cases, playback may not
be possible at all.
• Microsoft, Windows, and Windows Media are the registered trade-
marks of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S. and other countries.
NOTICE
CDs and adapters that cannot be used (P. 230)
CD player precautions (P. 231)
240
3-2. Using the audio system
Operating an iPod® player
Connecting an iPod® player enables you to enjoy music from the
vehicle speakers.
Connecting an iPod® player
Open the cover and connect
an iPod® player using an
iPod® cable.
Press .
Control panel
STEP
1
STEP
2
VolumePower
Playback/
pause
Displaying text messages
Selector knob
Selector buttons
Fast-
forwarding
and
reversing
Playback
: If equipped
241
3-2. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
Selecting a play mode
Press that corresponds to “BROWSE” to select iPod®
menu mode.
Press that corresponds to the desired play mode.
Play mode list
Depending on the model, the name of your iPod® may be displayed at
the top of the list.
Play mode First
selection
Second
selection
Third
selection
Fourth
selection
PLIST Playlist
select
Songs
select --
ARTIST Artist select Albums
select
Songs
select -
ALBUM Albums
select
Songs
select --
GENRE Genre select Artists select Albums
select
Songs
select
SONGS Songs
select ---
PODCST Albums
select
Songs
select --
COMPSR Composers
select
Albums
select
Songs
select -
BOOK Songs
select ---
STEP
1
STEP
2
242
3-2. Using the audio system
Selecting a list
Turn to display the first selection list.
Press to select the desired item.
Pressing that corresponds to “MORE” changes to the second
selection list.
Repeat the same procedure to select the desired song name.
To return to the previous selection list, press that corresponds
to “ ”.
Selecting songs from a song list
Press that corresponds to “LIST”.
The current playlist is displayed.
Turning to select the desired song.
Press returns the screen from list display to the previous
screen.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
1
STEP
2
243
3-2. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
Selecting songs
Turn or press “” or “” on to select the desired song.
Playing and pausing songs
Press .
Fast-forwarding and reversing songs
Press and hold “” or “” on .
Shuffle playback
Playing songs from one playlist or album in random order
Press that corresponds to “RDM”.
To cancel, press the button twice.
Playing songs from all the playlists or albums in random order
Press that corresponds to “RDM” twice.
To cancel, press the button again.
Repeat play
Press that corresponds to “RPT”.
To cancel, press the button again.
Even when the repeat play option has not been selected, playback will
automatically continue from the first song in the current play list once the
last song has ended.
244
3-2. Using the audio system
Switching the display
Press .
Each time is pressed, the display changes in the following order:
Track title Track title/Artist name Track title/Album name Track
title/Elapsed time
About iPod®
iPod® is registered trademarks of Apple computer, Inc.
iPod® player functions
When an iPod® player is connected and the audio source is changed to
iPod® player mode, the iPod® player will resume play from the same
point in which it was last used.
Depending on the iPod® player that is connected to the system, certain
functions may not be available. Disconnecting the device and reconnect-
ing it once again may resolve some malfunctions.
iPod® player problems
To resolve most problems encountered when using your iPod® player, dis-
connect your iPod® player from the vehicle iPod® player connection and
reset it.
For instructions on how to reset your iPod® player, refer to your iPod® player
Owner's Manual.
Cable pass-through
P. 323
Error messages
“IPOD ERROR”: This indicates a problem in the iPod® player, inside
the USB box or the connection between them.
“NO SONGS”: This indicates that there is no music data in the
iPod® player.
“UPDATE YOUR IPOD”: This indicates that the version of the iPod® player
is not compatible.
245
3-2. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
Compatible models
iPod® 5th generation Version 1.2 or later
iPod® nano 3rd generation Version 1.0 or later
iPod® nano 2nd generation Version 1.1.2 or later
iPod® nano Version 1.2 or later
iPod® touch Version 1.1 or later
iPod® classic Version 1.0 or later
iPhone®, iPod® mini, iPod® shuffle, iPod® photo and 4th generation and ear-
lier models of iPod® are not compatible with this system.
Items related to standards and limitations are as follows:
Maximum number of lists in device: 9999
Maximum number of songs in device: 65,025
Maximum number of songs per list: 65,025
CAUTION
Caution while driving
Do not connect iPod® players or operate the controls.
NOTICE
To prevent damage to iPod® players
Do not leave iPod® players in the vehicle. The temperature inside may
become high, resulting in damage to the player.
Do not push down on or apply unnecessary pressure to the iPod® player
while it is connected as this may damage the iPod® player or its terminal.
Do not insert foreign objects into the port as this may damage the iPod®
player or its terminal.
246
3-2. Using the audio system
Operating a USB memory player
Connecting a USB memory player enables you to enjoy music from
the vehicle speakers.
Connecting a USB memory player
Open the cover and connect a
USB memory player.
Press .
Control panel
STEP
1
STEP
2
Fast-forwarding
and reversing
Selector knob
VolumePower
Playback/
pause
Searching
playback
Displaying text messages
Selector buttons
Selecting a folder and files
Playback
: If equipped
247
3-2. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
Selecting and scanning a folder
Selecting a folder
Press “” or “” on to select the desired folder.
Returning to the first file of the first folder
Press and hold “” on until you hear a beep.
Scanning the first file of all the folders
Press and hold until you hear a beep.
The first ten seconds of the first file in each folder will be played.
When the desired folder is reached, press again.
Selecting and scanning files
Selecting a file
Turn or press “” or “” on to select the desired file.
Scanning the files in a folder
Press .
The first ten seconds of each file will be played.
To cancel, press again.
When the desired file is reached, press again.
STEP
1
STEP
2
248
3-2. Using the audio system
Playing and pausing files
Press .
Fast-forwarding and reversing files
Press and hold “” or “” on .
Random playback
Playing files from a folder in random order
Press that corresponds to “RDM”.
To cancel, press the button twice.
Playing all the files from a USB memory player in random
order
Press that corresponds to “RDM” twice.
To cancel, press the button again.
Repeat play
Repeating a file
Press that corresponds to “RPT”.
To cancel, press the button twice.
Repeating all the files in a folder
Press that corresponds to “RPT” twice.
To cancel, press the button again.
249
3-2. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
Switching the display
Press .
Each time is pressed, the display changes in the following order:
Track title Track title/Artist name Track title/Album name Track
title/Elapsed time
USB memory player functions
Depending on the USB memory player that is connected to the system, cer-
tain functions may not be available. Disconnecting the device and recon-
necting it once again may resolve some malfunctions.
Cable pass-through
P. 323
Error messages
“USB ERROR”: This indicates a problem either in the USB memory player or
inside the USB box or connection between them.
“NO MUSIC”: This indicates that no MP3/WMA files are included in the
USB memory player.
250
3-2. Using the audio system
USB memory player
Compatible device
USB memory players that can be used for MP3 and WMA playback.
Depending on the type of USB device, playback may not be possible.
Compatible device formats
The following device formats can be used:
USB communication formats: USB2.0 FS (12 mbps)
File formats: FAT16/32 (Windows)
Correspondence class: Mass storage class
MP3 and WMA files written in any format other than those listed above
may not play correctly, and their file names and folder names may not
be displayed correctly.
Items related to standards and limitations are as follows:
Maximum directory hierarchy: 8 levels
Maximum number of folder in device: 999 (including the root)
Maximum number of files in device: 65,025
Maximum number of files per folder: 255
MP3 and WMA files
MP3 (MPEG Audio LAYER 3) is a standard audio compression format.
Files can be compressed to approximately 1/10 of their original size using
MP3 compression.
WMA (Windows MediaTM Audio) is a Microsoft audio compression format.
This format compresses audio data to a size smaller than that of the MP3
format.
There is a limit to the MP3 and WMA file standards that can be used and to
the media/formats on which the files are recorded.
251
3-2. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
MP3 file compatibility
Compatible standards
MP3 (MPEG1 AUDIO LAYERII, III, MPEG2 AUDIO LAYERII, III,
MPEG2.5)
Compatible sampling frequencies
MPEG1 AUDIO LAYERII, III: 32, 44.1, 48 (kHz)
MPEG2 AUDIO LAYERII, III: 16, 22.05, 24 (kHz)
MPEG2.5: 8, 11.025, 12 (kHz)
Compatible bit rates (compatible with VBR)
MPEG1 AUDIO LAYERII, III: 32-320 (kbps)
MPEG2 AUDIO LAYERII, III: 32-160 (kbps)
MPEG2.5: 32-160 (kbps)
• Compatible channel modes: stereo, joint stereo, dual channel and
monaural
WMA file compatibility
Compatible standards
WMA Ver. 9
Compatible sampling frequencies
HIGH PROFILE 32, 44.1, 48 (kHz)
Compatible bit rates
HIGH PROFILE 32-320 (kbps, VBR)
File names
The only files that can be recognized as MP3/WMA and played are those
with the extension .mp3 or .wma.
ID3 and WMA tags
ID3 tags can be added to MP3 files, making it possible to record the track
title, artist name, etc.
The system is compatible with ID3 Ver. 1.0, 1.1, and Ver. 2.2, 2.3, 2.4 ID3
tags. (The number of characters is based on ID3 Ver. 1.0 and 1.1.)
WMA tags can be added to WMA files, making it possible to record the
track title and artist name in the same way as with ID3 tags.
MP3 and WMA playback
When a device containing MP3 or WMA files is plugged, all files in the
USB memory device are first checked. Once the file check is finished, the
first MP3 or WMA file is played. To make the file check finish more quickly,
we recommend you do not write in any files other than MP3 or WMA files
or create any unnecessary folders.
252
3-2. Using the audio system
Extensions
If the file extensions .mp3 and .wma are used for files other than MP3 and
WMA files, they will be mistakenly recognized and played as MP3 and
WMA files. This may result in large amounts of interference and damage
to the speakers.
Playback
To play MP3 file with steady sound quality, we recommend a fixed bit
rate of at least 128 kbps and a sampling frequency of 44.1 kHz.
There is a wide variety of freeware and other encoding software for
MP3 and WMA files on the market, and depending on the status of the
encoding and the file format, poor sound quality or noise at the start of
playback may result. In some cases, playback may not be possible at
all.
• Microsoft, Windows, and Windows Media are the registered trade-
marks of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S.A. and other countries.
CAUTION
Caution while driving
Do not use a USB memory player, or connect a USB memory player.
NOTICE
To prevent damage to a USB memory player
Do not leave a USB memory player in the vehicle. The temperature inside
may become high, resulting in damage to the player.
Do not push down on or apply unnecessary pressure to the USB memory
player while it is connected as this may damage the USB memory player
or its terminal.
Do not insert foreign objects into the port as this may damage the USB
memory player or its terminal.
253
3-2. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
Optimal use of the audio system
Type A
Type B and C
Adjusting the sound quality and ASL
Menu button
Selector buttons
Adjusting the sound quality
254
3-2. Using the audio system
Using the audio control function
Changing sound quality modes
Type A
Pressing selects the mode to be changed in the following
order:
“BAS”“TRE”“FAD”“BAL”“ASL”
Type B and C
Press .
Press that corresponds to the desired mode.
“BASS”, “MID” (type B only), “TREB”, “FADE”, or “BAL”
Adjusting sound quality
Turning or adjusts the level.
Type A
*: The sound quality level is adjusted individually in each radio
mode or CD mode.
STEP
1
STEP
2
Mode
displayed
Sound qual-
ity mode Level Turn to the
left
Turn to the
right
BAS Bass* -5 to 5 Low High
TRE Treble* -5 to 5
FAD
Front/rear
volume
balance
F7 to R7 Shifts to rear Shifts to
front
BAL
Left/right
volume
balance
L7 to R7 Shifts to left Shifts to right
255
3-2. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
Type B and C
*: The sound quality level is adjusted individually in each audio
mode.
Adjusting the Automatic Sound Levelizer (ASL)
Type A
When “ASL” is selected, turning to the right changes the
“ASL” level in the order of “LOW”, “MID” and “HIGH”.
Turning to the left turns “ASL” off.
ASL automatically adjusts the volume and tone quality according to vehi-
cle speed.
Mode
displayed
Sound qual-
ity mode Level Turn to the
left
Turn to the
right
BASS Bass* -5 to 5
Low HighMID Mid-range*
(type B only) -5 to 5
TREB Treble* -5 to 5
FADE
Front/rear
volume
balance
F7 to R7 Shifts to rear Shifts to
front
BAL
Left/right
volume
balance
L7 to R7 Shifts to left Shifts to right
256
3-2. Using the audio system
Type B and C
Press .
Press that corresponds to “MORE”.
Press that corresponds to “ASL”.
Press that corresponds to the desired mode.
Type B: “ON” or “OFF”
Type C: “LOW”, “MID”, “HIGH”, or “OFF”
ASL automatically adjusts the volume and tone quality according to vehi-
cle speed.
Setting the number of preset pages (type B and C)
The number of preset pages desired can be set from 1 to 6. The initial
setting is 6 pages.
Press .
Press that corresponds to “MORE”.
Press that corresponds to “PRESET”.
Press that corresponds to the desired number of preset
pages.
Language settings (type B and C)
P. 2 13
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
257
3-2. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
Trademark owned by SRS Labs, Inc. (type A only)
The audio systems utilize SRS FOCUS® and SRS TruBass® audio
enhancement technologies, under license from SRS Labs, Inc., in all modes
except AM radio mode.
FOCUS, TruBass, SRS and symbols are trademarks of SRS Labs,
Inc.
FOCUS and TruBass technologies are incorporated under license from
SRS Labs, Inc.
258
3-2. Using the audio system
Using the AUX adapter
This adapter can be used to connect a portable audio device and lis-
ten to it through the vehicle’s speakers.
Open the cover and connect the portable audio device.
Type A
Type B
Press or .
STEP
1
STEP
2
259
3-2. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
Operating portable audio devices connected to the audio system
The volume can be adjusted using the vehicle's audio controls. All other
adjustments must be made on the portable audio device itself.
When using a portable audio device connected to the power outlet
Noise may occur during playback. Use the power source of the portable
audio device.
Cable pass-through
P. 323
260
3-2. Using the audio system
Using the steering wheel audio switches
Some audio features can be controlled using the switches on the
steering wheel.
4-spoke steering wheel
Increases/decreases vol-
ume
Radio mode: Select radio
stations
CD mode: Select tracks,
files (MP3 and WMA) and
discs
iPod® player mode:
Selects a song
USB memory player mode:
Selects a file and
folder
Bluetooth® audio mode:
Selects a track and
album
Turn the power on, selects
an audio source
3-spoke steering wheel
261
3-2. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
Turning the power on
Press or when the audio system is turned off.
The audio system can be turned off by holding the switch down until you
hear a beep.
Changing the audio source
Press or when the audio system is turned on. The
audio source changes as follows each time the switch is pressed.
If no discs are inserted in the player, that mode will be skipped.
Type A:
FM1FM2CDAUXAMSAT1SAT2SAT3
Type B and C:
FMSATCDCD changer (type B only)Bluetooth® AudioAUX
USB/iPod®AM
Adjusting the volume
Press “+” on or to increase the volume and “-” to
decrease the volume.
Press and hold the switch to continue increasing or decreasing the vol-
ume.
Selecting a radio station
Press or to select the radio mode.
Press “” or “” on or to select a radio station.
To scan for receivable stations, press and hold “” or “” on
or until you hear a beep.
STEP
1
STEP
2
262
3-2. Using the audio system
Selecting a track/file or folder
Press or to select the CD, iPod® player or USB
memory player mode.
Press “” or “” on or to select the desired
track/file or folder.
Selecting a folder
Press or to select the MP3 and WMA mode.
Press and hold “” or “” on or until you hear a
beep.
Selecting a disc in the CD player (CD player with changer only)
Press or to select the CD mode.
Press and hold “” or “” on or until you hear a
beep.
CAUTION
To reduce the risk of an accident
Exercise care when operating the audio switches on the steering wheel.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
1
STEP
2
263
3
Interior features
3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system
Bluetooth® audio system
Conditions under which the system will not operate
If using a portable player that does not support Bluetooth®
If the portable player is switched off
If the portable player is not connected
If the portable player’s battery is low
If the portable player is behind the seat or in the glove box or console box
If metal is covering or touching the portable player
The Bluetooth® audio system enables you to enjoy music played on
a portable digital audio player (portable player) from the vehicle
speakers via wireless communication.
This audio system supports Bluetooth®, a wireless data system
capable of playing portable audio music without cables. If your por-
table player does not support Bluetooth®, the Bluetooth® audio sys-
tem will not function.
Owners of models equipped with a navigation system should refer to
the “Navigation System Owner's Manual”.
Title Page
Using the Bluetooth® audio system P. 266
Operating a Bluetooth® enabled portable player P. 271
Setting up a Bluetooth® enabled portable player P. 273
Bluetooth® audio system setup P. 278
: If equipped
264
3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system
When transferring ownership of the vehicle
Be sure to initialize the system to prevent personal data from being improp-
erly accessed. (P. 303)
About Bluetooth®
Compatible models
Bluetooth® specifications:
Ver. 1.2
Following Profiles:
A2DP (Advanced Audio Distribution Profile) Ver. 1.0
AVRCP (Audio/Video Remote Control Profile) Ver. 1.0 or higher (Ver.
1.3 or higher recommended)
Portable players must correspond to the above specifications in order to be
connected to the Bluetooth® audio system. However, please note that some
functions may be limited depending on the type of portable player.
Certification for the Bluetooth® audio system
Type B
FCC ID: BABFT0001A
IC ID: 2024B-FT0001A
MADE IN JAPAN
Type C
FCC ID: ACJ932C5ZZZ035
IC ID: 216J-C5ZZZ035
MADE IN JAPAN
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and RSS-210 Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions; (1) This device may not
cause harmful interference, and (2) This device must accept any interfer-
ence received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Bluetooth is a registered trademark of
Bluetooth SIG. Inc.
265
3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system
3
Interior features
CAUTION
FCC WARNING
Changes or modifications in construction not expressly approved by the
party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate
the equipment.
Radio frequency exposure. This device is approved for Mobile Application
only and, to comply with applicable FCC radio frequency exposure regula-
tions, must be used with a distance of at least 7.9 in. (20 cm) between the
antenna and the body of any person at all time during use.
Caution while driving
Do not connect portable players or operate the controls.
NOTICE
To prevent damage to portable players
Do not leave portable players in the vehicle. The temperature inside the
vehicle may become high, resulting in damage to the player.
266
3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system
Using the Bluetooth® audio system
Audio unit
Display
A message, name, number,
etc. is displayed.
Lower-case characters and
special characters cannot
be displayed.
Displays information that is
too long to be displayed at
one time on the display
(press and hold)
Selects items such as menu
and number
Turn: Selects an item
Press: Inputs the selected
item
Bluetooth® connection con-
dition
If “BT” is not displayed, the
Bluetooth® audio system
cannot be used.
Microphone
267
3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system
3
Interior features
Operating the system using voice commands
By following voice guidance instructions output from the speaker,
voice commands enable to the operation of the Bluetooth® audio sys-
tem without the need to check the display or operate .
Operation procedure when using voice commands
Press the talk switch and follow voice guidance instructions.
Auxiliary commands when using voice commands
The following auxiliary commands can be used when operating the
system using a voice command:
“Cancel”: Exits the Bluetooth® audio system
“Repeat”: Repeats the previous voice guidance instruction
“Go back”: Returns to the previous procedure
“Help”: Reads aloud the function summary if a help comment is
registered for the selected function
268
3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system
Using the Bluetooth® audio system for the first time
Before using the Bluetooth® audio system, it is necessary to register
a Bluetooth® enabled portable player in the system. Follow the proce-
dure below to register (pair) a portable player:
Press until “BT AUDIO” is displayed.
Press that corresponds to “SETUP”.
The introductory guidance and portable player name registration
instructions are heard.
Select “Pair Audio Player” using a voice command or .
Register a portable player name by either of the following
methods:
a. Select “Record Name” using , and say the name to
be registered.
b. Press the talk switch and say the name to be registered.
A voice guidance instruction to confirm the input is heard.
Select “Confirm” using a voice command or .
A passkey is displayed and heard, and a voice guidance instruction
for inputting the passkey into the portable player is heard.
Input the passkey into the portable player.
Refer to the manual that comes with the portable player for the oper-
ation of the portable player.
Guidance for registration completion is heard.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
STEP
5
STEP
6
269
3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system
3
Interior features
If the portable player has a Bluetooth® phone, the phone can be reg-
istered at the same time. (P. 286)
Menu list of the Bluetooth® audio system
Normal operation
“BT•A Setup” can be canceled by pressing the on-hook switch or saying
the voice command, “Cancel”.
First menu Second
menu Third menu Operation detail
“Setup”
“BTA
Setup”
“Pair Audio
Player” Registering a portable player
“Select Audio
Player”
Selecting a portable player to
be used
“Change Name” Changing the registered
name of a portable player
“List Audio
Player”
Listing the registered porta-
ble players
“Set Passkey” Changing the passkey
“Delete Audio” Deleting a registered porta-
ble player
“System
Setup”
“Guidance Vol-
ume”
Setting voice guidance vol-
ume
“Device Name” Displaying the Bluetooth®
device address and name
“Initialize” Initializing the system
270
3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system
When using a voice command
For numbers, say a combination of single digits from zero to nine.
Say the command correctly and clearly.
Situations that the system may not recognize your voice
When driving on rough roads
When driving at high speeds
When air is blowing out of the vents onto the microphone
When the air conditioning fan emits a loud noise
Operations that cannot be performed while driving
Operating the system with
Registering a portable player to the system
Changing the passkey
P. 276
271
3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system
3
Interior features
Operating a Bluetooth
®
enabled portable player
Selecting an album
Press “” or “” on .
Selecting tracks
Press “” or “” on .
Playing and pausing tracks
Press .
VolumePower
Playback/pause
Displaying text messages
Selector knob
Selecting
tracks
Fast-
forwarding
and
reversing
Playback
272
3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system
Fast-forwarding and reversing tracks
Press and hold “” or “” on .
Switching the display
Press .
Each time is pressed, the display changes in the following order:
Track title Track title/Artist name Track title/Album name Track
title/Elapsed time
Using the steering wheel audio switches
P. 2 60
Bluetooth® audio system functions
Depending on the portable player that is connected to the system, certain
functions may not be available.
Error messages
“BT AUDIO ERROR”: This indicates a problem in the system.
273
3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system
3
Interior features
Setting up a Bluetooth
®
enabled portable player
Registering a portable player in the Bluetooth® audio system allows
the system to function. The following functions can be used for reg-
istered portable players:
Functions and operation procedures
Press until “BT AUDIO” is displayed.
Press that corresponds to “SETUP”.
Select one of the following functions using a voice com-
mand or .
Registering a portable player
“Pair Audio Player”
Selecting a portable player to be used
“Select Audio Player”
Changing the registered name
“Change Name”
Listing the registered portable players
“List Audio Players”
Changing the passkey
“Set Passkey”
Deleting a registered portable player
“Delete Audio Player (Delete Audio)
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
274
3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system
Registering a portable player
Select “Pair Audio Player” using a voice command or , and
perform the procedure for registering a portable player. (P. 268)
Selecting a portable player to be used
Select “Select Audio Player” using a voice command or
.
Select the portable player to be used by either of the following
methods, and select “Confirm” by using a voice command or
:
a. Press the talk switch and say the name of the desired por-
table player.
b. Press the talk switch and say “List Audio Players”. When
the name of the desired portable player is read aloud, press
the talk switch.
STEP
1
STEP
2
275
3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system
3
Interior features
Press the talk switch and say “From Car” or “From Audio”, and
select “Confirm” by using a voice command or .
Vehicles with smart key system: If “From Car” is selected, the porta-
ble player will be automatically connected whenever the “ENGINE
START STOP” switch is in either ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON
mode.
Vehicles without smart key system: If “From Car” is selected, the
portable player will be automatically connected whenever the engine
switch is in either the “ACC” or “ON” position.
Changing the registered name of a portable player
Select “Change Name” using a voice command or .
Select the name of the portable player to be changed by
either of the following methods, and select “Confirm” using a
voice command or :
a. Press the talk switch and say the name of desired portable
player.
b. Press the talk switch and say “List Audio Players”. When
the name of the desired portable player is read aloud, press
the talk switch.
Press the talk switch or select “Record Name” using ,
and say the new name.
Select “Confirm” using a voice command or .
STEP
3
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
276
3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system
Listing the registered portable players
Select “List Audio Players” using a voice command or . The list
of registered portable players will be read aloud.
When listing is complete, the system returns to “BT•A Setup”.
Pressing the talk switch while the name of a portable player is being
read aloud selects the portable player, and the following functions will
become available:
Selecting a portable player: “Select Audio Player”
Changing a registered name: “Change Name”
Deleting a portable player: “Delete Audio Player (Delete Audio)”
Changing the passkey
Select “Set Passkey” using a voice command or .
Press the talk switch, say a 4 to 8-digit number, and select
“Confirm” using a voice command or .
When the entire number to be registered as a passkey has
been input, press again.
If the number to be registered has 8 digits, pressing of the knob is
not necessary.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
277
3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system
3
Interior features
Deleting a registered portable player
Select “Delete Audio Player (Delete Audio)” using a voice
command or .
Select the portable player to be deleted by either of the follow-
ing methods and select “Confirm” using a voice command or
:
a. Press the talk switch and say the name of the desired por-
table player.
b. Press the talk switch and say “List Audio Players”. When
the name of the desired portable player is read aloud, press
the talk switch.
If the portable player to be deleted is paired as a Bluetooth® phone,
the registration of the mobile phone can be deleted at the same time.
A voice guidance instruction to delete a mobile phone is heard.
Select “Confirm” by using a voice command or .
The number of portable players that can be registered
Up to 2 portable players can be registered in the system.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
278
3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system
Bluetooth® audio system setup
System setup items and operation procedures
P. 301
279
3
Interior features
3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
Hands-free phone system (for cellular phone) features
This system supports Bluetooth®, which allows you to make or
receive calls without using cables to connect a cellular phone and
the system, and without operating the cellular phone.
Owners of models equipped with a navigation system should refer to
the “Navigation System Owner's Manual”.
Hands-free system quick guide
Setting a cellular phone. (P. 283)
Adding an entry to the phonebook (Up to 20 names can be
stored). (P. 305)
Dialing by inputting a name. (P. 293)
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
: If equipped
280
3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
Title Page
Using the hands-free phone system
Operating the system by using a voice
command
Using the hands-free phone system for
the first time
Menu list of the hands-free phone
system
P. 283
Making a phone call
Dialing by inputting a number
Dialing by inputting a name
Speed dialing
When receiving a phone call
Transferring a call
Using the call history memory
P. 292
Setting a cellular phone
Registering a cellular phone
Selecting the cellular phone to be used
Changing a registered name
Listing the registered cellular phone
Deleting a cellular phone
Changing the passkey
Turning the hands-free phone
automatic connection on/off
P. 296
Security and system setup
Setting or changing the PIN
Locking or unlocking the phone book
Setting voice guidance volume
Initialization
P. 301
Using the phone book
Adding a new phone number
Setting speed dials
Changing a registered name
Deleting registered data
Deleting speed dials
Listing the registered data
P. 305
281
3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
3
Interior features
Conditions affecting operation
The hands-free phone system may not operate normally in the following situ-
ations:
The cellular phone is turned off, or located outside the service area.
The cellular phone has a low battery.
The cellular phone is not connected to the system.
The cellular phone is behind the seat or in the glove box, or metal mate-
rial covers or touches the phone.
When transferring ownership of the vehicle
Be sure to initialize the system to prevent personal data from being improp-
erly accessed.
Required profiles for the cellular phone
HFP (Hands Free Profile) Ver. 1.0
OPP (Object Push Profile) Ver. 1.1
About Bluetooth®
Bluetooth is a registered trademark of
Bluetooth SIG. Inc.
282
3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
Certification for the hands-free phone system
Type B
FCC ID: BABFT0001A
IC ID: 2024B-FT0001A
MADE IN JAPAN
Type C
FCC ID: ACJ932C5ZZZ035
IC ID: 216J-C5ZZZ035
MADE IN JAPAN
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and RSS-210 Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions; (1) This device may not
cause harmful interference, and (2) This device must accept any interfer-
ence received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
CAUTION
FCC WARNING
Changes or modifications in construction not expressly approved by the
party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate
the equipment.
Radio frequency exposure. This device is approved for Mobile Application
only and, to comply with applicable FCC radio frequency exposure regula-
tions, must be used with a distance of at least 7.9 in. (20 cm) between the
antenna and the body of any person at all time during use.
Caution while driving
Do not use a cellular phone, or connect the Bluetooth® phone.
NOTICE
To prevent damage to a cellular phone
Do not leave a cellular phone in the vehicle. The temperature inside may
become high resulting in damage to the phone.
283
3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
3
Interior features
Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
Audio unit
Display
A message, name, phone
number, etc. is displayed.
Lower-case characters and
special characters, such as
an umlaut, cannot be dis-
played.
Displays information that is
too long to be displayed at
one time on the display
(press and hold)
Selects speed dials
Selects items such as menu
or number
Turn: Selects an item
Press: Inputs the selected
item
Bluetooth® connection con-
dition and reception level
If “BT” is not displayed, the
hands-free phone system
cannot be used.
284
3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
Steering wheel
4-spoke steering wheel
Volume
The voice guidance volume
cannot be adjusted using this
button.
On-hook switch
Turns the hands-free sys-
tem off/ends a call/refuses a
call
Off-hook switch
Turns the hands-free sys-
tem on/starts a call
Talk switch
Turns the voice command
system on (press)/turns the
voice command system off
(press and hold)
285
3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
3
Interior features
3-spoke steering wheel
Volume
The voice guidance volume
cannot be adjusted using this
button.
Off-hook switch
Turns the hands-free sys-
tem on/starts a call
On-hook switch
Turns the hands-free sys-
tem off/ends a call/refuses a
call
Talk switch
Turns the voice command
system on (press)/turns the
voice command system off
(press and hold)
Microphone
286
3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
Operating the system by using a voice command
By following voice guidance instructions output from the speaker,
voice commands enable to the operation of the hands-free phone
system without the need to check the display or operate .
Operation procedure when using a voice command
Press the talk switch and follow voice guidance instructions.
Auxiliary commands when using a voice command
The following auxiliary commands can be used when operating the
system using a voice command:
Cancel: Exits the hands-free phone system
Repeat: Repeats the previous voice guidance instruction
Go back: Returns to the previous procedure
Help: Reads aloud the function summary if a help comment is
registered for the selected function
Using the hands-free phone system for the first time
Before using the hands-free phone system, it is necessary to register
a cellular phone in the system. The phone registration mode will be
entered automatically when starting the system with no cellular
phone registered. Follow the procedure below to register a cellular
phone:
Press the off-hook switch or the talk switch.
The introductory guidance and phone name registration instructions
are heard.
STEP
1
287
3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
3
Interior features
Select “Pair Phone” using a voice command or .
Register a phone name by either of the following methods.
a. Select “Record Name” by using , and say a name to
be registered.
b. Press the talk switch and say a name to be registered.
A voice guidance instruction to confirm the input is heard.
Select “Confirm” by using a voice command or .
Registration to the hands-free phone system only
Select “Phone Only” using a voice command or .
Registration to the hands-free phone system and Bluetooth® audio
system at the same time
Select “Internal Audio (Int. Audio)” using a voice command or
.
Select “Confirm” by using a voice command or .
A passkey is displayed and heard, and a voice guidance instruction
for inputting the passkey into the cellular phone is heard.
Input the passkey into the cellular phone.
Refer to the manual that comes with the cellular phone for the oper-
ation of the phone.
Guidance for registration completion is heard.
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
STEP
5
STEP
5
STEP
6
STEP
7
288
3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
Menu list of the hands-free phone system
Normal operation
First menu Second
menu Third menu Operation detail
Callback - -
Dialing a number stored in
the incoming call history
memory
Redial - -
Dialing a number stored in
the outgoing call history
memory
Dial by
number - - Dialing by inputting a number
Dial by
name --
Dialing by inputting a name
registered in the phone book
Phonebook
Add Entry - Adding a new number
Change
Name -Changing a name in the
phone book
Delete
Entry -Deleting the phone book
data
Delete
Speed
Dial
-Deleting a registered speed
dial
List
Names - Listing the phone book data
Set
Speed
Dial
(Speed
Dial)
- Registering a speed dial
289
3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
3
Interior features
Setup
Security
Set PIN Setting a PIN code
Phonebook Lock Locking the phone book
Phonebook
Unlock Unlocking the phone book
Phone
Setup
Pair Phone Registering the cellular
phone to be used
Change Name Changing a registered name
of a cellular phone
Delete Phone Deleting a registered cellular
phone
List phones Listing the registered cellular
phones
Select phone Selecting a cellular phone to
be used
Set Passkey Changing the passkey
Hands-free
power
Setting a Hands-free power
on/off
System
Setup
Guidance Vol-
ume
Setting voice guidance vol-
ume
Device Name Displaying a device informa-
tion
Initialize Initialization
First menu Second
menu Third menu Operation detail
290
3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
Using a short cut key
First menu Second menu Operation detail
Dial “XXX (name)” - Dialing a number registered
in the phone book
Dial “XXX (number)” - Dialing the input numbers
Phone book add
entry - Adding a new number
Phone book change
name -
Changing the name of a
phone number in the phone
book
Phone book delete
entry - Deleting phone book data
Phone book set
speed dial - Registering a speed dial
Phone book delete
speed dial - Deleting a speed dial
Phonebook Phonebook Unlock Unlocking the phone book
Phonebook Lock Locking the phone book
291
3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
3
Interior features
Automatic volume adjustment
When vehicle speed is 50 mph (80 km/h) or more, the volume automatically
increases. The volume returns to the previous volume setting when vehicle
speed drops to 43 mph (70 km/h) or less.
When using a voice command
For numbers, say a combination of single digits from zero to nine, # (pound),
(star), and + (plus).
Say a command correctly and clearly.
Situations that the system may not recognize your voice
When driving on a rough road
When driving at high speeds
When air is blowing out of the vents onto the microphone
When the air conditioning fan emits a loud noise
Operations that cannot be performed while driving
Operating the system with
Registering a cellular phone to the system
Changing the passkey
P. 299
292
3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
Making a phone call
Dialing by inputting a number
Press the talk switch and say “Dial by number”.
Press the talk switch and say the phone number.
Dial by one of the following methods:
a. Press the off-hook switch.
b. Press the talk switch and say “Dial”.
c. Select “Dial” by using .
Making a phone call
Dialing by inputting a number
“Dial by number”
Dialing by inputting a name
“Dial by name”
Speed dialing
Dialing a number stored in the outgoing history memory
“Redial”
Dialing a number stored in the incoming history memory
“Call back”
Receiving a phone call
Answering the phone
Refusing the call
Transferring a call
Using the call history memory
Dialing
Storing data in the phone book
Deleting
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
293
3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
3
Interior features
Dialing by inputting a name
Press the talk switch and say “Dial by name”.
Select a registered name to be input by either of the following
methods:
a. Press the talk switch and say a registered name.
b. Press the talk switch and say “List names”. Press the talk
switch while the desired name is being read aloud.
Dial by one of the following methods:
a. Press the off-hook switch.
b. Press the talk switch and say “Dial”.
c. Select “Dial” by using .
Speed dialing
Press the off-hook switch.
Press the preset button in which the desired number is regis-
tered.
Press the off-hook switch.
When receiving a phone call
Answering the phone
Press the off-hook switch.
Refusing the call
Press the on-hook switch.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
294
3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
Transferring a call
A call can be transferred between the cellular phone and system
while dialing, receiving a call, or during a call. Use one of the follow-
ing methods:
a. Operate the cellular phone.
Refer to the manual that comes with the cellular phone for the oper-
ation of the phone.
b. Press the off-hook switch*1.
c. Press the talk switch and say “Call Transfer”*2.
*1: This operation can be performed only when transferring a call
from the cellular phone to the system during a call.
*2: While the vehicle is in motion, a call cannot be transferred from
the system to the cellular phone.
Using the call history memory
Follow the procedure below to use a number stored in the call history
memory:
Press the talk switch and say “Redial” (when using a number
stored in the outgoing call history memory) or “Call back”
(when using a number stored in the incoming call history
memory).
Select the number by either of the following methods:
a. Say “Previous” or “Go back” until the desired number is dis-
played.
b. Select the desired number by using .
STEP
1
STEP
2
295
3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
3
Interior features
The following operations can be performed:
Dialing: Press the off-hook switch or select “Dial” by using a voice
command or .
Storing the number in the phone book: Select “Store” by using a
voice command or .
Deleting: Select “Delete” by using a voice command or .
Call history
Up to 5 numbers can be stored in each of the outgoing and incoming call his-
tory memories.
When talking on the phone
Do not talk simultaneously with the other party.
Keep the volume of the received voice down. Otherwise, voice echo will
increase.
296
3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
Setting a cellular phone
Registering a cellular phone
Select “Pair Phone” by using a voice command or , and do the
procedure for registering a cellular phone. (P. 286)
Registering a cellular phone in the hands-free phone system allows
the system to function. The following functions can be used for reg-
istered cellular phones:
Functions and operation procedures
To enter the menu for each function, follow the steps below by
using a voice command or :
Registering a cellular phone
1. “Setup” 2. “Phone Setup” 3. “Pair Phone”
Selecting the cellular phone to be used
1. “Setup” 2. “Phone Setup” 3. “Select Phone”
Changing a registered name
1. “Setup” 2. “Phone Setup” 3. “Change Name”
Listing the registered cellular phones
1. “Setup” 2. “Phone Setup” 3. “List Phones”
Deleting a cellular phone
1. “Setup” 2. “Phone Setup” 3. “Delete”
Changing the passkey
1. “Setup” 2. “Phone Setup” 3. “Set Passkey”
297
3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
3
Interior features
Selecting the cellular phone to be used
Select “Select Phone” by using a voice command or .
Pattern A
Select the cellular phone to be used by either of the following
methods, and select “Confirm” by using a voice command or
:
a. Press the talk switch and say the desired phone name.
b. Press the talk switch and say “List phones”. While the name
of the desired cellular phone is being read aloud, press the
talk switch.
Pattern B
Select the cellular phone to be used by using .
Changing a registered name
Select “Change Name” by using a voice command or .
Select the name of the cellular phone to be changed by either
of the following methods:
a. Press the talk switch and say the desired phone name, and
select “Confirm” by using a voice command or .
b. Press the talk switch and say “List phones”. While the
desired phone name is being read aloud, press the talk
switch.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
2
STEP
1
STEP
2
298
3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
c. Select the desired phone name by using .
Press the talk switch or select “Record Name” by using ,
and say a new name.
Select “Confirm” by using a voice command or .
Listing the registered cellular phones
Selecting “List Phones” by using a voice command or causes
the list of registered cellular phones to be read aloud.
When listing is complete, the system returns to “Phone Setup”.
Pressing the talk switch while the name of a cellular phone is being
read selects the cellular phone, and the following functions will be
available:
Selecting a cellular phone: “Select Phone”
Changing a registered name: “Change Name”
Deleting a cellular phone: “Delete Phone”
STEP
3
STEP
4
299
3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
3
Interior features
Deleting a cellular phone
Select “Delete Phone” by using a voice command or .
Select the cellular phone to be deleted by either of the follow-
ing methods and select “Confirm” by using a voice command
or :
a. Press the talk switch and say the name of the desired cellu-
lar phone.
b. Press the talk switch and say “List phones”. While the name
of the desired cellular phone is being read aloud, press the
talk switch.
Changing the passkey
Select “Set Passkey” by using a voice command or .
Press the talk switch, say a 4 to 8-digit number, and select
“Confirm” by using a voice command or .
The number should be input 1 digit at a time.
When the entire number to be registered as a passkey has
been input, press again.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
300
3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
Turning the hands-free phone automatic connection on/off
Turning off the automatic connection
Select “Handsfree Power” by using a voice command or
.
Select “Turn off” by using a voice command or .
Turning on the automatic connection
Select “Handsfree Power” by using a voice command or
.
Select “Turn on” by using a voice command or .
The number of cellular phones that can be registered
Up to 6 cellular phones can be registered in the system.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
1
STEP
2
301
3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
3
Interior features
Security and system setup
Setting or changing the PIN
Setting a PIN
Select “Set PIN” by using a voice command or .
Enter a PIN by using a voice command or .
When using , input the code 1 digit at a time.
To enter the menu of each setting, follow the steps below:
Security setting items and operation procedure
Setting or changing the PIN (Personal Identification Number)
1. “Setup” 2. “Security” 3. “Set PIN”
Locking the phone book
1. “Setup” 2. “Security” 3. “Phonebook Lock”
Unlocking the phone book
1. “Setup” 2. “Security” 3. “Phonebook Unlock”
System setup items and operation procedure
Setting voice guidance volume
1. “Setup” 2. “System Setup” 3. “Guidance Volume”
Initialization
1. “Setup” 2. “System Setup” 3. “Initialize”
can only be used for system setup operation.
STEP
1
STEP
2
302
3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
Changing the PIN
Select “Set PIN” by using a voice command or .
Enter the registered PIN by using a voice command or .
Enter a new PIN by using a voice command or .
When using , input the code 1 digit at a time.
Locking or unlocking the phone book
Select “Phonebook lock” or “Phonebook unlock” by using a
voice command or .
Input the PIN by either of the following methods and select
“Confirm” by using a voice command or :
a. Press the talk switch and say the registered PIN.
b. Input a new PIN by using .
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
1
STEP
2
303
3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
3
Interior features
Setting voice guidance volume
Select “Guidance Volume” by using .
Change the voice guidance volume.
To decrease the volume: Turn counterclockwise.
To increase the volume: Turn clockwise.
Initialization
Select “Initialize” and then “Confirm” by using .
Select “Confirm” by using .
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
1
STEP
2
304
3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
Initialization
The following data in the system can be initialized:
Phone book
Outgoing and incoming call history
Speed dials
Registered cellular phone data
Security code
Once the initialization has been completed, the data cannot be restored
to its original state.
When the phone book is locked
The following functions cannot be used:
Dialing by inputting a name
Speed dialing
Dialing a number stored in the call history memory
Using the phone book
305
3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
3
Interior features
Using the phone book
Adding a new phone number
The following methods can be used to add a new phone number:
Inputting a phone number by using a voice command
Transferring data from the cellular phone
Inputting a phone number by using
Selecting a phone number from outgoing or incoming call history
To enter the menu of each setting, follow the steps below:
Adding a new phone number
1. “Phonebook” 2. “Add Entry”
Setting speed dial
1. “Phonebook” 2. “Set Speed Dial (Speed Dial)”
Changing a registered name
1. “Phonebook” 2. “Change Name”
Deleting registered data
1. “Phonebook” 2. “Delete Entry”
Deleting speed dial
1. “Phonebook” 2. “Delete Speed Dial”
Listing the registered data
1. “Phonebook” 2. “List Names”
306
3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
Adding procedure
Select “Add Entry” by using a voice command or .
Use one of the following methods to input a telephone num-
ber:
Inputting a telephone number by using a voice command
STEP2-1 Select “By Voice” by using a voice command or
.
STEP2-2 Press the talk switch, say the desired number, and
select “Confirm” by using a voice command.
Transferring data from the cellular phone
STEP2-1 Select “By Phone” and then “Confirm” by using a
voice command or .
STEP2-2 Transfer the data from the cellular phone.
Refer to the manual that comes with the cellular phone for
the details of transferring data.
STEP2-3 Select the data to be registered by either of the fol-
lowing methods:
a. Say “Previous” or “Next” until the desired data is
displayed, and select “Confirm” by using a voice
command.
b. Select the desired data by using .
STEP
1
STEP
2
307
3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
3
Interior features
Inputting a phone number by using
STEP2-1 Select “Manual Input” by using .
STEP2-2 Input a phone number by using , and press
once again.
Input the phone number 1 digit at a time.
Selecting a phone number from outgoing or incoming call history
STEP2-1 Select “Call History” by using a voice command or
.
STEP2-2 Select “Outgoing” or “Incoming” by using a voice
command or .
STEP2-3 Select the data to be registered by either of the fol-
lowing methods:
a. Say “Previous” or “Go back” until the desired data
is displayed, and select “Confirm” by using a
voice command.
b. Select the desired data by using .
308
3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
Select the name to be registered by either of the following
methods, and select “Confirm” by using a voice command or
:
a. Press the talk switch and say the desired name.
b. Select “Record Name” by using , and say the desired
name.
Select “Confirm” by using a voice command or .
In , selecting “Set Speed Dial (Speed Dial)” instead of “Con-
firm” registers the newly added phone number as a speed dial.
STEP
3
STEP
4
STEP
3
309
3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
3
Interior features
Setting speed dials
Select “Set Speed Dial (Speed Dial)” by using a voice com-
mand or .
Select the data to be registered as a speed dial by either of
the following methods:
a. Press the talk switch, say desired number, and select “Con-
firm” by using a voice command or .
b. Press the talk switch, and say “List names”. While the
desired name is being read aloud, press the talk switch,
and select “Confirm” by using a voice command or .
c. Select the desired data by using .
Select the desired preset button, and register the data into
speed dial by either of the following methods:
a. Press the desired preset button, and select “Confirm” by
using a voice command or .
b. Press and hold the desired preset button.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
310
3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
Changing a registered name
Select “Change Name” by using a voice command or .
Select the name to be changed by either of the following
methods.
a. Press the talk switch, say desired name, and select “Con-
firm” by using a voice command or .
b. Press the talk switch, and say “List names”. While the
desired name is being read aloud, press the talk switch,
and select “Confirm” by using a voice command or .
c. Select the desired name by using .
Select “Record Name” with or the talk switch.
Say a new name, and select “Confirm” by using a voice com-
mand or .
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
311
3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
3
Interior features
Deleting registered data
Select “Delete Entry” by using a voice command or .
Select the data to be deleted by either of the following meth-
ods, and select “Confirm” by using a voice command or
:
a. Press the talk switch, and say the name of the desired
phone number to be deleted.
b. Press the talk switch, say “List phones”. While the name of
the desired phone number is being read aloud, press the
talk switch.
Deleting speed dials
Select “Delete Speed Dial” by using a voice command or
.
Press the preset button in which the desired speed dial is reg-
istered, and select “Confirm” by using a voice command or
.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
1
STEP
2
312
3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
Listing the registered data
Selecting “List names” by using a voice command causes a list of the
registered data to be read aloud.
When listing is complete, the system returns to “Phonebook”.
Pressing the talk switch while the desired data is being read aloud
selects the data, and the following function will be available.
Dialing: “Dial”
Changing a registered name: “Change Name”
Deleting an entry: “Delete Entry”
Setting a speed dial: “Set Speed Dial (Speed Dial)”
Limitation of number of digits
A phone number that exceeds 24 digits cannot be registered.
313
3
Interior features
3-5. Using the interior lights
Interior lights list
Personal lights (P. 315)
Interior light (P. 314)
Engine switch light (vehicles without smart key system)
Front door courtesy light
314
3-5. Using the interior lights
Interior light
Vehicles without moon roof
“DOOR” position
Off
On
Illuminated entry system
The interior light (with the switch in the “DOOR” position) and engine switch
light (vehicles without smart key system) automatically turn on/off according
to “ENGINE START STOP” switch mode (vehicles with smart key system) or
engine switch position (vehicles without smart key system), the presence of
the electronic key (vehicles with smart key system), whether the doors are
locked/unlocked and whether the doors are open/closed.
To prevent the battery from being discharged
If the interior light and engine switch light (vehicles without smart key sys-
tem) remain on when the door is not fully closed and the interior light switch
is in the “DOOR” position, the lights will go off automatically after 20 minutes.
Customization that can be configured at Toyota dealer
Settings (e.g. The time elapsed before lights turn off) can be changed.
(Customizable features P. 510)
Interior light
315
3-5. Using the interior lights
3
Interior features
Vehicles with moon roof
“DOOR” position
Off
On
Personal lights
Front
On/off
Rear (vehicles with moon roof)
On/off
When either of the rear side
doors is opened, the light on that
side turns on automatically. Clos-
ing the rear side doors will turn
the lights off.
Interior light and personal lights
316
3-6. Using the storage features
List of storage features
Auxiliary boxes
Glove box
Cup holders
Console box
317
3-6. Using the storage features
3
Interior features
Glove box
Open (pull the lever)
Lock with the master key
(vehicles without smart key
system) or mechanical key
(vehicles with smart key sys-
tem)
Unlock with the master key
(vehicles without smart key
system) or mechanical key
(vehicles with smart key sys-
tem)
Console box
Lift the lid while pulling the lever.
Glove box light
The glove box light turns on when the tail lights are turned on.
CAUTION
Caution while driving
Keep the glove box closed.
Injuries may result in the event of an accident or sudden braking.
Glove box and console box
318
3-6. Using the storage features
When using the console box lid as an armrest (if equipped)
Tray in the rear console box
CAUTION
Caution while driving
Keep the console box closed.
Injuries may result in the event of an accident or sudden braking.
If necessary, the console box lid can slide
forward. Pull the lid forward by grasping
the front of the lid.
The tray slides forward/backward and can
be removed.
Console box
319
3-6. Using the storage features
3
Interior features
Cup holders
Manual transmission
Lift the lid.
Automatic transmission (type A)
Lift the lid.
Automatic transmission (type B)
Push the lid.
Cup holders
320
3-6. Using the storage features
Rear (type A)
Pull the armrest down.
Rear (type B)
Pull the armrest down and lift the
lid.
Using the cup holder (front) to store small items (automatic transmis-
sion)
Remove the holder.
Cup holders
321
3-6. Using the storage features
3
Interior features
Auxiliary boxes
Driver's side instrument panel
Pull the handle.
Overhead console
Push the lid.
CAUTION
Items unsuitable for the cup holder
Do not place anything other than cups or aluminum cans in the cup holders.
Other items may be thrown out of the holders in the event of an accident or
sudden braking and cause injury. If possible, cover hot drinks to prevent
burns.
When not in use
Keep the cup holders closed.
Injuries may result in the event of an accident or sudden braking.
Cup holders and auxiliary boxes
322
3-6. Using the storage features
Front console
Push the lid.
Center console (type A)
Push the lid.
Center console (type B)
Lift the lid.
Auxiliary boxes
323
3-6. Using the storage features
3
Interior features
Cable pass-through
CAUTION
Caution while driving
Keep the auxiliary boxes closed.
Injuries may result in the event of an accident or sudden braking.
Items that should not be left in the overhead console
Do not leave glasses or lighters in the console.
If the interior of the vehicle becomes hot, lighters may explode and glasses
may warp or become cracked.
The auxiliary box of the front console is
provided with a hole that allows cables to
be passed into the cabin from the power
outlet and AUX or USB/AUX adapter
inside.
Remove the lid.
Push out and remove the outer lid.
Auxiliary boxes
324
3-7. Other interior features
Sun visors
Forward position:
Flip down.
Side position:
Flip down, unhook, and
swing to the side.
325
3-7. Other interior features
3
Interior features
Vanity mirrors
Slide the cover.
The light turns on when the
cover is opened. (if equipped)
326
3-7. Other interior features
Clock
The clock is displayed when
Vehicles with smart key system
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON
mode.
Vehicles without smart key system
The engine switch is in the “ACC” or “ON” position.
Adjusts the hour.
Adjusts the minutes.
327
3-7. Other interior features
3
Interior features
Ashtray
CAUTION
When not in use
Keep the ashtray closed.
Injuries may result in the event of sudden braking, sudden swerving or an
accident.
To prevent fire
Fully extinguish matches and cigarettes before putting them in the ashtray,
then make sure the ashtray is fully closed.
Do not place paper or any other type of flammable object in the ashtray.
An ashtray can be installed in
a cup holder. (P. 319)
: If equipped
328
3-7. Other interior features
Power outlets
The power outlet can be used for 12 V accessories that run on less
than 10 A.
Front console
Center console (if equipped)
329
3-7. Other interior features
3
Interior features
The power outlet can be used when
Vehicles with smart key system
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON
mode.
Vehicles without smart key system
The engine switch is in the “ACC” or “ON” position.
Cable pass-through
Connected cables can be passed through the hole in the auxiliary box to the
front passenger’s side of the auxiliary box. (P. 323)
NOTICE
To avoid damaging the power outlet
Close the power outlet lid when the power outlet is not in use.
Foreign objects or liquids that enter the power outlet may cause a short cir-
cuit.
To prevent the fuse from being blown
Do not use an accessory that uses more than 12 V 10 A.
To prevent the battery from being discharged
Do not use the power outlet longer than necessary when the engine is not
running.
330
3-7. Other interior features
Seat heaters
The seat heaters can be used when
Vehicles with smart key system
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
Vehicles without smart key system
The engine switch is in the “ON” position.
When not in use
Turn the seat heater off. The indicator light turns off.
CAUTION
Burns
Use caution when seating the following persons in a seat with the seat
heater on to avoid the possibility of burns:
Babies, small children, the elderly, the sick and the disabled
Persons with sensitive skin
Persons who are fatigued
Persons who have taken alcohol or drugs that induce sleep (sleeping
drugs, cold remedies, etc.)
Do not cover the seat with anything when using the seat heater.
Using the seat heater with a blanket or cushion increases the temperature
of the seat and may lead to overheating.
Heats the driver’s seat
Heats the passenger’s seat
The indicator light comes on.
: If equipped
331
3-7. Other interior features
3
Interior features
NOTICE
To prevent seat heater damage
Do not put unevenly weighted objects on the seat and do not stick sharp
objects (needles, nails, etc.) into the seat.
To prevent battery discharge
Turn the switches off when the engine is not running.
332
3-7. Other interior features
Armrest
NOTICE
To prevent damage to the armrest
Do not place too much strain on the armrest.
Pull the armrest down for use.
333
3-7. Other interior features
3
Interior features
Rear sunshade
CAUTION
When the rear sunshade is being raised or lowered
Do not place fingers or other objects in the fastener section or in the open-
ing.
They may get caught, causing injury.
NOTICE
To ensure normal operation of the sunshade
Observe the following precautions.
Do not place anything where it may hinder the opening/closing of the
shade.
Do not place anything on the shade.
Pull the tab of the shade and
hook it on using the anchors.
To lower the shade, pull the
tab slightly to unhook the
shade, and lower it slowly.
: If equipped
334
3-7. Other interior features
Trunk storage extension
CAUTION
When not in use
Ensure that the armrest door is closed.
In the event of sudden braking, items stored in the trunk may be thrown for-
ward into the cabin, resulting in injury.
Long objects can be loaded in the vehicle by utilizing the trunk
space and rear seat area.
Pull down the armrest.
Open the armrest door.
The armrest door can be
locked and unlocked using the
mechanical key (vehicles with
smart key system) or master
key (vehicles without smart
key system).
Lock
Unlock
STEP
1
STEP
2
335
3-7. Other interior features
3
Interior features
Floor mat
CAUTION
When inserting the floor mat
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in the floor mat slipping and interfering with the
movement of the pedals during driving, resulting in an accident.
Make sure the floor mat is properly placed on the vehicle carpet and the
correct side faces upward.
Do not place floor mats on the top of existing mats.
Securely place a mat that matches the size of the space on the car-
pet.
Secure the driver's floor mat
using the hooks provided.
336
3-7. Other interior features
Trunk features
Storage box
Grocery bag hooks
Type BType A
337
3-7. Other interior features
3
Interior features
NOTICE
To prevent damage to the cargo net hooks
Avoid hanging things other than a cargo net on them.
Cargo net (if equipped)
Type A Type B
338
3-7. Other interior features
Garage door opener
The garage door opener (HomeLink® Universal Transceiver) is manufac-
tured under license from HomeLink®.
Programming HomeLink® (for U.S. owners)
To ensure correct programming into the HomeLink®, install a new
battery in the hand-held transmitter prior to programming. Failure to
install a new battery into the hand-held transmitter will affect both the
range and accuracy of the HomeLink® in your vehicle.
The battery side of the hand-held transmitter must be pointed away
from the HomeLink® during the programming process.
The HomeLink® compatible transceiver in your vehicle has 3 buttons
which can be programmed to operate 3 different devices. Refer to the
programming method below appropriate for the device.
Buttons
Indicator
The garage door opener can be programmed to operate garage
doors, gates, entry doors, door locks, home lighting systems, secu-
rity systems, and other devices.
: If equipped
339
3-7. Other interior features
3
Interior features
Programming HomeLink®
Point the remote control for the
device 1 to 3 in. (25 to 75 mm)
from the HomeLink® control but-
tons.
Keep the indicator light on
HomeLink® in view while pro-
gramming.
Press and hold down one of the
buttons on HomeLink® and the
button on the transmitter. When
the indicator light on HomeLink®
changes from a slow to a rapid
flash after 20 seconds, you can
release both buttons.
Test the operation of HomeLink®
by pressing the newly pro-
grammed button.
If programming a garage door
opener, check to see if the garage
door opens and closes. If the
garage door does not operate,
see if your garage transmitter is
of the Rolling Code type. Press
and hold the programmed
HomeLink® button. The garage
door has the rolling code feature
if the indicator light (on
HomeLink®) flashes rapidly for 2
seconds and then remains lit. If
your transmitter is of the Rolling
Code type, proceed to the head-
ing “Programming a rolling code
system”.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
340
3-7. Other interior features
Repeat the steps above to program another device for each of
the remaining HomeLink® buttons.
Programming a Rolling Code system (for U.S. owners)
If your device is Rolling Code equipped, follow the steps under the
heading “Programming HomeLink®” before proceeding with the
steps listed below.
Locate the training button on the ceiling-mounted garage door
opener motor. The exact location and color of the button may
vary by brand of garage door opener.
Refer to the operation manual supplied with the garage door opener
for the location of the training button.
Press the training button.
Press and release the vehicle’s programmed HomeLink® but-
ton twice. The garage door may open.
If the garage door opens, the programming process is complete. If
the door does not open, press and release the button a third time.
This third press and release will complete the programming process
by opening the garage door.
The ceiling-mounted garage door opener motor should now recog-
nize the HomeLink® transceiver and operate the garage door.
Repeat the steps above to program another rolling code sys-
tem for any of the remaining HomeLink® buttons.
Programming an entry gate (for U.S. owners)/Programming all
devices in the Canadian market
Place your transmitter 1 to 3 in. (25 to 75 mm) away from the
surface of HomeLink®.
Keep the indicator light on HomeLink® in view while programming.
Press and hold the selected HomeLink® button.
Repeatedly press and release (cycle) the device’s remote
control button for two seconds each until step 4 is complete.
When the indicator light on the HomeLink® compatible trans-
ceiver starts to flash rapidly, release the buttons.
STEP
4
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
341
3-7. Other interior features
3
Interior features
Test the operation of HomeLink® by pressing the newly pro-
grammed button. Check to see if the gate/device operates
correctly.
Repeat the steps above to program another device for each of
the remaining HomeLink® buttons.
Programming other devices
To program other devices such as home security systems, home
door locks or lighting, contact your authorized Toyota dealer for
assistance.
Reprogramming a button
The individual HomeLink® buttons cannot be erased but can be
reprogrammed. To reprogram a button, follow the “Programming”
instructions.
Operating HomeLink®
Press the appropriate HomeLink® button. The HomeLink® indicator
light on the HomeLink® transceiver should turn on.
HomeLink® continues to send a signal for up to 20 seconds as long as the
button is pressed.
Erasing the entire HomeLink® memory (all three programs)
Press and hold down the 2 out-
side buttons for 20 seconds until
the indicator light flashes.
If you sell your vehicle, be sure to
erase the programs stored in the
HomeLink® memory.
STEP
5
STEP
6
342
3-7. Other interior features
Before programming
Install a new battery in the transmitter.
The battery side of the transmitter must be pointed away from
HomeLink®.
Certification for the garage door opener
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of the
IC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not
cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
WARNING: This transmitter has been tested and complies with FCC and IC
rules. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party respon-
sible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the device.
CAUTION
When programming a garage door or other remote control device
The garage door may operate, so ensure people and objects are out of dan-
ger to prevent potential harm.
Conforming to federal safety standards
Do not use the HomeLink® compatible transceiver with any garage door
opener or device that lacks safety stop and reverse features as required by
federal safety standards.
This includes any garage door that cannot detect an obstruction object. A
door or device without these features increases the risk of death or serious
injury.
343
3-7. Other interior features
3
Interior features
Compass
The compass on the inside rear view mirror indicates the direction in
which the vehicle is heading.
Operation
To turn the compass on or off,
press and hold “AUTO” for 3
seconds.
Displays and directions
Display Direction
NNorth
NE Northeast
EEast
SE Southeast
S South
SW Southwest
WWest
NW Northwest
: If equipped
344
3-7. Other interior features
Calibrating the compass
The direction display deviates from the true direction determined by
the earth’s magnetic field. The amount of deviation varies according
to the geographic position of the vehicle.
If you cross over a map boundary shown in the illustration, the compass
will deviate.
To obtain higher precision or perfect calibration, refer to the following.
Deviation calibration
Stop the vehicle in a place where it is safe to drive in a circle.
Press and hold “AUTO” for 6
seconds.
A number (1 to 15) appears on
the compass display.
Press “AUTO” and, referring to the map above, select the
number of the zone where you are.
If the direction is displayed several seconds after adjustment, the
calibration is complete.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
345
3-7. Other interior features
3
Interior features
Circling calibration
Stop the vehicle in a place where it is safe to drive in a circle.
Press and hold “AUTO” for 9
seconds.
C appears on the compass dis-
play.
Drive the vehicle at 5 mph (8 km/
h) or less in a circle until a direc-
tion is displayed.
If there is not enough space to
drive in a circle, drive around the
block until the direction is dis-
played.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
Conditions unfavorable for correct operation
The compass may not show the correct direction in the following situations:
The vehicle is stopped immediately after turning.
The vehicle is on an inclined surface.
The vehicle is in a place where the earth's magnetic field is subject to
interference by artificial magnetic fields (underground car park/parking
lot, under a steel tower, between buildings, roof car park/parking lot, near
an intersection, near a large vehicle, etc.).
The vehicle has become magnetized.
(There is a magnet or metal object near the anti-glare inside rear view
mirror.)
The battery has been disconnected.
A door is open.
346
3-7. Other interior features
CAUTION
While driving the vehicle
Do not adjust the display. Be sure to adjust the display only when the vehicle
is stopped.
When doing the circling calibration
Be sure to secure a wide space, and watch out for people and vehicles in the
neighborhood. Do not violate any local traffic rules while performing circling
calibration.
NOTICE
To avoid compass malfunctions
Do not place magnets or any metal objects near the anti-glare inside rear
view mirror.
Doing this may cause a malfunction of the compass sensor.
To ensure normal operation of the compass
Do not perform circling calibration of the compass in a place where the
earth's magnetic field is subject to interference by artificial magnetic fields.
During calibration, do not operate electric systems (moon roof, power win-
dows, etc.) as they may interfere with the calibration.
348
4-1. Maintenance and care
Cleaning and protecting the vehicle exterior
Automatic car washes
Fold the mirrors back before washing the vehicle.
Brushes used in automatic car washes may scratch the vehicle surface
and harm your vehicle’s paint.
High pressure car washes
Do not allow the nozzles of the car wash to come within close proximity
of the windows.
Before car wash, check that the fuel filler door on your vehicle is closed
properly.
Aluminum wheels (if equipped)
Remove any dirt immediately by using a neutral detergent. Do not use hard
brushes or abrasive cleaners. Do not use strong or harsh chemical cleaners.
Use the same mild detergent and wax as used on the paint.
Bumpers
Do not scrub with abrasive cleaners.
Perform the following to protect the vehicle and maintain it in prime
condition:
Working from top to bottom, liberally apply water to the vehicle
body, wheel wells and underside of the vehicle to remove any
dirt and dust.
Wash the vehicle body using a sponge or soft cloth, such as a
chamois.
For hard-to-remove marks, use car wash soap and rinse thor-
oughly with water.
Wipe away any water.
Wax the vehicle when the waterproof coating deteriorates.
If water does not bead on a clean surface, apply wax when the vehicle
body is cool.
349
4-1. Maintenance and care
4
Maintenance and care
To prevent deterioration and body corrosion
Wash the vehicle immediately in the following cases:
After driving near the sea coast
After driving on salted roads
If you see coal tar or tree sap on the paint surface
If you see dead insects or insect droppings on the paint
After driving in an area contaminated with soot, oily smoke, mine dust,
iron powder or chemical substances
If the vehicle becomes heavily soiled in dust or mud
If liquids such as benzene and gasoline are spilled on the paint surface
If the paint is chipped or scratched, have it repaired immediately.
CAUTION
Caution about the exhaust pipe
Exhaust gasses cause the exhaust pipe to become quite hot.
When washing the vehicle, be careful not to touch the pipe until it has cooled
sufficiently, as touching a hot exhaust pipe can cause burns.
NOTICE
To protect your vehicle’s painted surfaces
Do not use organic cleaners such as benzene or gasoline.
Cleaning the exterior lights
Wash carefully. Do not use organic substances or scrub with a hard brush.
This may damage the surfaces of the lights.
Do not apply wax on the surfaces of the lights.
Wax may cause damage to the lenses.
350
4-1. Maintenance and care
Cleaning and protecting the vehicle interior
The following procedures will help protect your vehicle's interior and
keep it in top condition:
Protecting the vehicle interior
Remove dirt and dust using a vacuum cleaner. Wipe dirty sur-
faces with a cloth dampened with lukewarm water.
Cleaning the leather areas
Remove dirt and dust using a vacuum cleaner.
Wipe any excess dirt and dust with a soft cloth dampened with
diluted detergent.
Use a diluted water solution of approximately 5% neutral wool deter-
gent.
Wring out any excess water from the cloth and thoroughly
wipe off all remaining traces of detergent.
Wipe the surface with a dry, soft cloth to remove any remain-
ing moisture. Allow the leather to dry in a shaded ventilated
area.
Synthetic leather areas
Remove loose dirt using a vacuum cleaner.
Apply a mild soap solution to the synthetic leather.
Allow the solution to soak in for a few minutes. Remove the
dirt and wipe off the solution with a clean, damp cloth.
351
4-1. Maintenance and care
4
Maintenance and care
Caring for leather areas
Toyota recommends cleaning the interior of the vehicle at least twice a year
to maintain the quality of the vehicle's interior.
Shampooing the carpets
There are several commercial foaming-type cleaners available. Use a
sponge or brush to apply the foam. Rub in overlapping circles. Do not apply
water. Excellent results are obtained by keeping the carpet as dry as possi-
ble.
Seat belts
Clean with mild soap and lukewarm water using a cloth or sponge. Also
check the belts periodically for excessive wear, fraying or cuts.
CAUTION
Water in the vehicle
Do not splash or spill liquid in the vehicle.
Doing so may cause electrical components etc. to malfunction or catch
fire.
Do not get any of the SRS components or wiring in the vehicle interior wet.
(P. 8 8)
Electrical malfunction may cause the airbags to deploy or not function
properly, resulting in death or severe injury.
352
4-1. Maintenance and care
NOTICE
Cleaning detergents
Do not use organic substances such as benzene or gasoline, acidic or alka-
line solutions, dye, bleach or other detergent. Doing so may discolor the
vehicle interior or cause streaks or damage to painted surfaces.
Preventing damage to leather surfaces
Observe the following precautions to avoid damage to and deterioration of
leather surfaces.
Remove any dust or dirt on leather surfaces immediately.
Do not expose the vehicle to direct sunlight for extended periods of time.
Park the vehicle in the shade, especially during summer.
Do not place items made of vinyl, plastic, or that contain wax, on the
upholstery, as they may stick to the leather surface if the vehicle interior
heats up significantly.
Water on the floor
Do not wash the vehicle floor with water.
Vehicle systems such as the audio system may be damaged if water comes
into contact with electrical components under the floor of the vehicle, and
may also cause the body to rust.
Cleaning the inside of the rear window
Do not use glass cleaner to clean the rear window, as this may cause
damage to the rear window defogger heater wires or antenna. Use a cloth
dampened with lukewarm water to gently wipe the window clean. Wipe the
window in strokes running parallel to the heater wires or antenna.
Be careful not to scratch or damage the heater wires or antenna.
353
4
Maintenance and care
4-2. Maintenance
Maintenance requirements
Repair and replacement
It is recommended that genuine Toyota parts be used for repair to ensure
performance of each system. If non-Toyota parts are used in replacement or
if a repair shop other than a Toyota dealer performs repairs, confirm the war-
ranty coverage.
To ensure safe and economical driving, day-to-day care and regular
maintenance is essential. It is the owner’s responsibility to perform
regular checks. Toyota recommends the following maintenance.
General maintenance
Should be performed on a daily basis. This can be done by your-
self or by a Toyota dealer.
Scheduled maintenance
Should be performed at specified intervals according to the
maintenance schedule.
For details about maintenance items and schedules, refer to the
“Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”.
Do-it-yourself maintenance
You can perform some maintenance procedures yourself.
Please be aware that do-it-yourself maintenance may affect war-
ranty coverage.
The use of Toyota Repair Manuals is recommended.
For details about warranty coverage, see the separate “Owner’s War-
ranty Information Booklet”, “Owner’s Manual Supplement”.
354
4-2. Maintenance
Allow inspection and repairs to be performed by a Toyota dealer
Toyota technicians are well-trained specialists and are kept up to date
with the latest service information. They are well informed about the
operations of all systems on your vehicle.
Keep a copy of the repair order. It proves that the maintenance that has
been performed is under warranty coverage. If any problem should arise
while your vehicle is under warranty, your Toyota dealer will promptly
take care of it.
CAUTION
Warning in handling of battery
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and a wide variety of automobile
components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects and other reproductive harm. Work in a
well ventilated area.
Oils, fuels and fluids contained in vehicles as well as waste produced by
component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm.
Avoid exposure and wash any affected area immediately.
Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead
compounds which are known to cause brain damage. Wash your hands
after handling. (P. 378)
355
4-2. Maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
General maintenance
Engine compartment
Items Check points
Battery Check the connections.
(P. 378)
Brake fluid At the correct level? (P. 375)
Engine coolant At the correct level? (P. 373)
Engine oil At the correct level? (P. 368)
Exhaust system No fumes or strange sounds?
Power steering fluid At the correct level? (P. 376)
Radiator/condenser/hoses Not blocked with foreign matter?
(P. 374)
Washer fluid At the correct level? (P. 381)
Listed below are the general maintenance items that should be per-
formed at the intervals specified in the “Owner's Warranty Informa-
tion Booklet” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement/Scheduled
Maintenance Guide”. It is recommended that any problem you notice
should be brought to the attention of your Toyota dealer or qualified
service shop for advice.
356
4-2. Maintenance
Vehicle interior
Items Check points
Accelerator pedal Moves smoothly (without uneven
pedal effort or catching)?
Automatic transmission “Park”
mechanism
Can the vehicle be held securely
on an incline with the shift lever in
P?
Brake pedal
Moves smoothly?
Does it have appropriate clear-
ance and correct amount of free
play?
Brakes
Not pull to one side when
applied?
Loss of brake effectiveness?
Spongy feeling brake pedal?
Pedal almost touches floor?
Clutch pedal Moves smoothly?
Head restraints Move smoothly and lock
securely?
Indicators/buzzers Function properly?
Lights Do all the lights come on?
Parking brake
Moves smoothly?
Can hold the vehicle securely on
an incline?
Seat belts
Does the seat belt system oper-
ate smoothly?
Are the belts undamaged?
Seats Do the seat controls operate
properly?
Steering wheel
Moves smoothly?
Has correct free play?
No strange noises?
357
4-2. Maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
Vehicle exterior
Items Check points
Door/trunk Operate smoothly?
Engine hood The lock system works properly?
Fluid leaks Is there any leakage after park-
ing?
Tires
Inflation pressure is correct?
Tire surfaces not worn or dam-
aged?
Tires rotated according to the
maintenance schedule?
Wheel nuts are not loose?
CAUTION
If the engine is running
Turn the engine off and ensure that there is adequate ventilation before per-
forming maintenance checks.
358
4-2. Maintenance
Emission inspection and maintenance (I/M) programs
Some states have vehicle emission inspection programs which
include OBD (On Board Diagnostics) checks. The OBD system moni-
tors the operation of the emission control system.
If the malfunction indicator lamp comes on
The OBD system determines that a problem exists somewhere
in the emission control system. Your vehicle may not pass the I/
M test and may need to be repaired. Contact your Toyota dealer
to service the vehicle.
Your vehicle may not pass the I/M test:
When the battery is disconnected or discharged
Readiness codes that are set during ordinary driving are
erased.
Also, depending on your driving habits, the readiness codes
may not be completely set.
When the fuel tank cap is loose
The malfunction indicator lamp comes on as a temporary mal-
function and your vehicle may not pass the I/M test.
When the malfunction indicator lamp goes off after several
driving trips
The error code in the OBD system will not be cleared unless the
vehicle is driven 40 or more times.
If your vehicle does not pass the I/M test
Contact your Toyota dealer to prepare the vehicle for re-testing.
359
4
Maintenance and care
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Do-it-yourself service precautions
If you perform maintenance yourself, be sure to follow the correct
procedures as given in these sections.
Items Parts and tools
Battery condition (P. 378)
•Warm water
Baking soda
• Grease
Conventional wrench
(for terminal clamp bolts)
Brake fluid level (P. 375)
FMVSS No.116 DOT 3 or SAE
J1703 brake fluid
Rag or paper towel
Funnel (used only for adding
brake fluid)
Engine coolant level (P. 373)
“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant”
or similar high quality ethylene
glycol based non-silicate, non-
amine, non-nitrite and non-borate
coolant with long-life hybrid
organic acid technology.
For the U.S.A.:
“Toyota Super Long Life
Coolant” is pre-mixed with 50%
coolant and 50% deionized
water.
For Canada:
“Toyota Super Long Life
Coolant” is pre-mixed with 55%
coolant and 45% deionized
water.
Funnel (used only for adding
engine coolant)
Engine oil level (→P. 368)
“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or
equivalent
Rag or paper towel, funnel
(used only for adding oil)
360
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
CAUTION
The engine compartment contains many mechanisms and fluids that may
move suddenly, become hot, or become electrically energized. To avoid death
or serious injury observe the following precautions.
When working on the engine compartment
Keep hands, clothing, and tools away from the moving fan and engine
drive belt.
Be careful not to touch the engine, radiator, exhaust manifold, etc. right
after driving as they may be hot. Oil and other fluids may also be hot.
Do not leave anything that may burn easily, such as paper or rags, in the
engine compartment.
Items Parts and tools
Fuses (P. 405) Fuse with same amperage rating
as original
Light bulbs (P. 418) Bulb with same number and watt-
age rating as original
Power steering fluid
level (P. 376)
Automatic transmission fluid
DEXRON® II or III
Rag or paper towel
Funnel (used only for adding
power steering fluid)
Radiator and condenser
(P. 374)
Tire inflation pressure (P. 392) Tire pressure gauge
Compressed air source
Washer fluid (P. 381)
Water washer fluid containing
antifreeze (for winter use)
• Funnel
361
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
CAUTION
Do not smoke, cause sparks or expose an open flame to fuel or the bat-
tery. Fuel and battery fumes are flammable.
Be extremely cautious when working on the battery. It contains poisonous
and corrosive sulfuric acid.
Take care because brake fluid can harm your hands or eyes and damage
painted surfaces.
If fluid gets on your hands or in your eyes, flush the affected area with
clean water immediately.
If you still experience discomfort, see a doctor.
When working near the electric cooling fans or radiator grille
Vehicles with smart key system: Be sure the “ENGINE START STOP” switch
is OFF. With the “ENGINE START STOP” switch in IGNITION ON mode, the
electric cooling fans may automatically start to run if the air conditioning is on
and/or the coolant temperature is high. (P. 374)
Vehicles without smart key system: Be sure the engine switch is OFF. With
the engine switch in the “ON” position, the electric cooling fans may auto-
matically start to run if the air conditioning is on and/or the coolant tempera-
ture is high. (P. 374)
Safety glasses
Wear safety glasses to prevent flying or falling material, fluid spray, etc. from
getting in the eyes.
NOTICE
If you remove the air cleaner
Driving with the air cleaner removed may cause excessive engine wear due
to dirt in the air. Also, a backfire could cause a fire in the engine compart-
ment.
362
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Hood
CAUTION
Pre-driving check
Check that the hood is fully closed and locked.
If the hood is not locked properly, it may open while the vehicle is in motion
and cause an accident, which may result in death or serious injury.
Release the lock from the inside of the vehicle to open the hood.
Pull the hood release lever.
The hood will pop up slightly.
Lift the auxiliary catch lever
and lift the hood.
STEP
1
STEP
2
363
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
Positioning a floor jack
When raising your vehicle with a floor jack, position the jack cor-
rectly. Improper placement may damage your vehicle or cause injury.
Front
Rear
Type A
Type B
364
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
CAUTION
When raising your vehicle
Make sure to observe the following to reduce the possibility of death or seri-
ous injury:
Do not use the jack that was supplied with your vehicle.
Do not put any part of your body or get underneath the vehicle supported
only by the floor jack.
Always use automotive jack stands on a solid, level surface.
Do not start the engine while the vehicle is supported by the floor jack.
Stop the vehicle on level firm ground, firmly set the parking brake and put
the shift lever in P (automatic transmission) or R (manual transmission).
Make sure to set the floor jack properly at the jack point.
Raising the vehicle with an improperly positioned floor jack will damage
the vehicle and may cause the vehicle to fall off the floor jack.
Do not raise the vehicle while someone is in the vehicle.
When raising the vehicle, do not place any objects on top of or underneath
the floor jack.
Lift up the vehicle using a floor jack
such as the one shown in the illustra-
tion.
365
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
Engine compartment
2.5 L 4-cylinder (2AR-FE) engine
Power steering fluid
reservoir (P. 376)
Engine oil filler cap
(P. 370)
Engine oil level dipstick
(P. 368)
Brake fluid reservoir
(P. 375)
Fuse box (P. 405)
Battery (P. 378)
Radiator (P. 374)
Electric cooling fans
Condenser (P. 374)
Washer fluid tank (P. 381)
Engine coolant reservoir
(P. 373)
366
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
3.5 L V6 (2GR-FE) engine
Power steering fluid
reservoir (P. 376)
Engine oil filler cap
(P. 370)
Engine oil level dipstick
(P. 368)
Brake fluid reservoir
(P. 375)
Fuse box (P. 405)
Battery (P. 378)
Radiator (P. 374)
Electric cooling fans
Condenser (P. 374)
Washer fluid tank (P. 381)
Engine coolant reservoir
(P. 373)
367
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
Engine compartment cover (3.5 L V6 [2GR-FE] engine)
Removing the engine compartment cover
Installing the clips
368
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Engine oil
With the engine at operating temperature and turned off, check the oil
level on the dipstick.
Checking the engine oil
Park the vehicle on level ground. After turning off the engine,
wait more than five minutes for the oil to drain back into the
bottom of the engine.
Hold a rag under the end and pull the dipstick out.
2.5 L 4-cylinder (2AR-FE) engine
3.5 L V6 (2GR-FE) engine
Wipe the dipstick clean.
Reinsert the dipstick fully.
Holding a rag under the end, pull the dipstick out and check
the oil level.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
STEP
5
369
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
Wipe the dipstick and reinsert it fully.
2.5 L 4-cylinder (2AR-FE) engine
Low
Full
3.5 L V6 (2GR-FE) engine
Low
Full
STEP
6
370
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Adding engine oil
If the oil level is below or near
the low level mark, add engine
oil of the same type as already in
the engine.
Make sure to check the oil type and prepare the items needed before
adding oil.
Remove the oil filler cap by turning it counterclockwise.
Add engine oil slowly, checking the dipstick.
Install the filler cap, turning it clockwise.
Engine oil selection P. 4 8 5
Oil quantity
(Low Full) 1.6 qt. (1.5 L, 1.3 lmp. qt.)
Items Clean funnel
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
371
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
Engine oil consumption
The amount of engine oil consumed depends on the oil viscosity, the
quality of the oil and the way the vehicle is driven.
More oil is consumed under driving conditions such as high speeds and
frequent acceleration and deceleration.
A new engine consumes more oil.
When judging the amount of oil consumption, keep in mind that the oil
may have become diluted, making it difficult to judge the true level accu-
rately.
Oil consumption: Max. 1.1 qt./600 miles, 0.9 Imp. qt./600 miles (1.0 L per
1000 km)
If you consume more than 1.1 qt. (1.0 L, 0.9 Imp. qt.) every 600 miles
(1000 km), contact your Toyota dealer.
After changing the engine oil (U.S.A. only)
To reset the oil change system, follow the procedure below:
Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch or engine switch OFF with
the trip meter A reading shown. (P. 155)
While pressing the trip meter reset button (P. 147), turn the
“ENGINE START STOP” switch or engine switch ON.
Without multi-information display
Continue to press and hold the knob until the trip meter displays
000000.
With multi-information display
Continue to press and hold the knob until “COMPLETE” appears on
the multi-information display.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
3
372
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
CAUTION
Used engine oil
Used engine oil contains potentially harmful contaminants which may
cause skin disorders such as inflammation or skin cancer, so care should
be taken to avoid prolonged and repeated contact. To remove used engine
oil from your skin, wash thoroughly with soap and water.
Dispose of used oil and filters only in a safe and acceptable manner. Do
not dispose of used oil and filters in household trash, in sewers or onto the
ground. Call your Toyota dealer, service station or auto parts store for
information concerning recycling or disposal.
Do not leave used engine oil within the reach of children.
NOTICE
To prevent serious engine damage
Check the oil level on a regular basis.
When replacing the engine oil
Be careful not to spill engine oil on the vehicle components.
Avoid overfilling, as the engine could be damaged.
Check the oil level on the dipstick every time you refill the vehicle.
Be sure the engine oil filler cap is properly tightened.
373
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
Engine coolant
The coolant level is satisfactory if it is between the “F” and “L” lines on
the reservoir when the engine is cold.
Reservoir cap
FULL
LOW
If the level is on or below the “L”
line, add coolant up to the “F” line.
(P. 475)
If the coolant level drops within a short time after replenishing
Visually check the radiator, hoses, engine coolant filler cap, radiator cap,
drain cock and water pump.
If you cannot find a leak, have your Toyota dealer test the cap and check for
leaks in the cooling system.
Coolant selection
Only use “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” or similar high quality ethylene
glycol based non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrite, and non-borate coolant
with long-life hybrid organic acid technology.
U.S.A.: “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is a mixture of 50% coolant
and 50% deionized water. (Enabled: -31°F [-35°C])
Canada: “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is a mixture of 55% coolant
and 45% deionized water. (Enabled: -44°F [-42°C])
For more details about engine coolant, contact your Toyota dealer.
CAUTION
When the engine is hot
Do not remove the coolant reservoir cap.
The cooling system may be under pressure and may spray hot coolant if the
cap is removed, causing burns or other injuries.
374
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Radiator and condenser
Check the radiator and condenser and remove any foreign objects.
If any of the above parts are extremely dirty or you are not sure of
their condition, have your vehicle checked by your Toyota dealer.
NOTICE
When adding engine coolant
Coolant is neither plain water nor straight antifreeze. The correct mixture of
water and antifreeze must be used to provide proper lubrication, corrosion
protection and cooling. Be sure to read the antifreeze or coolant label.
If you spill coolant
Be sure to wash it off with water to prevent damage to parts or paint.
CAUTION
When the engine is hot
Do not touch the radiator or condenser, as they may be hot and may cause
burns.
375
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
Brake fluid
Checking fluid level
The brake fluid level should be
between the “MAX” and “MIN”
lines on the tank.
Make sure to check the fluid type and prepare the necessary items.
Adding fluid
Fluid type FMVSS No.116 DOT 3 or SAE J1703 brake fluid
Items Clean funnel
Brake fluid can absorb moisture from the air
Excess moisture in the fluid can cause a dangerous loss of braking effi-
ciency. Use only newly opened brake fluid.
CAUTION
When filling the reservoir
Take care because brake fluid can harm your hands or eyes and damage
painted surfaces.
If fluid gets in your eyes, flush your eyes with clean water immediately.
If you still experience discomfort, see a doctor.
376
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Power steering fluid
Fluid level
The fluid level should be within the appropriate range.
Full (when cold)
Add fluid (when cold)
Full (when hot)
Add fluid (when hot)
Hot: Vehicle has been driven around 50 mph (80 km/h) for 20
minutes, or slightly longer in cold temperatures. (Fluid tem-
perature, 140°F - 175°F [60°C - 80°C])
Cold: Engine has not been run for about 5 hours. (Room tempera-
ture, 50°F - 85°F [10°C - 30°C])
NOTICE
If the fluid level is low or high
It is normal for the brake fluid level to go down slightly as the brake pads
wear or when the fluid level in the accumulator is high.
If the reservoir needs frequent refilling, it may indicate a serious problem.
377
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
Checking the fluid level
Make sure to check the fluid type and prepare the necessary items.
Clean all dirt off the reservoir.
Remove the reservoir cap by turning it counterclockwise and
wipe the dipstick clean.
Reinstall the reservoir cap.
Remove the reservoir cap again and look at the fluid level.
Fluid type Automatic transmission fluid DEXRON® II or III
Items Rag or paper towel and funnel (only for adding
fluid)
CAUTION
Checking the fluid level
Take care, as the reservoir may be hot.
NOTICE
When adding fluid
Avoid overfilling, or the power steering may be damaged.
After replacing the reservoir cap
Check the steering box case, vane pump and hose connections for leaks or
damage.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
378
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Battery
Check the battery as follows.
Battery exterior
Make sure that the battery terminals are not corroded and that
there are no loose connections, cracks, or loose clamps.
Ter min als
Hold-down clamp
Checking battery fluid
Check the battery condition using the indicator color.
Type A
Blue: Good condition
White: Charging is necessary.
Have the vehicle inspected by
your Toyota dealer.
Red: Not working properly.
Have the battery checked by
your Toyota dealer.
379
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
Type B
Green: Good condition
Dark: Charging is necessary.
Have the vehicle inspected by
your Toyota dealer.
Clear or light yellow: Not
working properly. Have the
battery checked by your
Toyota dealer.
Before recharging
When recharging, the battery produces hydrogen gas which is flammable
and explosive. Therefore, before recharging:
If recharging with the battery installed on the vehicle, be sure to discon-
nect the ground cable.
Make sure the power switch on the charger is off when connecting and
disconnecting the charger cables to the battery.
After recharging/reconnecting the battery (vehicles with smart key sys-
tem)
The engine may not start. Follow the procedure below to initialize the sys-
tem.
Shift the shift lever to P.
Open and close any of the doors.
Start the engine. (If the engine does not start first time, repeat the
procedure.)
If the engine will not start even after multiple attempts at the above method,
contact your Toyota dealer.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
380
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
CAUTION
Chemicals in the battery
A battery contains poisonous and corrosive sulfuric acid and may produce
hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive. To reduce the risk of death
or serious injury, take the following precautions while working on or near the
battery:
Do not cause sparks by touching the battery terminals with tools.
Do not smoke or light a match near the battery.
Avoid contact with eyes, skin and clothes.
Never inhale or swallow electrolyte.
Wear protective safety glasses when working near the battery.
Keep children away from the battery.
Where to safely charge the battery
Always charge the battery in an open area. Do not charge the battery in a
garage or closed room where there is not sufficient ventilation.
How to recharge the battery
Only perform a slow charge (5 A or less). The battery may explode if
charged at a quicker rate.
Emergency measures regarding electrolyte
If electrolyte gets in your eyes
Flush your eyes with clean water for at least 15 minutes and get immedi-
ate medical attention. If possible, continue to apply water with a sponge or
cloth while traveling to the nearest medical facility.
If electrolyte gets on your skin
Wash the affected area thoroughly. If you feel pain or burning, get medical
attention immediately.
If electrolyte gets on your clothes
It can soak through clothing on to your skin. Immediately take off the cloth-
ing and follow the procedure above if necessary.
If you accidentally swallow electrolyte
Drink a large quantity of water or milk. Get emergency medical attention
immediately.
381
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
Washer fluid
Add washer fluid in the following
situations.
Any washer does not work.
The low washer fluid warning
light comes on. (if equipped)
The warning message
appears on the multi-informa-
tion display. (if equipped)
NOTICE
When recharging the battery
Never recharge the battery while the engine is running. Also, be sure all
accessories are turned off.
CAUTION
When refilling the washer fluid
Do not refill the washer fluid when the engine is hot or running, as the
washer fluid contains alcohol and may catch fire if spilled on the engine etc.
NOTICE
Do not use any fluid other than washer fluid
Do not use soapy water or engine antifreeze instead of washer fluid.
Doing so may cause streaking on the vehicle’s painted surfaces.
Diluting washer fluid
Dilute washer fluid with water as necessary.
Refer to the freezing temperatures listed on the washer fluid tank.
382
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Tires
Replace or rotate tires in accordance with maintenance sched-
ules and treadwear.
Checking tires
New tread
Treadwear indicator
Worn tread
The location of treadwear
indicators is shown by the
“TWI” or “ ” marks, etc.,
molded on the sidewall of
each tire.
Check spare tire condition
and inflation pressure if not
rotated.
Tire rotation
Vehicles with a compact spare tire
Rotate the tires in the order
shown.
To equalize tire wear and
extend tire life, Toyota recom-
mends that tire rotation is
carried out at the same inter-
val as tire inspection.
Front
383
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
Vehicles with a full-size spare tire
Rotate the tires in the order
shown.
To equalize tire wear and
extend tire life, Toyota recom-
mends that tire rotation is
carried out at the same inter-
val as tire inspection.
The tire pressure warning system (U.S.A. only)
Your Toyota is equipped with a tire pressure warning system that
uses tire pressure warning valves and transmitters to detect low
tire inflation pressure before serious problems arise. (P. 435)
Vehicles with compact spare tire: The compact spare tire is not
equipped with the tire pressure warning valve and transmitters.
Front
384
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Installing tire pressure warning valves and transmitters
When replacing tires or wheels, tire pressure warning valves and
transmitters must also be installed.
When new tire pressure warning valves and transmitters are
installed, new tire pressure warning valve and transmitter ID codes
must be registered in the tire pressure warning computer and the tire
pressure warning system must be initialized. Have tire pressure
warning valve and transmitter ID codes registered by your Toyota
dealer. (P. 385)
Initializing the tire pressure warning system
The tire pressure warning system must be initialized when
inflation the tire pressure is changed (such as when changing
traveling speed or load weight.)
When the tire pressure warning system is initialized, the current tire
inflation pressure is set as the pressure benchmark.
How to initialize the tire pressure warning system
Park the vehicle in a safe place and turn the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch or the engine switch OFF.
While the vehicle is moving, initialization is not performed.
Adjust the tire inflation pressure to the specified cold tire infla-
tion pressure level. (P. 491)
Make sure to adjust the tire pressure to the specified cold tire
inflation pressure level. The tire pressure warning system will
operate based on this pressure level.
Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to IGNITION ON
mode (vehicles with smart key system) or engine switch to the
“ON” position (vehicles without smart key system).
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
385
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
Push and hold the tire pressure
warning reset switch until the tire
pressure warning light blinks
slowly 3 times.
Vehicles with smart key system: Wait for a few minutes with
the IGNITION ON mode, and then turn the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch OFF.
Vehicles without smart key system: Wait for a few minutes
with the engine switch “ON”, and then turn the engine switch
to the “LOCK” position.
Registering ID codes
The tire pressure warning valve and transmitter is equipped with a
unique ID code. When replacing a tire pressure warning valve and
transmitter, it is necessary to register the ID code of tire pressure
warning valve and transmitter. Have the ID code registered by your
Toyota dealer.
STEP
4
STEP
5
386
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
When to replace your vehicle’s tires
Tires should be replaced if:
You have tire damage such as cuts, splits, cracks deep enough to
expose the fabric or bulges indicating internal damage
A tire goes flat repeatedly or cannot be properly repaired due to the
size or location of a cut or other damage
If you are not sure, consult with your Toyota dealer.
Replacing tires and wheels
If the ID code of the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter is not
registered, the tire pressure warning system will not work properly. After
driving for about 20 minutes, the tire pressure warning light comes on
after blinking for 1 minute to indicate a system malfunction.
Tire life
Any tire over 6 years old must be checked by a qualified technician even
if they have seldom or never been used or damage is not obvious.
If the tread wears down below 0.16 in. (4 mm) on snow tires
The effectiveness of snow tires is lost.
If you push the tire pressure warning reset switch accidentally
If initialization is performed, adjust the tire inflation pressure to the speci-
fied level and initialize the tire pressure warning system again.
387
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
When the initialization of the tire pressure warning system has
failed
Initialization can be completed in a few minutes. However, in the follow-
ing cases, the settings has not been recorded and the system will not
operate properly. If repeated attempts to record tire inflation pressure
settings are unsuccessful, have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota
dealer.
When operating the tire pressure warning reset switch, the tire pres-
sure warning light does not flash 3 times.
After carrying out the initialization procedure, the tire pressure warn-
ing light blinks for 1 minute then stays on after driving for about 20
minutes.
Routine tire inflation pressure checks
The tire pressure warning system does not replace routine tire inflation
pressure checks. Make sure to check tire inflation pressure as part of
your routine of daily vehicle checks.
Maximum load of tire
Check that the maximum load of the replacement tire is greater than 1/2
of the Gross Axle Weight Ratings (GAWR) of either the front axle or the
rear axle, whichever is greater.
For the GAWR, see the Certification
Label. For the maximum load of the
tire, see the load limit at maximum cold
tire inflation pressure mentioned on the
sidewall of the tire. (P. 498)
388
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Tire types
1 Summer tires
Summer tires are high-speed performance tires best suited to highway
driving under dry conditions. Since summer tires do not have the same
traction performance as snow tires, summer tires are inadequate for
driving on snow-covered or icy roads. For driving on snow-covered
roads or icy roads, the use of snow tires is recommended. When
installing snow tires, be sure to replace all four tires.
2 All season tires
All season tires are designed to provide better traction in snow and to
be adequate for driving in most winter conditions, as well as for use
year round. All season tires, however, do not have adequate traction
performance compared with snow tires in heavy or loose snow. Also,
all season tires fall short in acceleration and handling performance
compared with summer tires in highway driving.
3Snow tires
For driving on snow-covered roads or icy roads, we recommend using
snow tires. If you need snow tires, select tires of the same size, con-
struction and load capacity as the originally installed tires. Since your
vehicle has radial tires as original equipment, make sure your snow
tires also have radial construction. Do not install studded tires without
first checking local regulations for possible restrictions. Snow tires
should be installed on all wheels. (P. 179)
Initializing the tire pressure warning system
Initialize the tire pressure warning system with the tire inflation pressure
adjusted to the specified level.
389
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
Tire pressure warning system certification
FCC ID: PAXPMV107J
FCC ID: HYQ13BCX
IC ID: 3729A-PMV107J
IC ID: 1551A-13BCX
For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject
to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
FCC WARNING:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsi-
ble for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equip-
ment.
For vehicles sold in Canada
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may
not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference,
including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
390
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
CAUTION
When inspecting or replacing tires
Observe the following precautions to prevent accidents.
Failure to do so may cause damage to parts of the drive train, as well as
dangerous handling characteristics, which may lead to an accident
resulting in death or serious injury.
Do not mix tires of different makes, models or tread patterns.
Also, do not mix tires of remarkably different treadwear.
Do not use tire sizes other than those recommended by Toyota.
Do not mix differently constructed tires (radial, bias-belted or bias-ply
tires).
Do not mix summer, all season and winter tires.
When initializing the tire pressure warning system
Do not press the tire pressure warning reset switch without first adjusting
the tire inflation pressure to the specified level. Otherwise, the tire pres-
sure warning light may not come on even if the tire inflation pressure is
low, or it may come on when the tire inflation pressure is actually normal.
391
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
NOTICE
Repairing or replacing tires, wheels and tire pressure warning
valves and transmitters
When removing or fitting the wheels, tires or the tire pressure warning
valve and transmitter, contact your Toyota dealer as the tire pressure
warning valve and transmitter may be damaged if not handled correctly.
To avoid damaging the tire pressure warning valves and transmit-
ters
Do not use liquid sealants on flat tires.
Driving on rough roads
Take particular care when driving on roads with loose surfaces or pot-
holes.
These conditions may cause losses in tire air pressure, reducing the
cushioning ability of the tires. In addition driving on rough roads may
cause damage to the tires themselves, as well as the vehicle’s wheels
and body.
If tire inflation pressures become low while driving
Do not continue driving, or your tires and/or wheels may be ruined.
392
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Tire inflation pressure
Tire inflation pressure
The recommended cold tire inflation pressure and tire size is dis-
played on the tire and loading information label. (P. 491)
One of the following labels will
be attached to the driver’s side
center pillar.
Type B
Type D
Type A
Type C
393
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
Tire inflation pressure check interval
You should check tire inflation pressure every two weeks, or at least
once a month.
Do not forget to check the spare.
Inspection and adjustment procedure
Tire valve
Tire pressure gauge
Remove the tire valve cap.
Press the tip of the tire pressure gauge onto the tire valve.
Read the pressure using the graduations of the gauge.
If the tire inflation pressure is not at the recommended level
adjust the pressure.
If you add too much air, press the center of the valve to
lower.
After completing the tire inflation pressure measurement
and adjustment, apply soapy water to the valve and check
for leakage.
Reinstall the tire valve cap.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
STEP
5
STEP
6
394
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Effects of incorrect tire inflation pressure
Driving with incorrect tire inflation pressure may result in the following:
Reduced fuel efficiency
Reduced driving comfort and tire life
Reduced safety
Damage to the drive train
If a tire needs frequent refilling, have it checked by your Toyota dealer.
Instructions for checking tire inflation pressure
When checking tire inflation pressure, observe the following:
Check only when the tires are cold.
If your vehicle has been parked for at least 3 hours and has not been
driven for more than 1 mile or 1.5 km, you will get an accurate cold
tire inflation pressure reading.
Always use a tire pressure gauge.
The appearance of the tire can be misleading. In addition, tire infla-
tion pressures that are even just a few pounds off can degrade ride
and handling.
Do not bleed or reduce tire inflation pressure after driving. It is normal
for the tire inflation pressure to be higher after driving.
Never exceed the vehicle capacity weight.
Passengers and luggage weight should be placed so that the vehicle
is balanced.
395
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
CAUTION
Proper inflation is critical to save tire performance
Keep your tires properly inflated. Otherwise, the following conditions
may occur and result in an accident causing death or serious injury.
Excessive wear
Uneven wear
Poor handling
Possibility of blowouts resulting from overheated tires
Poor sealing of the tire bead
Wheel deformation and/or tire separation
A greater possibility of tire damage from road hazards
NOTICE
When inspecting and adjusting tire inflation pressure
Be sure to reinstall the tire valve caps.
Without the valve caps, dirt or moisture could get into the valve and
cause air leakage, which could result in an accident. If the caps have
been lost, replace them as soon as possible.
396
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Wheels
When replacing wheels
The wheels of your Toyota are equipped with tire pressure warning
valves and transmitters that allow the tire pressure warning system to
provide advanced warning in the event of a loss in tire inflation pressure.
Whenever wheels are replaced, the tire pressure warning valves and
transmitters must be installed. (P. 384)
If a wheel is bent, cracked or heavily corroded, it should be
replaced. Otherwise, the tire may separate from the wheel or
cause loss of handling control.
Wheel selection
When replacing wheels, care should be taken to ensure that
they are equivalent to those removed in load capacity, diameter,
rim width, and offset.
Replacement wheels are available at your Toyota dealer.
Toyota does not recommend using:
Wheels of different sizes or types
Used wheels
Bent wheels that have been straightened
Aluminum wheel precautions
Use only Toyota wheel nuts and wrenches designed for use
with your aluminum wheels.
When rotating, repairing or changing your tires, check that the
wheel nuts are still tight after driving 1000 miles (1600 km).
Be careful not to damage the aluminum wheels when using
tire chains.
Use only Toyota genuine balance weights or equivalent and
use a plastic or rubber hammer when balancing your wheels.
397
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
CAUTION
When replacing wheels
Do not use wheels that are a different size from those recommended in
the Owner’s Manual, as this may result in loss of handling control.
Never use an inner tube in a leaking wheel which is designed for a
tubeless tire. Doing so may result in an accident, causing serious
injury or death.
NOTICE
Replacing tire pressure warning valves and transmitters
Because tire repair or replacement may affect the tire pressure warn-
ing valves and transmitters, make sure to have tires serviced by your
Toyota dealer or other qualified service shop. In addition, make sure to
purchase your tire pressure warning valves and transmitters at your
Toyota dealer.
Ensure that only genuine Toyota wheels are used on your vehicle.
Tire pressure warning valves and transmitters may not work properly
with non-genuine wheels.
398
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Air conditioning filter
The air conditioning filter must be cleaned or changed regularly to
maintain air conditioning efficiency.
Removal method
Vehicles with smart key system: Turn the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch OFF.
Vehicles without smart key system: Turn the engine switch
OFF.
Open the glove box. Slide off
the damper.
Apply pressure to the glove
box as shown to disconnect
the claws.
Remove the filter cover.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
399
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
Checking interval
Inspect, clean and replace the air conditioning filter according to the mainte-
nance schedule. In dusty areas or areas with heavy traffic flow, more fre-
quent cleaning or early replacement may be required. (For scheduled
maintenance information, please refer to the “Scheduled Maintenance
Guide” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”.)
If air flow from the vents decreases dramatically
The filter may be clogged. Check the filter and replace if necessary.
Cleaning method
If the filter is dirty, clean by
blowing compressed air
through the filter from the
downward side.
Hold the air gun 2 in. (5 cm)
from the filter and blow for
approximately 2 minutes at 72
psi (500 kPa, 5.0 kgf/cm2 or
bar).
If it is not available, have the
filter cleaned by your Toyota
dealer.
Replacement method
Remove the air conditioning
filter and replace it with a new
one.
The “UP” marks shown on
the filter should be pointing up.
400
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
NOTICE
To prevent damage to the system
When using the air conditioning system, make sure that a filter is always
installed.
When cleaning the filter, do not clean the filter with water.
401
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
Key battery
Replace the battery with a new one if it is discharged.
You will need the following items:
Flathead screwdriver (To prevent damage to the key, cover
the tip of the screwdriver with rag.)
Small Phillips-head screwdriver
Lithium battery CR1632 (vehicles with smart key system), or
CR2016 (vehicles without smart key system)
Replacing the battery
Vehicles with smart key system
Take out the mechanical key.
Remove the cover.
STEP
1
STEP
2
402
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Remove the depleted battery.
Insert a new battery with the
“+” terminal facing up.
Vehicles without smart key system
Remove the cover.
Remove the module.
STEP
3
STEP
1
STEP
2
403
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
If the key battery is discharged
The following symptoms may occur.
The smart key system and wireless remote control will not function prop-
erly.
The operational range is reduced.
Use a CR1632 (vehicles with smart key system), or CR2016 (vehicles
without smart key system) lithium battery
Batteries can be purchased at your Toyota dealer, jewelers, or camera
stores.
Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by your
Toyota dealer.
Dispose of used batteries according to the local laws.
CAUTION
Removed battery and other parts
Keep away from children.
These parts are small and if swallowed by a child they can cause choking.
Open the case cover using a
coin protected with tape etc.
and remove the depleted bat-
tery.
Insert a new battery with the
“+” terminal facing up.
STEP
3
404
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
NOTICE
For normal operation after replacing the battery
Observe the following precautions to prevent accidents.
Always work with dry hands.
Moisture may cause the battery to rust.
Do not touch or move any other components inside the remote control.
Do not bend either of the battery terminals.
405
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
Checking and replacing fuses
If any of the electrical components do not operate, a fuse may have
blown. If this happens, check and replace the fuses as necessary.
Vehicles with smart key system: Turn the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch OFF.
Vehicles without smart key system: Turn the engine switch
OFF.
Open the fuse box cover.
Engine compartment
Push the tab in and lift the lid
off.
Under the drivers side instrument panel
Remove the lid.
After a system failure, see “Fuse layout and amperage rat-
ings” (P. 407) for details about which fuse to check.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
406
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Take out the pullout tool.
Only type A fuse can be
removed using the pullout tool.
Check if the fuse has blown.
Type A
Normal fuse
Blown fuse
Replace it with one of an
appropriate amperage rating.
The amperage rating can be
found on the fuse box lid.
Type B
Normal fuse
Blown fuse
Replace it with one of an
appropriate amperage rating.
The amperage rating can be
found on the fuse box lid.
STEP
4
STEP
5
407
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
Fuse layout and amperage ratings
Engine compartment (fuse box cover)
Type C
Normal fuse
Blown fuse
Contact your Toyota dealer.
408
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Engine compartment (fuse block)
2.5 L 4-cylinder (2AR-FE) engine
Fuse Ampere Circuit
1 SPARE 30 A Spare fuse
2 SPARE 15 A Spare fuse
3 SPARE 10 A Spare fuse
4 MSB 30 A No circuit
5 RDI FAN 40 A Electric cooling fans
6 CDS FAN 40 A Electric cooling fans
7 H-LP CLN 30 A No circuit
8 RR PWR SEAT 30 A No circuit
9 RR DEF 50 A Rear window defogger, MIR HTR
10 ABS NO.2 30 A
Anti-lock brake system, vehicle sta-
bility control system, traction con-
trol system, brake assist system
11 ABS NO.1 50 A
Anti-lock brake system, vehicle sta-
bility control system, traction con-
trol system, brake assist system
12 HTR 50 A Air conditioning system
13 FR DEF 15 A No circuit
409
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
14 RR FOG 10 A No circuit
15 ST/AM2 30 A Starting system, GAUGE NO.2,
IGN, INJ
16 ALT 120 A
RR FOG, FR DEF, HTR, ABS
NO.1, ABS NO.2, RR DEF, RR
PWR SEAT, H-LP CLN, CDS FAN,
RDI FAN, MSB, TAIL, PANEL, FR
FOG, CIG, RADIO No.2, ECU-
ACC, PWR OUTLET, GAUGE
No.1, ECU IG No.1, ECU IG No.2,
H-LP LVL, WASH, A/C No.2, S-
HTR, WIP, P/SEAT, DOOR No.2,
POWER, RR DOOR LH, RR
DOOR RH, ECU-B No.2, OBD,
FUEL OPN, PWR, STOP, S/ROOF,
TI&TE, A/C, AM1
17 STR LOCK 20 A Steering lock system
18 IG2 20 A
Multiport fuel injection system/
sequential multiport fuel injection
system, starting system, GAUGE
NO.2, IGN, INJ
19 HAZ 15 A Turn signal lights, gauge and
meters
20 ETCS 10 A
Multiport fuel injection system/
sequential multiport fuel injection
system
21 EFI2 30 A
Multiport fuel injection system/
sequential multiport fuel injection
system
22 MAYDAY/TEL 7.5 A No circuit
23 ALT-S 7.5 A Charging system
24 AM2 7.5 A Main body ECU
Fuse Ampere Circuit
410
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
25 EFI MAIN 30 A
Multiport fuel injection system/
sequential multiport fuel injection
system, EFI NO.2, EFI NO.3, main
body ECU
26 AMP 25 A Audio system
27 DOOR NO.1 25 A Main body ECU
28 RADIO NO.1 15 A Audio system, navigation system
29 ECU-B NO.1 10 A
Wireless remote control system,
front passenger occupant classifi-
cation system, main body ECU
30 DOME 10 A
Gauges and meters, trunk light,
engine switch light, door courtesy
lights, interior light, personal lights,
clock, smart key system
31 H-LP(LH) 15 A Left-hand headlight (high beam)
32 H-LP(RH) 15 A Right-hand headlight (high beam)
33 H-LP(LL) 15 A Left-hand headlight (low beam)
34 H-LP(RL) 15 A Right-hand headlight (low beam)
35 HORN 10 A Horns
36 EFI NO.1 10 A
Smart key system, multiport fuel
injection system/sequential multi-
port fuel injection system, main
body ECU
37 MPX-B 10 A Gauges and meters
38 A/F 20 A No circuit
39 S-HORN 7.5 A Horns
40 EFI NO.2 15 A
Multiport fuel injection system/
sequential multiport fuel injection
system
41 EFI NO.3 10 A
Multiport fuel injection system/
sequential multiport fuel injection
system
Fuse Ampere Circuit
411
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
3.5 L V6 (2GR-FE) engine
Fuse Ampere Circuit
1 SPARE 30 A Spare fuse
2 SPARE 15 A Spare fuse
3 SPARE 10 A Spare fuse
4 MSB 30 A No circuit
5 H-LP CLN 30 A No circuit
6 RR PWR SEAT 30 A No circuit
7 RR DEF 50 A Rear window defogger, MIR HTR
8 ABS NO.2 30 A
Anti-lock brake system, vehicle sta-
bility control system, traction con-
trol system, brake assist system
9 FAN MAIN 50 A Electric cooling fans
10 ABS NO.1 50 A
Anti-lock brake system, vehicle sta-
bility control system, traction con-
trol system, brake assist system
11 HTR 50 A Air conditioning system
12 RR FOG 10 A No circuit
13 ST/AM2 30 A Starting system
412
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
14 ALT 120 A
RR FOG, FR DEF, HTR, ABS
NO.1, FAN MAIN, ABS NO.2, RR
DEF, RR PWR SEAT, H- LP CLN,
CDS FAN, RDI FAN, MSB, TAIL,
PANEL, FR FOG, CIG, RADIO
No.2, ECU-ACC, PWR OUTLET,
GAUGE No.1, ECU IG No.1, ECU
IG No.2, H-LP LVL, WASH, A/C
No.2, S-HTR, WIP, P/SEAT, DOOR
No.2, POWER, RR DOOR LH, RR
DOOR RH, ECU-B No.2, OBD,
FUEL OPN, PWR, STOP, S/ROOF,
TI&TE, A/C, AM1
15 STR LOCK 20 A Steering lock system
16 IG2 20 A
Multiport fuel injection system/
sequential multiport fuel injection
system, starting system, GAUGE
NO.2, IGN, INJ
17 HAZ 15 A Turn signal lights, gauge and
meters
18 ETCS 10 A
Multiport fuel injection system/
sequential multiport fuel injection
system
19 E-ACM 10 A No circuit
20 MAYDAY/TEL 7.5 A No circuit
21 ALT-S 7.5 A Charging system
22 AM2 7.5 A Main body ECU
23 EFI MAIN 30 A
Multiport fuel injection system/
sequential multiport fuel injection
system, EFI NO.2, EFI NO.3
24 AMP 25 A Audio system
25 DOOR NO.1 25 A Main body ECU
26 RADIO NO.1 15 A Audio system, navigation system
Fuse Ampere Circuit
413
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
27 ECU-B NO.1 10 A
Wireless remote control system,
front passenger occupant classifi-
cation system, main body ECU
28 DOME 10 A
Gauges and meters, vanity lights,
trunk light, engine switch light, door
courtesy lights, interior light, per-
sonal lights, clock, smart key sys-
tem
29 H-LP(LH) 15 A Left-hand headlight (high beam)
30 H-LP(RH) 15 A Right-hand headlight (high beam)
31 H-LP(LL) 15 A Left-hand headlight (low beam)
32 H-LP(RL) 15 A Right-hand headlight (low beam)
33 HORN 10 A Horns
34 EFI NO.1 10 A
Smart key system, multiport fuel
injection system/sequential multi-
port fuel injection system, main
body ECU
35 MPX-B 10 A Gauges and meters
36 A/F 20 A
Multiport fuel injection system/
sequential multiport fuel injection
system
37 S-HORN 7.5 A Horns
38 EFI NO.2 15 A
Multiport fuel injection system/
sequential multiport fuel injection
system
39 EFI NO.3 10 A
Multiport fuel injection system/
sequential multiport fuel injection
system
Fuse Ampere Circuit
414
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Under the instrument panel
Fuse Ampere Circuit
1 RR DOOR RH 25 A Rear right power window
2 RR DOOR LH 25 A Rear left power window
3 FUEL OPN 7.5 A No circuit
4 FR FOG 15 A Front fog lights
5 OBD 7.5 A On-board diagnosis system
6 ECU-B NO.2 7.5 A Power windows
7 STOP 10 A
High mounted stoplight, shift lock
control system, multiport fuel injec-
tion system/sequential multiport
fuel injection system, main body
ECU, anti-lock brake system, vehi-
cle stability control system, traction
control system, brake assist sys-
tem
8 TI&TE 30 A No circuit
9 AM1 7.5 A
Multiport fuel injection system/
sequential multiport fuel injection
system
10 A/C 7.5 A Air conditioning system
415
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
11 PWR 25 A Power windows
12 DOOR NO.2 25 A Main body ECU
13 S/ROOF 30 A Moon roof
14 TAIL 15 A
Front side marker/parking lights,
stop/tail lights, rear side marker
lights, license plate lights, back-up
lights, front turn signal lights, main
body ECU
15 PANEL 7.5 A
Navigation system, seat heaters,
emergency flashers, air condition-
ing system, audio system, clock,
glove box light, instrument panel
lights, steering switches, vehicle
stability control system, traction
control system
16 ECU IG NO.1 10 A
Main body ECU, windshield wipers
and washer, moon roof, tire pres-
sure warning system, electric cool-
ing fans, auto anti-glare inside rear
view mirror, navigation system
17 ECU IG NO.2 7.5 A
Anti-lock brake system, vehicle sta-
bility control system, traction con-
trol system, brake assist system,
shift lock control system, auto-
matic transmission, cruise control
system
18 A/C NO.2 10 A Air conditioning system, rear win-
dow defogger
19 WASH 10 A Windshield wipers and washer
20 S-HTR 20 A Seat heaters
21 GAUGE NO.1 10 A
Emergency flashers, charging sys-
tem, multiport fuel injection system/
sequential multiport fuel injection
system, back-up lights
Fuse Ampere Circuit
416
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
22 WIP 25 A Windshield wipers and washer
23 H-LP LVL 7.5 A No circuit
24 INJ 15 A No circuit
25 IGN 10 A
Multiport fuel injection system/
sequential multiport fuel injection
system, SRS airbag system, steer-
ing lock system, front passenger
occupant classification system,
smart key system, electronic throt-
tle control system
26 GAUGE NO.2 7.5 A Gauges and meters, multi-informa-
tion display, clock
27 ECU-ACC 7.5 A
Clock, main body ECU, shift lock
control system, outside rear view
mirror, smart key system
28 CIG 20 A No circuit
29 PWR OUTLET 20 A Power outlet
30 RADIO NO.2 7.5 A Audio system, navigation system
31 MIR HTR 10 A Outside rear view mirror defoggers
32 POWER 30 A Power windows
33 P/SEAT 30 A Power seats
After a fuse is replaced
If the lights do not turn on even after the fuse has been replaced, a bulb
may need replacing. (P. 418)
If the replaced fuse blows again, have the vehicle inspected by your
Toyota dealer.
If there is an overload in the circuits
The fuses are designed to blow before the entire wiring harness is damaged.
Fuse Ampere Circuit
417
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
CAUTION
To prevent system breakdowns and vehicle fire
Observe the following precautions.
Failing to do so may cause damage, and possibly a fire or injury.
Never use a fuse of a higher amperage rating than indicated, or use any
other object in place of a fuse.
Always use a genuine Toyota fuse or equivalent.
Never replace a fuse with a wire, even as a temporary fix.
This can cause extensive damage or even fire.
Do not modify the fuse or the fuse box.
NOTICE
Before replacing fuses
Have the cause of electrical overload determined and repaired by your
Toyota dealer, as soon as possible.
418
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Light bulbs
You may replace the following bulbs yourself. The difficulty level of
replacement varies depending on the bulb. If necessary bulb
replacement seems difficult to perform, contact your Toyota dealer.
For more information about replacing other light bulbs, contact your
Toyota dealer.
Prepare a replacement light bulb.
Check the wattage of the light bulb being replaced. (P. 494)
Remove the engine compartment cover. (3.5 L V6 [2GR-FE]
engine)
P. 3 67
Bulb locations
Headlight high beam
Headlight low beam
Rear turn signal light
419
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
Replacing light bulbs
Headlights
Turn the bulb base counterclock-
wise.
Headlight (low beam)
Headlight (high beam)
Unplug the connector while
depressing the lock release.
Headlight (low beam)
Headlight (high beam)
Rear turn signal lights
Open the trunk lid and remove
the cover.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
1
420
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Turn the bulb bases counter-
clockwise.
Remove the light bulb.
Lights other than the above
If any of the lights listed below has burnt out, have it replaced by
your Toyota dealer.
Front fog lights (if equipped)
Front turn signal lights
Stop/tail lights
High mounted stoplight
Front side marker/parking lights
Back-up lights
License plate lights
Rear side marker lights
STEP
2
STEP
3
421
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
Condensation build-up on the inside of the lens
Contact your Toyota dealer for more information in the following situations.
Temporary condensation build-up on the inside of the headlight lens does
not indicate a malfunction.
Large drops of water have built up on the inside of the lens.
Water has built up inside the headlight.
LED stop/tail lights and high mounted stoplight
The stop/tail lights and high mounted stoplight consist of a number of LEDs.
If any of the LEDs burn out, take your vehicle to your Toyota dealer to have
the light replaced.
CAUTION
Replacing light bulbs
Turn off the headlights. Do not attempt to replace the bulb immediately
after turning off the headlights.
The bulbs become very hot and may cause burns.
Do not touch the glass portion of the light bulb with bare hands. Hold the
bulb by the plastic or metal portion.
If the bulb is scratched or dropped it may blow out or crack.
Fully install light bulbs and any parts used to secure them. Failing to do so
may result in heat damage, fire, or water entering the headlight unit. This
may damage the headlights or cause condensation to build up on the lens.
To prevent damage or fire
Make sure bulbs are fully seated and locked.
422
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
424
5-1. Essential information
Emergency flashers
NOTICE
To prevent battery discharge
Do not leave the emergency flashers on longer than necessary when the
engine is not running.
Use the emergency flashers if the vehicle malfunctions or is
involved in an accident.
Press the switch to flash all
the turn signal lights. To turn
them off, press the switch
once again.
5
When trouble arises
425
5-1. Essential information
If your vehicle needs to be towed
Before towing
The following may indicate a problem with your transmission. Contact
your Toyota dealer before towing.
The engine is running, but the vehicle will not move.
The vehicle makes an abnormal sound.
If towing is necessary, we recommend having your vehicle towed by
your Toyota dealer or a commercial towing service, using a lift-type
truck or a flat bed truck.
Use a safety chain system for all towing, and abide by all state/pro-
vincial and local laws.
If towing from the front, the vehicle's rear wheels and axles must be
in good condition. (P. 426)
If they are damaged, use a towing dolly or flat bed truck.
426
5-1. Essential information
Towing with a sling-type truck
Towing with a wheel-lift type truck from the front
Release the parking brake.
NOTICE
To prevent body damage
Do not tow with a sling-type truck, either from the front or rear.
NOTICE
To prevent damaging the vehicle
When raising the vehicle, ensure adequate ground clearance for towing at
the opposite end of the raised vehicle. Without adequate clearance, the
vehicle could be damaged while being towed.
5
When trouble arises
427
5-1. Essential information
Towing with a wheel-lift type truck from the rear
Automatic transmission: Use a
towing dolly under the front
wheels.
Manual transmissions: We rec-
ommend to use a towing dolly
under the front wheels.
When not using a towing dolly,
turn the engine switch to the
“ACC” position and shift the shift
lever to N.
Using a flat bed truck
If you use chains or cables to tie
down your vehicle, the angles
shaded in black must be 45°.
Do not overly tighten the tie
downs or the vehicle may be
damaged.
NOTICE
To prevent causing serious damage to the transmission
(automatic transmission)
Never tow this vehicle from the rear with the front wheels on the ground.
To prevent damaging the vehicle (manual transmission)
Do not tow the vehicle when the engine switch is in the “LOCK” position or
key removed.
The steering lock mechanism is not strong enough to hold the front wheel
straight.
428
5-1. Essential information
If you think something is wrong
If you notice any of the following symptoms, your vehicle probably
needs adjustment or repair. Contact your Toyota dealer as soon as
possible.
Visible symptoms
Fluid leaks under the vehicle
(Water dripping from the air conditioning after use is normal.)
Flat-looking tires or uneven tire wear
Engine coolant temperature gauge needle continually points
higher than normal
Audible symptoms
Changes in exhaust sound
Excessive tire squeal when cornering
Strange noises related to the suspension system
Pinging or other noises related to the engine
Operational symptoms
Engine missing, stumbling or running rough
Appreciable loss of power
Vehicle pulls heavily to one side when braking
Vehicle pulls heavily to one side when driving on a level road
Loss of brake effectiveness, spongy feeling, pedal almost
touches the floor
5
When trouble arises
429
5-1. Essential information
Fuel pump shut off system
Follow the procedure below to restart the engine after the system is
activated.
Vehicles with smart key system
Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF.
Restart the engine.
Vehicles without smart key system
Turn the engine switch to the “ACC” or “LOCK” position.
Restart the engine.
NOTICE
Before starting the engine
Inspect the ground under the vehicle.
If you find that fuel has leaked on to the ground, the fuel system has been
damaged and is in need of repair. Do not restart the engine.
To minimize the risk of fuel leakage when the engine stalls or an air-
bag inflates upon collision, the fuel pump shut off system stops sup-
plying fuel to the engine.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
1
STEP
2
430
5-1. Essential information
Event data recorder
In a crash or a near car crash event
The SRS airbag sensor assembly contains the EDR. In a crash or a
near car crash event, this device may record some or all of the follow-
ing information:
Engine speed
Whether the brake pedal was applied or not
Vehicle speed
To what extent the accelerator pedal was depressed
Position of the transmission shift lever
Whether the driver and front passenger wore seat belts or not
Driver's seat position
SRS airbag deployment data
SRS airbag system diagnostic data
Front passenger's occupant classification
The information above is intended to be used for the purpose of
improving vehicle safety performance. Unlike general data recorders,
the EDR does not record sound data such as conversation between
passengers.
Your vehicle has computers that monitor and control certain aspects
of your vehicle. These computers assist in driving and maintaining
optimal vehicle performance.
Besides storing data useful for troubleshooting, there is an event
data recorder (EDR) that records data in a crash or a near car
crash event.
5
When trouble arises
431
5-1. Essential information
Disclosure of the data
Toyota will not disclose the data recorded in an EDR to a third party
except when:
An agreement from the vehicle's owner (or the leasing company for
a leased vehicle) is obtained
Officially requested by the police or other authorities
Used as a defense for Toyota in a law suit
Ordered by a court law
However, if necessary Toyota will:
Use the data for research on Toyota vehicle safety performance
Disclose the data to a third party for research purposes without dis-
closing details of the vehicle owner, and only when it is deemed
necessary
Disclose summarized data cleared of vehicle identification informa-
tion to a non-Toyota organization for research purposes
432
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If a warning light turns on or a warning buzzer sounds...
Stop the vehicle immediately. Continuing to drive the vehicle may be dangerous.
The following warning indicates a possible problem in the brake sys-
tem. Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact your
Toyota dealer.
*: Parking brake engaged warning buzzer: The buzzer sounds to indicate that
the parking brake is still engaged (with the vehicle having reached a speed
of 3 mph [5 km/h]).
Warning light Warning light/Details
(U.S.A.)
(Canada)
Brake system warning light (warning buzzer)*
Low brake fluid
Malfunction in the brake system
This light also comes on when the parking brake is not
released. If the light turns off after the parking brake is fully
released the system is operating normally.
Calmly perform the following actions if any of the warning lights turn
on or flash. If a light turns on or flashes, but then turns off, this does
not necessarily indicate a malfunction in the system.
5
When trouble arises
433
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Stop the vehicle immediately.
The following warning indicates the possibility of damage to the vehi-
cle that may lead to an accident. Immediately stop the vehicle in a
safe place and contact your Toyota dealer.
Have the vehicle inspected immediately.
Failing to investigate the cause of the following warnings may lead to
the system operating abnormally and possibly cause an accident.
Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately.
Warning light Warning light/Details
Charging system warning light
Indicates a malfunction in the vehicle’s charging system.
Low engine oil pressure warning light (vehicles without
multi-information display)
Indicates that the engine oil pressure is too low.
Warning light Warning light/Details
(U.S.A.)
(Canada)
Malfunction indicator lamp
Indicates a malfunction in:
The electronic engine control system;
The electronic throttle control system; or
The electronic automatic transmission control system.
SRS warning light
Indicates a malfunction in:
The SRS airbag system;
The front passenger occupant classification system; or
The seat belt pretensioner system.
434
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
(U.S.A.)
(Canada)
ABS warning light
Indicates a malfunction in:
•ABS; or
The brake assist system.
If the malfunction indicator lamp comes on while driving
First check the following:
Is the fuel tank empty?
If it is, fill the fuel tank immediately.
Is the fuel tank cap loose?
If it is, tighten it securely.
The malfunction indicator lamp will go off after taking several driving trips.
If the malfunction indicator lamp does not go off even after several trips, con-
tact your Toyota dealer as soon as possible.
Warning light Warning light/Details
5
When trouble arises
435
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Follow the correction procedures.
After taking the specified steps to correct the suspected problem,
check that the warning light turns off.
Warning light Warning light/Details Correction procedure
Open door warning light
(warning buzzer)*1
Indicates that a door or the
trunk is not fully closed.
Check that all doors and the
trunk are closed.
Low fuel level warning
light
Indicates that remaining
fuel is about 2.8 gal. (10.5
L, 2.3 lmp. gal.) or less
Refuel the vehicle.
Driver’s seat belt
reminder light
(warning buzzer)*2
Warns the driver to fasten
his/her seat belt.
Fasten the seat belt.
(On the center
panel)
Front passenger’s seat
belt reminder light
(warning buzzer)*2
Warns the front passen-
ger to fasten his or her
seat belt.
Fasten the seat belt.
Low windshield washer
fluid warning light (vehi-
cles without multi-infor-
mation display)
Low level of washer fluid
Fill the tank.
436
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
(U.S.A. only)
Engine oil replacement
reminder light (vehicles
without multi-information
display)
Illuminates for about 3 sec-
onds and then flashes for
about 15 seconds approxi-
mately 4500 miles (7200
km) after the engine oil is
changed: Indicates that the
engine oil is scheduled to be
changed.
Check the engine oil, and
change if necessary.
Comes on and remains on if
the distance driven exceeds
5000 miles (8000 km): Indi-
cates that the engine oil
should be changed.
Check and change the
engine oil.
(U.S.A. only)
Tire pressure warning
light
When the light comes on:
Low tire inflation pressure.
Adjust the tire inflation
pressure.
When the light comes on
after blinking for 1 minute:
Malfunction in the tire
pressure warning system.
Have the system checked
by your Toyota dealer.
Master warning light
(vehicles with multi-infor-
mation display)
A buzzer sounds and the
warning light comes on
and flashes to indicate that
the master warning system
has detected a malfunc-
tion.
P. 4 44
Warning light Warning light/Details Correction procedure
5
When trouble arises
437
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
*1: Open door warning buzzer:
The open door warning buzzer sounds to alert the driver that one or more of
the doors or trunk is not fully closed (with the vehicle having reached a speed
of 3 mph [5 km/h]).
*2:Driver's and front passenger’s seat belt reminders:
The driver’s and front passenger’s seat belts reminder sound to alert the
driver and front passenger that his or her seat belt is not fastened. The
buzzer sounds intermittently for 10 seconds after the vehicle has reached a
speed of at least 12 mph (20 km/h). Then, if the seat belt is still unfastened,
the buzzer will sound at a different tone for 20 more seconds.
438
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Follow the correction procedures. (vehicles with smart key system)
After taking the specified steps to correct the suspected problem,
check that the warning light turns off.
Interior
buzzer
Exterior
buzzer
Warning
light Warning light/Details Correction
procedure
Once (Comes
on for 8
seconds.)
Smart key system warning
light
Indicates that the electronic
key is not present when the
“ENGINE START STOP”
switch is pressed.
Confirm the
location of the
electronic
key*.
Once
3 times
Smart key system warning
light
Indicates that a door other
than the driver’s door has
been opened and closed with
the “ENGINE START STOP”
switch in any mode other
than OFF and the electronic
key outside of the detection
area.
Confirm the
location of the
electronic
key.
Once
3 times
Smart key system warning
light
Indicates that the driver’s
door has been opened or
closed with the shift lever in
P, the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch in any mode
other than OFF and the elec-
tronic key outside of the
detection area.
Turn the
“ENGINE
START
STOP” switch
OFF or con-
firm the loca-
tion of the
electronic
key.
5
When trouble arises
439
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
*: If the engine does not start when the electronic key is inside the vehi-
cle, the electronic key battery may be depleted or there may be diffi-
culties receiving the signal from the key. (P. 3 4 )
Continuous
Continuous
Smart key system warning
light
Indicates that the driver’s
door has been opened or
closed with the shift lever not
in P, the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch in any mode
other than OFF and the elec-
tronic key outside of the
detection area.
Shift the shift
lever to P.
Confirm the
location of the
electronic
key.
Key reminder buzzer (vehicles without smart key system)
The buzzer indicates that the key has not been removed with the engine off
and the driver’s door opened.
Open moon roof reminder buzzer (if equipped)
The buzzer indicates that the moon roof is not fully closed with the engine off
and the driver’s door opened.
Front passenger detection sensor and passenger seat belt reminder
If luggage is placed on the front passenger seat, the front passenger
detection sensor may cause the warning light to flash, even if a passen-
ger is not sitting in the seat.
If a cushion is placed on the seat, the sensor may not detect a passen-
ger, and the warning light may not operate properly.
Changing the engine oil (U.S.A. only)
Make sure to reset the oil change system. (P. 371)
When the tire pressure warning light comes on (U.S.A. only)
Check the tire inflation pressure and adjust to the appropriate level.
Pushing the tire pressure warning reset switch does not turn off the tire
pressure warning light.
Interior
buzzer
Exterior
buzzer
Warning
light Warning light/Details Correction
procedure
440
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
The tire pressure warning light may turn on due to natural causes
The tire pressure warning light may turn on due to natural causes such
as natural air leaks or tire inflation pressure changes caused by temper-
ature. In this case, adjusting the tire inflation pressure will turn off the
warning light (after a few minutes).
When a tire is replaced with a spare tire
Vehicles with a compact spare tire
The compact spare tire is not equipped with the tire pressure warning
valve and transmitter. If a tire goes flat, the tire pressure warning light will
not turn off even though the flat tire is replaced with the spare tire.
Replace the spare tire with the repaired tire and adjust the proper tire
inflation pressure. The tire pressure warning light will turn off after a few
minutes.
Vehicles with a full-size spare tire
The spare tire is also equipped with the tire pressure warning valve and
transmitter. The tire pressure warning light will turn on if the tire inflation
pressure of the spare tire is low. If a tire goes flat, even though the flat
tire is replaced with the spare tire, the tire pressure warning light does
not turn off. Replace the spare tire with the repaired tire and adjust the
proper tire inflation pressure. The tire pressure warning light will turn off
after a few minutes.
If the tire pressure warning system is inoperative
The tire pressure warning system will be disabled in the following condi-
tions:
(When the condition becomes normal, the system will work properly.)
If tires not equipped with tire pressure warning valves and transmit-
ters are used.
If the ID code on the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters is
not registered in the tire pressure warning computer.
If the tire pressure warning select switch is set to a different tire set-
ting.
If the tire inflation pressure is 73 psi (500 kPa, 5.1 kgf/cm2 or bar) or
higher.
The tire pressure warning system may be disabled in the following condi-
tions:
5
When trouble arises
441
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
(When the condition becomes normal, the system will work properly.)
If electronic devices or facilities using similar radio wave frequencies
are nearby.
If a radio set at similar frequencies is in use in the vehicle.
If a window tint that affects the radio wave signals is installed
If there is a lot of snow or ice on the vehicle, in particular around the
wheels or wheel housings.
If non-genuine Toyota wheels are used. (Even if you use Toyota
wheels, the tire pressure warning system may not work properly with
some types of tires.)
If tire chains are used
Vehicles without compact spare tire
If the spare tire is in a location subject to poor radio wave signal
reception.
If a large metallic object which can interfere with signal reception is
put in the luggage room.
If the tire pressure warning light comes on after blinking for 1
minute frequently
If the tire pressure warning light comes on after blinking for 1 minute fre-
quently when the “ENGINE START STOP” switch or engine switch is
turned ON, have it checked by your Toyota dealer.
Customization that can be configured at Toyota dealer
The vehicle speed linked seat belt reminder buzzer can be disabled.
(Customizable features P. 510) However, Toyota recommends that the
seat belt reminder buzzer be operational to alert the driver and front passen-
ger that the seat belts are not fastened.
CAUTION
If the tire pressure warning light comes on
Be sure to observe the following precautions. Failure to do so could
cause loss of vehicle control and result in death or serious injury.
Stop your vehicle in a safe place as soon as possible. Adjust the tire
inflation pressure immediately.
442
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
CAUTION
If the tire pressure warning light comes on even after tire inflation pres-
sure adjustment, it is probable that you have a flat tire. Check the tires.
If the tire is flat, change to the spare tire and have the flat tire repaired
by the nearest Toyota dealer.
Avoid abrupt maneuvering and braking. If the vehicle tires deteriorate,
you could lose control of the steering wheel or the brakes.
If a blowout or sudden air leakage should occur
The tire pressure warning system may not activate immediately.
Maintenance of the tires
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly
when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the
vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure
label (tire and load information label). (If your vehicle has tires of a differ-
ent size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation
pressure label [tire and load information label], you should determine the
proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire
pressure monitoring system (TPMS-tire pressure warning system) that
illuminates a low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light) when
one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly,
when the low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light) illumi-
nates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and
inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-
inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may
affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) is not a sub-
stitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the
level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale (tire
pressure warning light).
5
When trouble arises
443
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
CAUTION
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS (tire pressure warning
system) malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operat-
ing properly. The TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunction indi-
cator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure
warning light). When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will
flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illumi-
nated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as
long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illumi-
nated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure
as intended.
TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunctions may occur for a vari-
ety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires
or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS (tire pressure warning
system) from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS (tire pres-
sure warning system) malfunction telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alter-
nate tires and wheels allow the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) to
continue to function properly.
NOTICE
Precaution when installing a different tire
When a tire of a different specification or maker is installed, the tire pres-
sure warning system may not operate properly.
444
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If a warning message is displayed (vehicles with multi-information display)
If a warning is shown on the multi-information display, stay calm and
perform the following actions:
Master warning light
The master warning light also
comes on or flashes in order to
indicate that a message is cur-
rently being displayed on the
multi-information display.
Multi-information display
If any of the warning lights turns on again after performing the fol-
lowing actions, contact your Toyota dealer.
5
When trouble arises
445
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Stop the vehicle immediately.
The following warning indicates the possibility of damage to the
vehicle that may lead to an accident. Immediately stop the vehicle
in a safe place and contact your Toyota dealer.
The following warning indicates the possibility of damage to the
vehicle that may lead to an accident. Immediately stop the vehicle
in a safe place and allow the engine to cool.
Warning message Details
Indicates an abnormal engine oil pressure.
A buzzer also sounds.
The warning light may turn on if the engine oil
pressure is too low.
Warning message Details
Indicates that the engine coolant temperature is
too high.
A buzzer also sounds.
446
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Have the vehicle inspected immediately.
Failing to investigate the cause of the following warnings may lead to
the system operating abnormally and possibly cause an accident.
Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately.
Warning message Details
(vehicles with smart
key system)
Indicates a malfunction in the steering lock sys-
tem.
A buzzer also sounds.
5
When trouble arises
447
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Follow the correction procedures.
After taking the specified steps to correct the suspected problem,
check that the warning light turns off.
Warning message Details Correction procedure
Indicates that one or
more of the doors is
not fully closed.
A buzzer sounds to
indicate that one or
more of the doors is
not fully closed (with
the vehicle having
reached a speed of 3
mph [5 km/h]).
Make sure that all of the
doors are closed.
Indicates that the
hood is not fully
closed.
A buzzer sounds to
indicate that hood is
not fully closed (with
the vehicle having
reached a speed of 3
mph [5 km/h]).
Close the hood.
448
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Indicates that the
trunk is not fully
closed.
A buzzer sounds to
indicate that the trunk
is not fully closed (with
the vehicle having
reached a speed of 3
mph [5 km/h]).
Close the trunk.
Indicates that the
moon roof is not fully
closed (with the
“ENGINE START
STOP” switch OFF
[vehicles with smart
key system] or the
engine switch OFF
[vehicles without
smart key system],
and the driver's door
open).
A buzzer also sounds.
Close the moon roof.
Indicates that the
parking brake is still
engaged with the
vehicle having
reached a speed of
more than 3 mph (5
km/h).
A buzzer also sounds.
Release the parking
brake.
Indicates that the
washer fluid level is
low.
A buzzer also sounds.
Add washer fluid.
Warning message Details Correction procedure
5
When trouble arises
449
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
(U.S.A. only)
Indicates that the
engine oil is sched-
uled to be changed.
A buzzer also sounds.
Check the engine oil,
and change if neces-
sary.
Comes on approxi-
mately 4500 miles
(7200 km) after the
engine oil is changed.
(The indicator will not
work properly unless
the oil maintenance
data has been reset).
(U.S.A. only)
Indicates that the
engine oil should be
changed.
A buzzer also sounds.
Check and change the
engine oil.
Comes on approxi-
mately 5000 miles
(8000 km) after the
engine oil is
changed (and the oil
maintenance data
has been reset).
Changing the engine oil (U.S.A. only)
Make sure to reset the oil change system. (P. 371)
Warning message Details Correction procedure
450
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Follow the correction procedures (vehicles with smart key system).
After taking the specified steps to correct the suspected problem,
check that the warning light turns off.
Interior
buzzer
Exterior
buzzer
Warning message Details Correction
procedure
Once (Comes on for 8 sec-
onds)
Indicates that
the electronic
key is not
present when
the “ENGINE
START STOP”
switch is
pressed.
Confirm the
location of the
electronic key.
Once
3 times
Indicates that a
door other than
the driver’s door
has been
opened and
closed with the
“ENGINE
START STOP”
switch in any
mode other
than OFF and
the electronic
key outside of
the detection
area.
Confirm the
location of the
electronic key.
5
When trouble arises
451
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Once
3 times
Indicates that
the driver’s door
has been
opened and
closed with the
shift lever in P,
the “ENGINE
START STOP”
switch in any
mode other
than OFF and
the electronic
key outside of
the detection
area.
Turn the
“ENGINE
START STOP”
switch OFF or
confirm the
location of the
electronic key.
Continuous Continuous
(Displayed alternately)
Indicates that
the driver’s door
has been
opened and
closed (with the
shift lever not in
P, the “ENGINE
START STOP”
switch in any
mode other
than OFF and
the electronic
key outside of
the detection
area).
Shift the shift
lever to P.
Confirm the
location of the
electronic key.
Once
Indicates that
the key battery
is low.
Replace the
battery.
(P. 401)
Interior
buzzer
Exterior
buzzer
Warning message Details Correction
procedure
452
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Once
Indicates that a
door has been
opened or
closed and the
“ENGINE
START STOP”
switch has been
turned twice to
ACCESSORY
mode from OFF.
Press the
“ENGINE
START STOP”
switch while
depressing the
brake pedal.
Once Indicates that
the electronic
key does not
operate prop-
erly.
P. 470
Once
Interior
buzzer
Exterior
buzzer
Warning message Details Correction
procedure
5
When trouble arises
453
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Once
Indicates that
the steering
lock has not
released within
3 seconds of
pressing the
“ENGINE
START STOP”
switch.
Press the
“ENGINE
START STOP”
switch again
while turning
the steering
wheel with the
brake pedal
depressed.
Interior
buzzer
Exterior
buzzer
Warning message Details Correction
procedure
454
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If you have a flat tire
Remove the flat tire and replace it with the spare provided.
Before jacking up the vehicle
Stop the vehicle on a hard, flat surface.
Set the parking brake.
Shift the shift lever to P (automatic transmission) or R (manual
transmission).
Stop the engine.
Turn on the emergency flashers.
Location of the spare tire, jack and tools
Vehicles with a compact spare tire
Transport
eyelet
(if equipped)
Spare tire
Jack
Wheel nut
wrench
Jack handle
5
When trouble arises
455
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Taking out the jack
Remove the jack cover.
Remove the hook.
Vehicles with a full-size spare tire
Transport
eyelet
(if equipped)
Spare tire
Jack
Wheel nut
wrench
Jack handle
STEP
1
STEP
2
456
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Taking out the spare tire
Remove the luggage floor cover.
Loosen the nut and remove it.
Remove the spare tire cover.
Loosen the bolt and remove it.
Remove the spacer (with alu-
minum wheels).
STEP
1
STEP
2
5
When trouble arises
457
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Replacing a flat tire
Chock the tires.
Vehicles with a steel wheel,
remove the wheel ornament
using the wrench.
To protect the wheel ornament,
place a rag between the wrench
and the wheel ornament, as
shown in the illustration.
STEP
1
Flat tire
Wheel
chock posi-
tions
Front
Left-
hand
side
Behind the
rear right-
hand side
tire
Right-
hand
side
Behind the
rear left-
hand side
tire
Rear
Left-
hand
side
In front of
the front
right-hand
side tire
Right-
hand
side
In front of
the front
left-hand
side tire
STEP
2
458
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Slightly loosen the wheel nuts
(one turn).
Turn the tire jack portion “A” by
hand until the notch of the jack is
in contact with the jack point.
Raise the vehicle until the tire is
slightly raised off the ground.
Remove all the wheel nuts and
the tire.
When resting the tire on the
ground, place the tire so that the
wheel design faces up to avoid
scratching the wheel surface.
STEP
3
STEP
4
STEP
5
STEP
6
5
When trouble arises
459
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Installing the tire
Remove any dirt or foreign mat-
ter from the wheel contact sur-
face.
If foreign matter is on the wheel
contact surface, the wheel nuts
may loosen while the vehicle is
in motion, and the tire may
come off the vehicle.
Install the tire and loosely tighten each wheel nut by hand by
approximately the same amount.
Replacing a steel wheel with a steel wheel
Tighten the nuts until the tapered
portion comes into loose contact
with the disc wheel seat.
Replacing an aluminum wheel with a steel wheel
Tighten the nuts until the tapered
portion comes into loose contact
with the disc wheel sheet.
STEP
1
STEP
2
Tapered portion
Disc wheel
seat
Tapered portion
Disc wheel
seat
460
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Replacing an aluminum wheel with an aluminum wheel
Turn the nuts until the washers
come into contact with the disc
wheel.
Lower the vehicle.
Firmly tighten each nut two or
three times in the order shown in
the illustration.
Tightening torque:
76 ft•lbf (103 N•m, 10.5 kgf•m)
For vehicles with a steel wheel,
reinstall the wheel ornament.
Align the cutout of the wheel
ornament with the valve stem
as shown.
Disc wheel
Washer
STEP
3
STEP
4
STEP
5
5
When trouble arises
461
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Stow the flat tire, tire jack and all tools.
The compact spare tire
The compact spare tire is identified by the label “TEMPORARY USE
ONLY” on the tire sidewall.
Use the compact spare tire temporarily only in an emergency.
Make sure to check the tire pressure of the compact spare tire.
(P. 491)
If you have a flat front tire on a road covered with snow or ice
Install the compact spare tire on the rear of the vehicle. Perform the fol-
lowing steps and fit tire chains to the front tires.
Replace a rear tire with the compact spare tire.
Replace the flat front tire with the tire removed from the rear of
the vehicle.
Fit tire chains to the front tires.
After completing the tire change (U.S.A. only)
The tire pressure warning system must be reset. (P. 384)
When using the compact spare tire
As the compact spare tire is not equipped with the tire pressure warning
valve and transmitter, low inflation pressure of the spare tire will not be
warned. Also, if you replace the compact spare tire after the tire pressure
warning light comes on, the light remains on.
Jack point guide
STEP
6
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
The jack point guides are located under
the rocker panel. They indicate the jack
point positions.
462
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
CAUTION
Using the tire jack
Improper use of the tire jack may lead to death or serious injuries due to
the vehicle suddenly falling off the jack.
Do not use the tire jack for any purpose other than replacing tires or
installing and removing tire chains.
Only use the tire jack that comes with this vehicle for replacing a flat
tire.
Do not use it on other vehicles, and do not use other tire jacks for
replacing tires on this vehicle.
Always check that the tire jack is securely set to the jack point.
Do not put any part of your body under the vehicle while it is supported
by a jack.
Do not start or run the engine while your vehicle is supported by the
jack.
Do not raise the vehicle while someone is in it.
When raising the vehicle, do not put an object on or under the jack.
Do not raise the vehicle to a height greater than that required to
replace the tire.
Use a jack stand if it is necessary to get under the vehicle.
Take particular care when lowering the vehicle to ensure that no one
working on or near the vehicle will be injured.
5
When trouble arises
463
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
CAUTION
Replacing a flat tire
Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of death or serious
injury.
Never use oil or grease on the wheel bolts or wheel nuts.
Oil and grease may cause the wheel nuts to be excessively tightened,
leading to bolt or disc wheel damage. In addition, the oil or grease can
cause the wheel nuts to loosen and the wheel may fall off, causing a
serious accident. Remove any oil or grease from the wheel bolts or
wheel nuts.
Have the wheel nuts tightened with a torque wrench to 76 ftlbf (103
Nm, 10.5 kgfm) as soon as possible after changing wheels.
Failure to follow these precautions could cause the nuts to loosen and
the wheel may fall off, which could lead to an accident causing death
or serious injury.
When using the compact spare tire
Remember that your compact spare tire is specifically designed for
use with your vehicle. Do not use your compact spare tire on another
vehicle.
Do not use two compact spare tires simultaneously.
Replace the compact spare tire with a standard tire as soon as possi-
ble.
Avoid sudden acceleration, deceleration and braking, as well as sharp
cornering.
Speed limit when using the compact spare tire
Do not drive at speeds in excess of 50 mph (80 km/h) when a compact
spare tire is installed on the vehicle.
The compact spare tire is not designed for driving at high speeds. Failing
to observe this precaution may lead to an accident causing death or seri-
ous injury.
464
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
CAUTION
When the spare tire is attached
The vehicle speed may not be correctly detected, and the following sys-
tems may not operate correctly:
ABS & Brake assist
VSC
TRAC
Navigation system (if equipped)
NOTICE
Do not drive the vehicle with a flat tire.
Do not continue driving with a flat tire.
Driving even a short distance with a flat tire can damage the tire and the
wheel beyond repair.
Be careful when driving over bumps with the compact spare tire
installed on the vehicle.
The vehicle becomes lower when driving with the compact spare tire
compared to when driving with standard tires. Be careful when driving
over uneven road surfaces.
Driving with tire chains and the compact spare tire
Do not fit tire chains to the compact spare tire.
Tire chains may damage the vehicle body and adversely affect driving
performance.
When replacing the tires
When removing or fitting the wheels, tires or the tire pressure warning
valve and transmitter, contact your Toyota dealer as the tire pressure
warning valve and transmitter may be damaged if not handled correctly.
To avoid damaging the tire pressure warning valves and transmit-
ters
Do not use liquid sealants on flat tires.
5
When trouble arises
465
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If the engine will not start
If the engine still does not start after following the correct starting
procedure (P. 131, 135) or releasing the steering lock (P. 133,
136), confirm the following points.
The engine will not start even when the starter motor oper-
ates normally.
One of the following may be the cause of the problem.
There may not be sufficient fuel in the vehicle’s tank.
Refuel the vehicle.
The engine may be flooded.
Try to restart the engine once more following correct starting
procedures. (P. 131, 135)
There may be a malfunction in the engine immobilizer system.
(P. 80)
The starter motor turns over slowly, the interior lights and
headlights are dim, or the horn does not sound or sounds at
a low volume.
One of the following may be the cause of the problem.
The battery may be discharged. (P. 471)
The battery terminal connections may be loose or corroded.
The starter motor does not turn over (vehicles with smart
key system).
The engine starting system may be malfunctioning due to an
electrical problem such as an open circuit or a blown fuse. How-
ever, an interim measure is available to start the engine.
(P. 466)
466
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Emergency start function (vehicles with smart key system)
When the engine does not start, the following steps can be used as
an interim measure to start the engine if the “ENGINE START STOP”
switch is functioning normally.
Set the parking brake.
Shift the shift lever to P.
Set the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to ACCESSORY
mode.
Press and hold the “ENGINE START STOP” switch for about
15 seconds while depressing the brake pedal firmly.
Even if the engine can be started using the above steps, the system
may be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle checked by your Toyota
dealer.
The starter motor does not turn over, the interior lights and
headlights do not turn on, or the horn does not sound.
One of the following may be the cause of the problem.
One or both of the battery terminals may be disconnected.
The battery may be discharged. (P. 471)
There may be a malfunction in the steering lock system (vehi-
cles with smart key system).
Contact your Toyota dealer if the problem cannot be repaired, or if
repair procedures are unknown.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
5
When trouble arises
467
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If the shift lever cannot be shifted from P (automatic transmission)
If the shift lever cannot be shifted with your foot on the brake, there
may be a problem with the shift lock system (a system to prevent
accidental operation of the shift lever). Have the vehicle inspected by
your Toyota dealer.
The following steps may be used as an emergency measure to
ensure that the shift lever can be shifted.
Set the parking brake.
Vehicles with smart key system: Turn the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch to the ACCESSORY mode.
Vehicles without smart key system: Turn the engine switch
to the “ACC” position.
Depress the brake pedal.
Pry the cover up with a flat-
head screwdriver or equiva-
lent.
Press the shift lock override
button.
The shift lever can be shifted
while the button is pressed.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
STEP
5
468
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If you lose your keys
New genuine keys can be made by your Toyota dealer. For vehicles
with the smart key system, bring the other key and the key number
stamped on the key number plate. For vehicles without the smart key
system, bring a master key and the key number stamped on the key
number plate.
5
When trouble arises
469
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If the electronic key does not operate properly (vehicles with smart key system)
Locking and unlocking the doors and opening the trunk with the mechanical key
Doors
Using the mechanical key (P. 25)
in order to perform the following
operations:
Locks all doors
Unlocks all doors
Turning the key rearward unlocks
the driver’s door. Turning the key
once again unlocks the other
doors.
Trunk
Turn the mechanical key clock-
wise to open.
If communication between the electronic key and the vehicle is inter-
rupted (P. 30) or the electronic key cannot be used because the
battery is depleted, the smart key system and wireless remote con-
trol cannot be used. In such cases, the doors and trunk can be
opened or the engine can be started by following the procedure
below.
470
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Changing “ENGINE START STOP” switch modes and starting the engine
Shift the shift lever to P and apply the brakes.
Touch the Toyota emblem side of
the electronic key to the
“ENGINE START STOP” switch.
An alarm will sound to indicate
that the start function cannot
detect the electronic key that is
touched to the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch if any of the doors
is opened and closed while the
key is touched to the switch.
To change “ENGINE START STOP” switch modes: Within 10
seconds of the buzzer sounding, release the brake pedal and
press the “ENGINE START STOP” switch. Modes can be
changed each time the switch is pressed. (P. 132)
To start the engine: Press the “ENGINE START STOP” switch
within 10 seconds after the buzzer sounds, keeping the brake
pedal depressed.
In the event that the “ENGINE START STOP” switch still cannot be
operated, contact your Toyota dealer.
STEP
1
STEP
2
Stopping the engine
Shift the shift lever to P and press the “ENGINE START STOP” switch as
you normally do when stopping the engine.
Replacing the key battery
As the above procedure is a temporary measure, it is recommended that the
electronic key battery be replaced immediately when the battery is depleted.
(P. 401)
STEP
3
5
When trouble arises
471
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If the battery is discharged
The following procedures may be used to start the engine if the vehi-
cle's battery is discharged.
You can call your Toyota dealer or qualified repair shop.
If you have a set of jumper (or booster) cables and a second vehi-
cle with a 12-volt battery, you can jump start your Toyota following
the steps below.
Connecting the jumper cables
Positive (+) battery terminal on your vehicle
Positive (+) battery terminal on the second vehicle
Negative (-) battery terminal on the second vehicle
Connect the jumper cable to ground on your vehicle as shown in
the illustration.
STEP
1
472
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Starting the engine when the battery is discharged (vehicles with auto-
matic transmission)
The engine cannot be started by push-starting.
Avoiding a discharged battery
Turn off the headlights and the audio system while the engine is turned
off.
Turn off any unnecessary electrical components when the vehicle is run-
ning at a low speed for an extended period, such as in heavy traffic, etc.
Start the engine of the second vehicle. Increase the engine
speed slightly and maintain at that level for approximately 5
minutes to recharge the battery of your vehicle.
Vehicles with smart key system — Open and close any of
the doors with the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF.
Maintain the engine speed of the second vehicle, and turn
the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to IGNITION ON mode
(vehicles with smart key system) or turn the engine switch
to the “ON” position (vehicles without smart key system),
then start the vehicle's engine.
Once the vehicle’s engine has started, remove the jumper
cables in the exact reverse order in which they were con-
nected.
Once the engine starts, have the vehicle checked at your Toyota
dealer as soon as possible.
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
STEP
5
5
When trouble arises
473
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
CAUTION
Avoiding battery fires or explosions
Observe the following precautions to prevent accidentally igniting the flam-
mable gas that may be emitted from the battery.
Make sure the jumper cable is connected to the correct terminal and that it
is not unintentionally in contact with any part other than the intended termi-
nal.
Do not allow the jumper cables to come into contact with the “+” and “-” ter-
minals.
Do not smoke, use matches, cigarette lighters or allow open flame near
the battery.
Battery precautions
The battery contains poisonous and corrosive acidic electrolyte, while
related parts contain lead and lead compounds. Observe the following pre-
cautions when handling the battery.
When working with the battery, always wear safety glasses and take care
not to allow any battery fluids (acid) to come into contact with skin, clothing
or the vehicle body.
Do not lean over the battery.
In the event that battery fluid comes into contact with the skin or eyes,
immediately wash the affected area with water and seek medical attention.
Place a wet sponge or cloth over the affected area until medical attention
can be received.
Always wash your hands after handling the battery support, terminals, and
other battery-related parts.
Do not allow children near the battery.
474
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
NOTICE
To prevent damage to the vehicle (vehicles with manual transmission)
Do not pull- or push-start the vehicle, because the catalytic converter may
overheat and become a fire hazard.
When handling jumper cables
Be careful that the jumper cables do not become tangled in the cooling fans
or any of the belts when connecting or disconnecting them.
5
When trouble arises
475
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If your vehicle overheats
If your engine overheats:
Stop the vehicle in a safe place and turn off the air condi-
tioning system.
Check to see if steam is coming out from under the hood.
If you see steam:
Stop the engine. Carefully lift the hood after the steam
subsides and then restart the engine.
If you do not see steam:
Leave the engine running and carefully lift the hood.
3.5 L V6 (2GR-FE) engine only: Remove the engine com-
partment cover. (P. 367)
Check to see if the cooling fans are operating.
If the fans are operating:
Wait until the temperature of the engine (shown on the
instrument cluster) begins to fall and then stop the
engine.
If the fans are not operating:
Stop the engine and call your Toyota dealer.
After the engine has cooled
down sufficiently, check the
engine coolant level and
inspect the radiator core (radi-
ator) for any leaks.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
STEP
5
STEP
5
476
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Overheating
If you observe the following, your vehicle may be overheating.
The engine coolant temperature gauge enters the red zone or a loss of
power is experienced.
Steam is coming from under the hood.
CAUTION
To prevent an accident or injury when inspecting under the hood of
your vehicle
If steam is seen coming from under the hood, do not open the hood until
the steam has subsided. The engine compartment may be very hot, caus-
ing serious injury such as burns.
Keep hands and clothing away from the fan and other belts while the
engine is running.
Do not loosen the coolant reservoir cap while the engine and radiator are
hot.
Serious injury, such as burns, may result from hot coolant and steam
released under pressure.
Add engine coolant if neces-
sary.
Water can be used in an emer-
gency if engine coolant is
unavailable. (P. 488)
Have the vehicle checked at the nearest Toyota dealer as soon as
possible.
STEP
6
5
When trouble arises
477
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
NOTICE
When adding engine coolant
Wait until the engine has cooled down before adding engine coolant.
When adding coolant, do so slowly. Adding cool coolant to a hot engine too
quickly can cause damage to the engine.
478
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If the vehicle becomes stuck
Emergency hooks (if equipped)
Carry out the following procedures if the tires spin or the vehicle
becomes stuck in mud, dirt, or snow.
Stop the engine. Set the parking brake and put the shift
lever in P (automatic transmission) or N (manual transmis-
sion).
Remove the mud, snow, or sand from around the stuck tire.
Place wood, stones or some other material to help provide
traction under the tires.
Restart the engine.
Shift the shift lever to the D or R position (automatic trans-
mission) or 1 or R position (manual transmission) and care-
fully apply the accelerator to free the vehicle.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
STEP
5
When your vehicle becomes stuck and
cannot move, the emergency hooks are
used for another vehicle to pull your vehi-
cle out in an emergency.
Your vehicle is not designed to tow
another vehicle.
5
When trouble arises
479
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
CAUTION
When attempting to free a stuck vehicle
If you choose to rock the vehicle back and forth to free it, make sure the sur-
rounding area is clear, to avoid striking other vehicles, objects or persons.
The vehicle may also lunge forward or lunge back suddenly as it becomes
free. Use extreme caution.
When shifting the shift lever
For vehicles with an automatic transmission, be careful not to shift the shift
lever with the accelerator pedal depressed.
This may lead to unexpected rapid acceleration of the vehicle that may
cause an accident and result in death or serious injury.
NOTICE
To avoid damaging the transmission and other components
Avoid spinning the wheels and do not rev the engine.
If the vehicle remains stuck after trying these procedures, the vehicle may
require towing to be freed.
480
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
482
6-1. Specifications
Maintenance data (fuel, oil level, etc.)
Dimensions and weights
*1: Unladen vehicles
*2: P215/55R17 tires
*3: P215/60R16 tires
Vehicle identification
Vehicle identification number
The vehicle identification number (VIN) is the legal identifier for your
vehicle. This is the primary identification number for your Toyota. It is
used in registering the ownership of your vehicle.
This number is stamped on the
top left of the instrument panel.
Overall length 189.2 in. (4805 mm)
Overall width 71.7 in. (1820 mm)
Overall height*157.7 in. (1465 mm)*2
57.9 in. (1470 mm)*3
Wheelbase 109.3 in. (2775 mm)
Tread Front 62.0 in. (1575 mm)
Rear 61.6 in. (1565 mm)
Vehicle capacity weight
(Occupants + luggage) 900 lb. (410 kg)
Towing capacity
(trailer weight + cargo weight) 1000 lb. (453 kg)
483
6-1. Specifications
6
Vehicle specifications
This number is also on the certifi-
cation label on the driver’s side
center pillar.
Engine number
The engine number is stamped on the engine block as shown.
2.5 L 4-cylinder (2AR-FE) engine
3.5 L V6 (2GR-FE) engine
484
6-1. Specifications
Engine
Fuel
Model 2AR-FE 2GR-FE
Type 4 cylinder in line,
4 cycle, gasoline
6 cylinder V type,
4 cycle, gasoline
Bore and stroke 3.54 × 3.86 in.
(90.0 × 98.0 mm)
3.70 × 3.27 in.
(94.0 × 83.0 mm)
Displacement 152.2 cu.in. (2494 cm3) 210.9 cu.in. (3456 cm3)
Drive belt tension Automatic adjustment
Valve clearance
(engine cold) Automatic adjustment
NOTICE
Drive belt type (2.5 L 4-cylinder [2AR-FE] engine only)
The high strength drive belt is used for the generator side drive belt.
When replacing the drive belt, use Toyota genuine drive belt or equivalent
high strength drive belt. If the high strength drive belt is not used, durability
of the belt may become less than expected. The high strength drive belt is a
belt with Aramid core which has higher strength compared to usually avail-
able belts with PET or PEN core.
Fuel type Unleaded gasoline only
Octane rating 87 (Research Octane Number 91) or higher
Fuel tank capacity 18.5 gal. (70 L, 15.4 Imp. gal.)
485
6-1. Specifications
6
Vehicle specifications
Lubrication system
Engine oil selection
“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” is used in your Toyota vehicle. Use Toy-
ota approved “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalent to satisfy the
following grade and viscosity.
Oil grade: ILSAC multigrade engine oil
2.5 L 4-cylinder (2AR-FE) engine
Recommended viscosity: SAE 0W-20
SAE 0W-20 is the best choice for
good fuel economy and good
starting in cold weather.
If SAE 0W-20 is not available,
SAE 5W-20 oil may be used.
However, it must be replaced
with SAE 0W-20 at the next oil
change.
The 0W portion of the oil viscosity rating indicates the characteristic of the
oil which allows cold startability. Oils with a lower value before the W allow
for easier starting of the engine in cold weather.
The 20 in 0W-20 indicates the oil viscosity when the oil is at its operating
temperature. An oil with a higher viscosity may be better suited if the vehi-
cle is operated at high speeds, or under extreme load conditions.
Oil capacity
(drain and refill)
With filter
Without filter
2.5 L 4-cylinder (2AR-FE) engine
4.7 qt. (4.4 L, 3.9 Imp. qt.)
3.5 L V6 (2GR-FE) engine
6.4 qt. (6.1 L, 5.4 Imp. qt.)
2.5 L 4-cylinder (2AR-FE) engine
4.2 qt. (4.0 L, 3.5 Imp. qt.)
3.5 L V6 (2GR-FE) engine
6.0 qt. (5.7 L, 5.0 Imp. qt.)
Outside temperature
486
6-1. Specifications
How to read oil container label:
The ILSAC (International Lubricant Standardization and Approval
Committee) Certification Mark is added to some oil containers to help
you select the oil you should use.
3.5 L V6 (2GR-FE) engine
Recommended viscosity: SAE 5W-30
SAE 5W-30 is the best choice for
good fuel economy and good
starting in cold weather.
If SAE 5W-30 is not available,
SAE 10W-30 oil may be used.
However, it should be replaced
with SAE 5W-30 at the next oil
change.
The 5W portion of the oil viscosity rating indicates the characteristic of the
oil which allows cold startability. Oils with a lower value before the W allow
for easier starting of the engine in cold weather.
The 30 in 5W-30 indicates the oil viscosity when the oil is at its operating
temperature. An oil with a higher viscosity may be better suited if the vehi-
cle is operated at high speeds, or under extreme load conditions.
Outside temperature
487
6-1. Specifications
6
Vehicle specifications
How to read oil container label:
The ILSAC (International Lubricant Standardization and Approval
Committee) Certification Mark is added to some oil containers to help
you select the oil you should use.
488
6-1. Specifications
Cooling system
Ignition system
Capacity
(Reference)
2.5 L 4-cylinder (2AR-FE) engine
7.5 qt. (7.1 L, 6.2 Imp. qt.)
3.5 L V6 (2GR-FE) engine
9.5qt. (9.0 L, 7.9 Imp. qt.)
Coolant type
Use either of the following.
“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant”
• Similar high-quality ethylene glycol-based non-silicate,
non-amine, non-nitrite, and non-borate coolant with
long-life hybrid organic acid technology
Do not use plain water alone.
Spark plug
Make
Gap
2.5 L 4-cylinder (2AR-FE) engine
DENSO SK16HR11
3.5 L V6 (2GR-FE) engine
DENSO FK20HR11
0.043 in. (1.1 mm)
NOTICE
Iridium-tipped spark plugs
Use only iridium-tipped spark plugs. Do not adjust spark plug gap.
489
6-1. Specifications
6
Vehicle specifications
Electrical system
Manual transaxle
Automatic transaxle
*: The fluid capacity is the quantity of reference. If replacement is nec-
essary, contact your Toyota dealer.
Battery
Open voltage at
68°F (20°C):
12.6 12.8 V Fully charged
12.2 12.4 V Half charged
11.8 12.0 V Discharged
(Voltage checked 20 minutes after the
engine and all the lights turned off)
Charging rates 5 A max.
Gear oil capacity (Reference) 2.4 qt. (2.3 L, 2.0 Imp. qt.)
Gear oil type API GL-4
Recommended gear oil
viscosity SAE 75W
Fluid capacity* 6.9 qt. (6.5 L, 5.7 Imp. qt.)
Fluid type Toyota Genuine ATF WS
NOTICE
Automatic transmission fluid type
Using automatic transmission fluid other than “Toyota Genuine ATF WS”
may cause deterioration in shift quality, locking up of your transmission
accompanied by vibration, and ultimately damage the transmission of your
vehicle.
490
6-1. Specifications
Clutch
Brakes
*1: Minimum pedal clearance when depressed with a force of 112 lbf (500 N,
51 kgf) while the engine is running
*2: Parking brake lever travel when pulled up with a force of 44 lbf (200 N, 20
kgf)
*3: Parking brake pedal travel when depressed with a force of 67 lbf (300 N, 31
kgf).
Pedal free play 0.2 0.6 in. (5 15 mm)
Fluid type SAE J1703 or FMVSS No.116 DOT 3
Pedal clearance*1
Automatic transmission
2.4 in. (61 mm)
Manual transmission
2.5 in. (63 mm)
Pedal free play 0.04 0.24 in. (1 6 mm)
Brake pad wear limit 0.04 in. (1.0 mm)
Parking brake lever travel*27 9 clicks
Parking brake pedal travel*37 10 clicks
Fluid type SAE J1703 or FMVSS No.116 DOT 3
491
6-1. Specifications
6
Vehicle specifications
Steering
Tires and wheels
3.5 L V6 (2GR-FE) engine with 16-inch tires
Free play Less than 1.2 in. (30 mm)
Power steering fluid type Automatic transmission fluid DEXRON® II
or III
Tire size P215/60R16 94V,
T155/70D17 110M
Tire inflation pressure
(Recommended cold tire
inflation pressure)
Driving under normal conditions
Front: 30 psi (210 kPa, 2.1 kgf/cm2 or
bar)*
Rear: 30 psi (210 kPa, 2.1 kgf/cm2 or
bar)*
Spare:
Full-size spare tire
30 psi (210 kPa, 2.1 kgf/cm or bar)
Compact spare tire
60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm or bar)
*: When driving at high speeds above
100 mph (160 km/h), in countries
where such speeds are permitted by
law, add 5 psi (30 kPa, 0.3 kgf/cm2 or
bar) to the front tires and rear tires.
Never exceed the maximum cold tire
inflation pressure indicated on the tire
sidewall.
Wheel size 16 × 6 1/2 J or 16 × 6 1/2 JJ,
17 × 4 T (compact spare)
Wheel nut torque 76 ft•lbf (103 N•m, 10.5 kgf•m)
492
6-1. Specifications
2.5 L 4-cylinder (2AR-FE) engine with 16-inch tires
Tire size P215/60R16 94V,
T155/70D17 110M
Tire inflation pressure
(Recommended cold tire
inflation pressure)
Driving under normal conditions
Front: 34 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm2 or
bar)*
Rear: 34 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm2 or
bar)*
Spare:
Full-size spare tire
34 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm or bar)
Compact spare tire
60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm or bar)
*: When driving at high speeds above
100 mph (160 km/h), in countries
where such speeds are permitted by
law, add 1 psi (10 kPa, 0.1 kgf/cm2 or
bar) to the front tires and rear tires.
Never exceed the maximum cold tire
inflation pressure indicated on the tire
sidewall.
Wheel size 16 × 6 1/2 J or 16 × 6 1/2 JJ,
17 × 4 T (compact spare)
Wheel nut torque 76 ft•lbf (103 N•m, 10.5 kgf•m)
493
6-1. Specifications
6
Vehicle specifications
Others
Tire size P215/60R16 94V, P215/55R17 93V,
T155/70D17 110M
Tire inflation pressure
(Recommended cold tire
inflation pressure)
Driving under normal conditions
Front: 32 psi
(220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm2 or bar)*
Rear: 32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm2 or
bar)*
Spare:
Full-size spare tire
32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm or bar)
Compact spare tire
60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm or bar)
*: When driving at high speeds above
100 mph (160 km/h), in countries
where such speeds are permitted by
law, add 3 psi (20 kPa, 0.2 kgf/cm2 or
bar) to the front tires and rear tires.
Never exceed the maximum cold tire
inflation pressure indicated on the tire
sidewall.
Wheel size 16 × 6 1/2 J or 16 × 6 1/2 JJ, 17 × 7 J,
17 × 4 T (compact spare)
Wheel nut torque 76 ft•lbf (103 N•m, 10.5 kgf•m)
494
6-1. Specifications
Light bulbs
A: H11 halogen bulbs B: HB3 halogen bulbs
C: Wedge base bulbs (clear) D: Wedge base bulbs (amber)
E: Double end bulbs
Light Bulbs Bulb No. WType
Exterior
Headlights
Low beam
High beam
9005
55
60
A
B
Front side marker/
parking lights 5D
Front turn signal lights 21 D
Rear turn signal lights 21 C
License plate lights 5C
Back-up lights 921 16 C
Front fog lights
(if equipped) 55 A
Interior
Personal lights
Front
Rear
5
8
C
C
Interior light 8E
Door courtesy lights 168 5 C
Vanity lights 8C
Glove box light 1.2 C
Trunk light 3.8 C
495
6-1. Specifications
6
Vehicle specifications
Fuel information
Fuel tank opening for unleaded gasoline
To help prevent incorrect fueling, your Toyota has a fuel tank opening that
only accommodates the special nozzle on unleaded fuel pumps.
If your engine knocks
Consult your Toyota dealer.
You may occasionally notice light knocking for a short time while acceler-
ating or driving uphill. This is normal and there is no need for concern.
Gasoline quality
In very few cases, driveability problems may be caused by the brand of gas-
oline you are using. If driveability problems persist, try changing the brand of
gasoline. If this does not correct the problem, consult your Toyota dealer.
Gasoline quality standards
Automotive manufacturers in the U.S., the Europe and Japan have
developed a specification for fuel quality called World-Wide Fuel Charter
(WWFC) that is expected to be applied worldwide.
The WWFC consists of four categories that are based on required emis-
sion levels. In the U.S., category 4 has been adopted.
The WWFC improves air quality by lowering emissions in vehicle fleets,
and improves customer satisfaction through better performance.
Your vehicle must use only unleaded gasoline.
Select octane rating 87 (Research Octane Number 91) or higher. Use
of unleaded gasoline with an octane rating lower than 87 may result
in engine knocking. Persistent knocking can lead to engine damage.
At minimum, the gasoline you use should meet the specifications
of ASTM D4814 in the U.S.A. and CGSB3.5-M93 in Canada.
496
6-1. Specifications
Toyota recommends the use of gasoline containing detergent additives
Toyota recommends the use of gasoline that contains detergent additives
to avoid build-up of engine deposits.
All gasoline sold in the U.S. contains detergent additives to clean and/or
keep clean intake systems.
Toyota recommends the use of cleaner burning gasoline
Cleaner burning gasoline, including reformulated gasoline that contains oxy-
genates such as ethanol or MTBE (Methyl Tertiary Butyl Ether) is available in
many areas.
Toyota recommends the use of cleaner burning gasoline and appropriately
blended reformulated gasoline. These types of gasoline provide excellent
vehicle performance, reduce vehicle emissions and improve air quality.
Toyota does not recommend blended gasoline
Toyota allows the use of oxygenate blended gasoline where the oxygen-
ate content is up to 10% ethanol or 15% MTBE.
If you use gasohol in your Toyota, be sure that it has an octane rating no
lower than 87.
Toyota does not recommend the use of gasoline containing methanol.
Toyota does not recommend gasoline containing MMT
Some gasoline contains octane enhancing additive called MMT (Methylcy-
clopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl).
Toyota does not recommend the use of gasoline that contains MMT. If fuel
containing MMT is used, your emission control system may be adversely
affected.
The malfunction indicator lamp on the instrument cluster may come on. If
this happens, contact your Toyota dealer for service.
497
6-1. Specifications
6
Vehicle specifications
NOTICE
Notice on fuel quality
Do not use improper fuels. If improper fuels are used the engine will be
damaged.
Do not use leaded gasoline.
Leaded gasoline can cause damage to your vehicle’s catalytic converters
causing the emission control system to malfunction.
Do not use gasohol other than that stated here.
Other gasohol may cause fuel system damage or vehicle performance
problems.
Using unleaded gasoline with an octane number or rating lower than that
stated here will cause persistent heavy knocking.
At worst, this will lead to engine damage.
Fuel-related poor driveability
If after using a different type of fuel, poor driveability is encountered (poor
hot starting, vaporization, engine knocking, etc.), discontinue the use of that
type of fuel.
When refueling with gasohol
Take care not to spill gasohol. It can damage your vehicle's paint.
498
6-1. Specifications
Tire information
Typical tire symbols
Standard tire
Compact spare tire
Tire size (P. 501)
DOT and Tire Identification Number (TIN) (P. 500)
Uniform tire quality grading
For details, see “Uniform Tire Quality Grading” that follows.
Location of treadwear indicators (P. 382)
499
6-1. Specifications
6
Vehicle specifications
Tire ply composition and materials
Plies are layers of rubber-coated parallel cords. Cords are the
strands which form the plies in a tire.
Radial tires or bias-ply tires
A radial tire has “RADIAL” on the sidewall. A tire not marked
“RADIAL” is a bias-ply tire.
TUBELESS or TUBE TYPE
A tubeless tire does not have a tube and air is directly filled in the
tire. A tube type tire has a tube inside the tire and the tube main-
tains the air pressure.
Load limit at maximum cold tire inflation pressure (P. 387)
Maximum cold tire inflation pressure (P. 491)
This means the pressure to which a tire may be inflated.
Summer tires or all season tires (P. 388)
An all season tire has “M+S” on the sidewall. A tire not marked
“M+S” is a summer tire.
“TEMPORARY USE ONLY” (P. 461)
A compact spare tire is identified by the phrase “TEMPORARY USE
ONLY” molded into its sidewall. This tire is designed for temporary
emergency use only.
500
6-1. Specifications
Typical DOT and Tire Identification Number (TIN)
DOT symbol*
Tire Identification Number
(TIN)
Tire manufacturer's identifica-
tion mark
Tire size code
Manufacturer's optional tire
type code (3 or 4 letters)
Manufacturing week
Manufacturing year
*: The DOT symbol certifies
that the tire conforms to
applicable Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standards.
501
6-1. Specifications
6
Vehicle specifications
Tire size
Typical tire size information
The illustration indicates typical
tire size.
Tire use
(P = Passenger car,
T = Temporary use)
Section width (millimeters)
Aspect ratio
(tire height to section width)
Tire construction code
(R = Radial, D = Diagonal)
Wheel diameter (inches)
Load index (2 or 3 digits)
Speed symbol
(alphabet with one letter)
Tire dimensions
Section width
Tire height
Wheel diameter
502
6-1. Specifications
Tire section names
Bead
Sidewall
Shoulder
Tread
Belt
Inner liner
Reinforcing rubber
Carcass
Rim lines
Bead wires
Chafer
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
This information has been prepared in accordance with regulations
issued by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration of the
U.S.A. Department of Transportation.
It provides the purchasers and/or prospective purchasers of Toyota
vehicles with information on uniform tire quality grading.
Your Toyota dealer will help answer any questions you may have as
you read this information.
DOT quality grades
All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Federal Safety
Requirements in addition to these grades. Quality grades can be
found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder
and maximum section width.
For example: Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
503
6-1. Specifications
6
Vehicle specifications
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear
rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a speci-
fied government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half (1-1/2)
times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100.
The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions
of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due
to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in
road characteristics and climate.
Traction AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B and C,
and they represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as
measured under controlled conditions on specified government
test surfaces of asphalt and concrete.
A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.
Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on braking
(straight ahead) traction tests and does not include cornering (turn-
ing) traction.
Temperature A, B, C
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, represent-
ing the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to
dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a speci-
fied indoor laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to
degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead
to sudden tire failure.
The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passen-
ger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Stan-
dard No. 109.
Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the labo-
ratory test wheel than the minimum required by law.
504
6-1. Specifications
Warning: The temperature grades for this tire are established for a
tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either sepa-
rately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire fail-
ure.
Glossary of tire terminology
Tire related term Meaning
Cold tire inflation pres-
sure
Tire pressure when the vehicle has been
parked for three hours or more, or has not
been driven more than 1 mile or 1.5 km under
that condition
Maximum inflation
pressure
The maximum cold inflated pressure to which a
tire may be inflated, shown on the sidewall of
the tire
Recommended infla-
tion pressure
Cold tire inflation pressure recommended by a
manufacturer
Accessory weight
The combined weight (in excess of those stan-
dard items which may be replaced) of auto-
matic transmission, power steering, power
brakes, power windows, power seats, radio
and heater, to the extent that these items are
available as factory-installed equipment
(whether installed or not)
Curb weight
The weight of a motor vehicle with standard
equipment, including the maximum capacity of
fuel, oil and coolant, and if so equipped, air
conditioning and additional weight optional
engine
Maximum loaded vehi-
cle weight
The sum of:
(a) Curb weight
(b) Accessory weight
(c) Vehicle capacity weight
(d) Production options weight
505
6-1. Specifications
6
Vehicle specifications
Tire related term Meaning
Normal occupant
weight
150 lb. (68 kg) times the number of occupants
specified in the second column of Table 1* that
follows
Occupant distribution Distribution of occupants in a vehicle as speci-
fied in the third column of Table 1* below
Production options
weight
The combined weight of installed regular pro-
duction options weighing over 5 lb. (2.3 kg) in
excess of the standard items which they
replace, not previously considered in curb
weight or accessory weight, including heavy
duty brakes, ride levelers, roof rack, heavy duty
battery, and special trim
Rim A metal support for a tire or a tire and tube
assembly upon which the tire beads are seated
Rim diameter
(Wheel diameter) Nominal diameter of the bead seat
Rim size designation Rim diameter and width
Rim type designation The industry manufacturer's designation for a
rim by style or code
Rim width Nominal distance between rim flanges
Vehicle capacity
weight (Total load
capacity)
The rated cargo and luggage load plus 150 lb.
(68 kg) times the vehicle's designated seating
capacity
Vehicle maximum load
on the tire
The load on an individual tire that is determined
by distributing to each axle its share of the
maximum loaded vehicle weight, and dividing
by two
Vehicle normal load
on the tire
The load on an individual tire that is determined
by distributing to each axle its share of curb
weight, accessory weight, and normal occu-
pant weight (distributed in accordance with
Tabl e 1 * below), and dividing by two
506
6-1. Specifications
Tire related term Meaning
Weather side The surface area of the rim not covered by the
inflated tire
Bead
The part of the tire that is made of steel wires,
wrapped or reinforced by ply cords and that is
shaped to fit the rim
Bead separation A breakdown of the bond between components
in the bead
Bias ply tire
A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that
extend to the beads are laid at alternate angles
substantially less than 90 degrees to the cen-
terline of the tread
Carcass The tire structure, except tread and sidewall
rubber which, when inflated, bears the load
Chunking The breaking away of pieces of the tread or
sidewall
Cord The strands forming the plies in the tire
Cord separation The parting of cords from adjacent rubber com-
pounds
Cracking Any parting within the tread, sidewall, or inner-
liner of the tire extending to cord material
CT
A pneumatic tire with an inverted flange tire
and rim system in which the rim is designed
with rim flanges pointed radially inward and the
tire is designed to fit on the underside of the
rim in a manner that encloses the rim flanges
inside the air cavity of the tire
Extra load tire
A tire designed to operate at higher loads and
at higher inflation pressures than the corre-
sponding standard tire
Groove The space between two adjacent tread ribs
Innerliner
The layer(s) forming the inside surface of a
tubeless tire that contains the inflating medium
within the tire
507
6-1. Specifications
6
Vehicle specifications
Tire related term Meaning
Innerliner separation The parting of the innerliner from cord material
in the carcass
Intended outboard
sidewall
(a) The sidewall that contains a whitewall,
bears white lettering, or bears manufac-
turer, brand, and/or model name molding
that is higher or deeper than the same
molding on the other sidewall of the tire, or
(b) The outward facing sidewall of an asym-
metrical tire that has a particular side that
must always face outward when mounted
on a vehicle
Light truck (LT) tire
A tire designated by its manufacturer as prima-
rily intended for use on lightweight trucks or
multipurpose passenger vehicles
Load rating The maximum load that a tire is rated to carry
for a given inflation pressure
Maximum load rating The load rating for a tire at the maximum per-
missible inflation pressure for that tire
Maximum permissible
inflation pressure
The maximum cold inflation pressure to which
a tire may be inflated
Measuring rim The rim on which a tire is fitted for physical
dimension requirements
Open splice Any parting at any junction of tread, sidewall, or
innerliner that extends to cord material
Outer diameter The overall diameter of an inflated new tire
Overall width
The linear distance between the exteriors of
the sidewalls of an inflated tire, including eleva-
tions due to labeling, decorations, or protective
bands or ribs
Passenger car tire
A tire intended for use on passenger cars, mul-
tipurpose passenger vehicles, and trucks, that
have a gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR) of
10,000 lb. or less.
508
6-1. Specifications
Tire related term Meaning
Ply A layer of rubber-coated parallel cords
Ply separation A parting of rubber compound between adja-
cent plies
Pneumatic tire
A mechanical device made of rubber, chemi-
cals, fabric and steel or other materials, that,
when mounted on an automotive wheel, pro-
vides the traction and contains the gas or fluid
that sustains the load
Radial ply tire
A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that
extend to the beads are laid at substantially 90
degrees to the centerline of the tread
Reinforced tire
A tire designed to operate at higher loads and
at higher inflation pressures than the corre-
sponding standard tire
Section width
The linear distance between the exteriors of
the sidewalls of an inflated tire, excluding ele-
vations due to labeling, decoration, or protec-
tive bands
Sidewall That portion of a tire between the tread and
bead
Sidewall separation The parting of the rubber compound from the
cord material in the sidewall
Snow tire
A tire that attains a traction index equal to or
greater than 110, compared to the ASTM-E
1136 Standard Reference Test Tire, when
using the snow traction test as described in
ASTM F-1805-00, Standard Test Method for
Single Wheel Driving Traction in a Straight Line
on Snow-and Ice-Covered Surfaces, and which
is marked with an Alpine Symbol ( ) on at
least one sidewall
Tes t ri m
The rim on which a tire is fitted for testing, and
may be any rim listed as appropriate for use
with that tire
509
6-1. Specifications
6
Vehicle specifications
*: Table 1 Occupant loading and distribution for vehicle normal load
for various designated seating capacities
Tire related term Meaning
Tread That portion of a tire that comes into contact
with the road
Tread rib A tread section running circumferentially
around a tire
Tread separation Pulling away of the tread from the tire carcass
Treadwear indicators
(TWI)
The projections within the principal grooves
designed to give a visual indication of the
degrees of wear of the tread
Wheel-holding fixture The fixture used to hold the wheel and tire
assembly securely during testing
Designated seating
capacity, Number of
occupants
Vehicle normal load,
Number of occupants
Occupant distribution in
a normally loaded vehi-
cle
2 through 4 2 2 in front
5 through 10 3 2 in front, 1 in second
seat
11 through 15 5
2 in front, 1 in second
seat, 1 in third seat, 1
in fourth seat
16 through 20 7
2 in front, 2 in second
seat, 2 in third seat, 1
in fourth seat
510
6-2. Customization
Customizable features
Item Function Default setting Customized
setting
Smart key
system
(P. 27)
Smart key system On Off
Operation signal
(Emergency flashers) On Off
Operation signal
(Buzzer) On Off
Wireless
remote con-
trol
(P. 38)
Wireless remote control On Off
Unlocking operation
Driver's door
unlocked in one
step, all doors
unlocked in two
steps
All doors
unlocked in one
step.
Automatic door lock
function to be activated
if door is not opened
after being unlocked
On Off
Your vehicle includes a variety of electronic features that can be per-
sonalized to your preferences. Programming these preferences
requires specialized equipment and may be performed by your Toy-
ota dealer.
Some function settings are changed simultaneously with other functions
being customized. Contact your Toyota dealer.
511
6-2. Customization
6
Vehicle specifications
Wireless
remote con-
trol
(P. 38 )
Time elapsed before
automatic door lock
function is activated if
door is not opened after
being unlocked
60 seconds
30 seconds
120 seconds
Operation signal
(Emergency flashers) On Off
Operation signal
(Buzzer) On Off
Door lock buzzer On Off
Panic function On Off
Trunk unlocking func-
tion
(vehicles with smart key
system only)
On Off
Trunk unlocking opera-
tion
(vehicles with smart key
system)
Press and hold
Press twice
One short press
Trunk unlocking opera-
tion
(vehicles without smart
key system)
Press and
briefly hold
Press twice
One short press
Press and hold
Item Function Default setting Customized
setting
512
6-2. Customization
Door lock
(P. 42)
Unlocking using a key
Driver's door
unlocked in one
step, all doors
unlocked in two
steps
All doors
unlocked in one
step.
Speed-detecting auto-
matic door lock function Off On
Opening driver's door
unlocks all doors Off On
Shifting gears to P
unlocks all doors. (auto-
matic transmission)
On Off
Shifting gears to posi-
tion other than P locks
all doors. (automatic
transmission)
On Off
Automatic
light control
system
(P. 159)
Light sensor sensitivity Level 3 Level 1 to 5
Time elapsed before
headlights automati-
cally turn off after doors
are closed
30 seconds
0 seconds
60 seconds
90 seconds
Lights
(P. 159)
Daytime running light
system (U.S.A. only) On Off
Item Function Default setting Customized
setting
513
6-2. Customization
6
Vehicle specifications
Illumination
(P. 313)
Time elapsed before
lights turn off 15 seconds
7.5 seconds
30 seconds
Operation when the
doors are unlocked On Off
Vehicles with smart key
system: Operation after
the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch turned
OFF
Vehicles without smart
key system: Operation
after the engine switch
turned to the “LOCK”
position
On Off
Seat belt
reminder
(P. 435)
Vehicle speed linked
seat belt reminder
buzzer
On Off
Item Function Default setting Customized
setting
514
6-3. Initialization
Items to initialize
Item When to initialize Reference
Engine oil mainte-
nance data
(U.S.A. only)
After changing engine oil P. 371
Tire pressure warning
system (U.S.A. only)
When changing the tire inflation
pressure by changing traveling
speed or load weight, etc.
P. 384
The following items must be initialized for normal system operation
in cases such as after the battery is reconnected, or maintenance is
performed on the vehicle.
516
Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a
crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately
inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA)
in addition to notifying Toyota Motor Sales, U.S.A., Inc. (Toll-free:
1-800-331-4331).
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation,
and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it
may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA can-
not become involved in individual problems between you, your
dealer, or Toyota Motor Sales, U.S.A., Inc.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free
at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://
www.safercar.gov
; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New
Jersey Ave, S.E., Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain
other information about motor vehicle safety from http://
www.safercar.gov.
517
7
For owners
Seat belt instructions for Canadian owners (in French)
The following is a French explanation of seat belt instructions
extracted from the seat belt section in this manual.
See the seat belt section for more detailed seat belt instructions in
English.
Utilisation correcte des ceintures de sécurité
Tendez la sangle diagonale de
sorte qu'elle couvre
complètement l'épaule, sans
entrer en contact avec le cou
ou glisser de l'épaule.
Placez la sangle abdominale
le plus bas possible sur les
hanches.
Réglez la position du dossier
de siège. Asseyez-vous le dos
le plus droit possible et calez-
vous bien dans le siège.
Ne vrillez pas la ceinture de
sécurité.
518
Guide de confort de ceinture de sécurité (siège arrière extérieur)
Si la sangle diagonale gêne la personne au niveau du cou, utilisez le
guide confort de la ceinture de sécurité.
Sortez le guide confort de sa
poche.
Engagez la ceinture dans le
guide.
Le cordon élastique doit passer
sous la ceinture de sécurité.
Bouclez, positionnez et lâchez la
ceinture de sécurité.
1
ÉTAPE
2
ÉTAPE
3
ÉTAPE
519
7
For owners
Entretien et soin
Ceinture de sécurité arrière
Ceintures de sécurité
Nettoyez avec un chiffon ou une éponge humectée d'eau savonneuse tiède.
Profitez de l'occasion pour vérifier régulièrement que les ceintures ne sont
pas effilochées, entaillées, ou ne paraissent pas exagérément usées.
ATTENTION
Détérioration et usure des ceintures de sécurité
Inspectez les ceintures de sécurité périodiquement. Contrôlez qu'elles ne
sont pas entaillées, effilochées, et que leurs ancrages ne sont pas
desserrés. N'utilisez pas une ceinture de sécurité défectueuse avant qu'elle
ne soit remplacée. Une ceinture de sécurité défectueuse n'apporte aucune
garantie de protection de l'occupant en cas d'accident.
Si la ceinture de sécurité est sortie de son
guide, repassez-la dedans avant de
l'utiliser.
520
523
Alphabetical index
Alphabetical index
A/C .................................... 196, 204
ABS........................................... 170
Air conditioning filter.............. 398
Air conditioning system
Air conditioning filter............. 398
Automatic air conditioning
system................................ 196
Manual air conditioning
system................................ 204
Steering wheel air
conditioning switch............. 201
Airbags
Airbag operating conditions.... 90
Airbag precautions for your
child...................................... 94
Airbag warning light.............. 433
Curtain shield airbag operating
conditions............................. 91
Curtain shield airbag
precautions .......................... 94
Front passenger occupant
classification system ............ 99
General airbag precautions.... 94
Locations of airbags ............... 87
Modification and disposal of
airbags ................................. 98
Proper driving posture...... 85, 94
Side airbag operating
conditions............................. 91
Side airbag precautions.......... 94
SRS airbags ........................... 87
Alarm...........................................82
Antenna.....................................220
Anti-lock brake system............170
Armrest .....................................332
Ashtray......................................327
Audio input ...............................258
Audio system
Antenna.................................220
Audio input ............................258
AUX adapter..........................258
CD player/changer ................223
iPod® player ..........................240
MP3/WMA disc......................232
Optimal use ...........................253
Portable music player............258
Radio.....................................215
Steering wheel audio
switch..................................260
Type ......................................211
USB memory player ..............246
Automatic air conditioning
system ....................................196
Automatic light control
system ....................................159
Automatic transmission
Automatic transmission .........138
If the shift lever cannot be shifted
from P .................................467
S mode..................................139
AUX adapter .............................258
Auxiliary boxes ........................321
A
524
Alphabetical index
Back-up lights
Wattage.................................494
Battery
Checking ...............................378
If the vehicle has discharged
battery.................................471
Preparing and checking before
winter ..................................179
Bluetooth® audio .....................263
Bluetooth® phone ....................279
Brake
Fluid ......................................375
Parking brake ........................145
Brake assist..............................170
Break-in tips .............................122
Care
Exterior..................................348
Interior ...................................350
Seat belts ..............................351
Cargo capacity .........................175
Cargo net ..................................337
CD changer...............................223
CD player ..................................223
Chains .......................................179
Child restraint system
Booster seats, definition........104
Booster seats, installation .....108
Convertible seats,
definition .............................104
Convertible seats,
installation...........................108
Front passenger occupant
classification system .............99
Infant seats, definition ...........104
Infant seats, installation.........108
Installing CRS with LATCH
anchors ...............................109
Installing CRS with
seat belts ............................111
Installing CRS with top
straps ..................................114
Child safety
Airbag precautions..................94
Battery precautions.......380, 473
Child restraint system ........... 104
Child-protectors....................... 43
How your child should wear
the seat belt ..........................61
Installing child restraints........108
Moon roof precautions ............75
Power window lock switch ......70
Power window precautions .....71
Removed key battery
precautions ......................... 403
Seat belt comfort guide ...........58
Seat belt extender
precautions ........................... 64
Seat belt precautions .............. 62
Seat heater precautions........330
Trunk precautions ...................49
Child-protectors.........................43
Cleaning
Exterior..................................348
Interior................................... 350
Seat belts ..............................351
Clock ......................................... 326
Compass...................................343
Condenser ................................ 374
Console box .............................317
Cooling system
Engine overheating ............... 475
Cruise control ..........................166
Cup holder................................ 319
Curtain shield airbags ............... 87
Customizable features ............510
B
C
525
Alphabetical index
Daytime running light
system ................................... 161
Defogger
Rear window......................... 209
Side mirror............................ 209
Dimension................................ 482
Dinghy towing .................. 191,192
Display
Trip information .................... 155
Warning message ................ 444
Do-it-yourself maintenance.... 359
Door courtesy light
Door courtesy light ............... 313
Wattage ................................ 494
Doors
Door glasses .......................... 70
Door lock .................... 27, 38, 42
Side mirrors ............................ 68
Driver's seat belt reminder
light ........................................ 435
Driving
Break-in tips ......................... 122
Correct posture....................... 85
Procedures........................... 120
Winter driving tips................. 179
Electronic key
If the electronic key does
not operate properly............469
Emergency flashers
Switch....................................424
Emergency, in case of
If a warning light turns on ......432
If a warning message is
displayed.............................444
If the electronic key does not
operate properly..................469
If the engine will not start ......465
If the shift lever cannot be
shifted from P......................467
If the vehicle has discharged
battery.................................471
If the warning buzzer
sounds ................................432
If you have a flat tire .............454
If you lose your keys .............468
If you think something is
wrong ..................................428
If your vehicle becomes
stuck ...................................478
If your vehicle needs to be
towed ..................................425
If your vehicle overheats .......475
D
E
526
Alphabetical index
Engine
Compartment ........................365
Engine switch ................131, 135
Hood......................................362
How to start the
engine .........................131, 135
Identification number.............482
If the engine will not start ......465
Ignition switch................131, 135
Overheating...........................475
Engine compartment cover.....367
Engine coolant
Capacity ................................488
Checking ...............................373
Preparing and checking before
winter ..................................179
Engine coolant temperature
gauge ......................................147
Engine immobilizer system.......80
Engine oil
Capacity ................................485
Checking ...............................368
Preparing and checking before
winter ..................................179
Engine oil maintenance
data .........................................371
Engine switch light ..................313
Event data recorder .................430
Floor mat ..................................335
Fluid
Brake.....................................375
Power steering fluid .............. 376
Washer..................................381
Fog lights
Switch ................................... 163
Wattage.................................494
Front fog lights
Switch ................................... 163
Wattage.................................494
Front passenger occupant
classification system .............. 99
Front passenger's seat belt
reminder light ........................435
Front seats
Adjustment .............................. 51
Front side marker lights
Wattage.................................494
Front turn signal lights
Wattage.................................494
Fuel
Capacity ................................ 484
Fuel gauge ............................ 147
Fuel pump shut off system....429
Gas station information .........536
Information ............................ 495
Refueling.................................76
Type ...................................... 484
Fuel door ....................................76
Fuel filler door............................76
Fuel pump shut off system .....429
Fuses ........................................405
F
527
Alphabetical index
Garage door opener................ 338
Gas station information.......... 536
Gauges ..................................... 147
Glove box................................. 317
Glove box light ........................ 317
Grocery bag hooks ................. 336
Hands-free phone system
(for cellular phone) ............... 279
Hazard lights
Switch................................... 424
Head restraints
Adjusting ................................ 55
Headlights
Replacing light bulbs ............ 418
Switch................................... 159
Wattage ................................ 494
Heaters
Seat heater........................... 330
Side mirror............................ 209
Hood ......................................... 362
Hooks
Grocery bag hooks............... 336
Horn.......................................... 146
I/M test.......................................358
Identification number
Engine ...................................482
Vehicle ..................................482
Ignition switch..................131, 135
Illuminated entry system.........314
Indicator lights .........................151
Initialization
Items to initialize....................514
Inside rear view mirror ..............66
Interior lights
Interior lights..........................313
Switch....................................314
Wattage.................................494
Jack
Positioning a floor jack ..........363
Vehicle-equipped jack ...........454
Jack handle ..............................454
G
H
I
J
528
Alphabetical index
Keyless entry..............................38
Keys
Electronic key..........................24
Engine switch ................131, 135
If you lose your keys .............468
If the electronic key does
not operate properly............469
Ignition switch................131, 135
Key number.............................24
Keyless entry...........................38
Keys ........................................24
Mechanical key .......................24
Wireless remote control key....38
License plate lights
Wattage.................................494
Light bulbs
Replacing ..............................418
Wattage.................................494
Lights
Door courtesy lights ..............313
Emergency flasher switch .....424
Fog light switch .....................163
Hazard light switch ................424
Headlights switch ..................159
Interior light switch ................314
Personal light switch .............315
Replacing light bulbs .............418
Turn signal lever....................144
Vanity lights...........................325
Wattage.................................494
Load capacity ...........................178
Lock steering column......133, 136
Maintenance
Do-it-yourself
maintenance ....................... 359
General maintenance............355
Maintenance data .................482
Maintenance requirements ...353
Manual air conditioning
system .................................... 204
Manual transmission
Manual transmission .............142
Meter
Instrument panel light
control.................................150
Meters ................................... 147
Mirrors
Inside rear view mirror ............66
Side mirror heater ................. 209
Side mirrors.............................68
Vanity mirrors........................ 325
Moon roof ...................................72
MP3 disc ...................................232
Multi-information
display .................................... 155
K
L
M
529
Alphabetical index
Noise from under vehicle ......... 18
Odometer ......................... 147, 155
Oil
Engine oil.............................. 368
Opener
Fuel filler door......................... 76
Hood..................................... 362
Trunk ...................................... 47
Outside rear view mirrors
Adjusting and folding .............. 68
Outside temperature
display ........................... 147, 155
Overheating, Engine ............... 475
Parking brake .......................... 145
Parking lights
Switch................................... 159
Wattage ................................ 494
Personal lights
Switch................................... 315
Wattage ................................ 494
Power outlet............................. 328
Power steering fluid................ 376
Power windows ......................... 70
Radiator ....................................374
Radio .........................................215
Rear side marker lights
Replacing light bulb...............418
Switch....................................159
Rear seats
Adjustment ..............................53
Folding down...........................54
Rear sunshade .........................333
Rear turn signal lights
Replacing light bulbs .............418
Wattage.................................494
Rear view mirror
Compass ...............................343
Rear window defogger ............209
Replacing
Fuses ....................................405
Key battery ............................401
Light bulbs.............................418
Tires ......................................454
Reporting safety defects for
U.S.A. owners ........................516
N
O
P
R
530
Alphabetical index
Seat belts
Adjusting the seat belt.............57
Automatic Locking
Retractor ...............................60
Child restraint system
installation...........................108
Cleaning and maintaining
the seat belts ......................351
Emergency Locking
Retractor ...............................60
How to wear your seat belt......57
How your child should wear
the seat belt ..........................61
Pregnant women, proper seat
belt use .................................60
Reminder light .......................435
Seat belt extenders .................61
Seat belt pretensioners ...........59
Seat heaters..............................330
Seating capacity.......................178
Seats
Adjustment ........................51, 53
Adjustment precautions...........52
Child seats/child restraint
system installation ..............108
Cleaning ................................350
Head restraint..........................55
Properly sitting in the seat.......85
Rear seat folding down ...........54
Seat heaters..........................330
Service reminder
indicators .............................. 151
Shift lever
Automatic transmission.........138
If the shift lever cannot
be shifted from P ................467
Manual transmission .............142
Shift lock system ..................... 467
Side airbags ............................... 87
Side marker lights
Replacing light bulbs.............418
Switch ................................... 159
Wattage.................................494
Side mirror
Adjusting ................................. 68
Smart key system
Entry function .......................... 27
Starting the engine................ 131
Spare tire
Inflation pressure .................. 392
Storage location .................... 454
Spark plug ................................488
Specifications .......................... 482
Speedometer ............................ 147
Steering
Column lock release .....133, 136
Steering wheel
Adjustment .............................. 65
Air conditioning system
switches..............................201
Audio switches ......................260
S
531
Alphabetical index
Stop/tail lights
Replacing light bulbs ............ 418
Wattage ................................ 494
Storage box ............................. 336
Storage feature........................ 316
Storage precautions ............... 175
Stuck
If your vehicle becomes
stuck................................... 478
Sun visors................................ 324
Sunshade
Rear...................................... 333
Roof........................................ 73
Switch
Emergency flasher switch .... 424
Engine switch ............... 131, 135
Fog light switch..................... 163
Hazard light switch ............... 424
Ignition switch............... 131, 135
Light switches....................... 159
Power door lock switch........... 42
Power window switch ............. 70
Window lock switch ................ 70
Wiper and washer switch ..... 164
Tachometer...............................147
Theft deterrent system
Alarm.......................................82
Engine immobilizer system .....80
Theft prevention labels..............84
Tire inflation pressure .............392
Tire information
Glossary ................................504
Size .......................................501
Tire identification number......500
Uniform tire quality
grading................................502
Tires
Chains ...................................179
Checking ...............................382
If you have a flat tire..............454
Inflation pressure...................392
Inflation pressure sensor.......384
Replacing ..............................454
Rotating tires .........................382
Size .......................................491
Snow tires .............................179
Spare tire...............................454
Tools .........................................454
Total load capacity...................178
Towing
Dinghy towing................191, 192
Trailer towing.........................183
TRAC .........................................170
Traction control........................170
Trip information .......................155
Trip meter .........................147, 155
Trunk
Extending a space.................334
Opener ....................................47
Trunk light
Trunk light ...............................48
Wattage.................................494
Turn signal lights
Replacing light bulbs .............418
Switch....................................144
Wattage.................................494
T
532
Alphabetical index
Vanity lights
Vanity lights...........................325
Wattage.................................494
Vanity mirrors...........................325
Vehicle identification
number ...................................482
Vehicle stability control...........170
VSC............................................170
Warning buzzers
Brake system ........................432
Downshifting..........................140
Open door .............................435
Seat belt reminder.................435
Warning lights
Anti-lock brake system ..........433
Brake assist system ..............433
Brake system ........................432
Charging system ...................433
Engine oil maintenance.........435
Engine oil pressure ...............433
Low fuel level ........................435
Low tire pressure warning
light .....................................435
Malfunction indicator lamp ....433
Master warning light ..............435
Open door .............................435
Pretensioners ........................433
Seat belt reminder light .........435
Smart key system..................438
SRS airbags ..........................433
Washer fluid ..........................435
Warning messages
Engine coolant
temperature ........................ 445
Engine oil maintenance......... 447
Engine oil pressure ............... 445
Hood ..................................... 447
Moon roof.............................. 447
Open door.............................447
Parking brake........................ 447
Smart key system ................. 450
Steering lock ......................... 446
Trunk..................................... 447
Washer fluid ..........................447
Washer
Checking ............................... 381
Preparing and checking
before winter....................... 179
Switch ................................... 164
Washing and waxing ...............348
Weight
Cargo capacity ......................175
Load limits.............................178
Weight...................................482
Wheels ...................................... 396
Window glasses ........................70
Window lock switch................... 70
Windows
Power windows ....................... 70
Rear window defogger..........209
Washer..................................164
Windshield wipers ................... 164
Wireless remote control key
Replacing the battery............401
Wireless remote control ..........38
WMA disc..................................232
V
W
533
What to do if...
What to do if...
A tire punctures
P. 454 If you have a flat tire
The engine does not start
P. 465 If the engine will not start
P. 8 0 Engine immobilizer system
P. 471 If the battery is discharged
P. 469 If the electronic key does not oper-
ate properly
The shift lever cannot be
moved out
P. 467
If the shift lever cannot be shifted
from P
The engine coolant temperature
gauge enters the red zone
Steam can be seen coming
from under the hood
P. 475 If your vehicle overheats
The key is lost
P. 468 If you lose your keys
The battery runs out
P. 471 If the battery is discharged
The doors cannot be locked
P. 4 2 Doors
The horn begins to sound
P. 8 2 Alarm
The vehicle is stuck in
mud or sand
P. 478 If the vehicle becomes stuck
534
What to do if...
The warning light or indicator
light comes on
P. 432 If a warning light turns on or a
warning buzzer sounds...
Vehicles with multi-information display
Vehicles without multi-information display
535
What to do if...
Warning lights
P. 435
or
P. 4 3 2 P. 435
P. 4 3 3 P. 435
P. 4 3 3 P. 435
P. 435
or
P. 4 3 3 P. 435
P. 4 3 3 P. 435
P. 438
or
P. 4 3 3
P. 4 3 5
Brake system warning
light
Tire pressure warning
light
Low windshield washer fluid
warning light
Charging system warn-
ing light
Open door warning light
Low engine oil pressure
warning light
Low fuel level warning
light
Malfunction indicator
lamp
Driver’s seat belt
reminder light
Front passenger’s seat belt
reminder light
SRS warning light
Master warning light
ABS warning light
Smart key system warn-
ing light
Engine oil replacement
reminder light
The warning message is
displayed
P. 444 If a warning message is displayed
536
GAS STATION INFORMATION
Auxiliary catch lever
P. 362
Trunk opener
P. 4 7
Fuel filler door
P. 7 6
Hood lock release lever
P. 3 62
Fuel filler door opener
P. 7 6
Tire inflation pressure
P. 491
Fuel tank capacity 18.5 gal. (70 L, 15.4 Imp. gal.)
Fuel type Unleaded gasoline only P. 77, 484
Cold tire inflation pressure P. 491
Engine oil
capacity
(Drain and refill)
2.5 L 4-cyl-
inder
(2AR-FE)
engine
qt. (L, lmp.qt)
With filter 4.7 (4.4, 3.9)
Without filter 4.2 (4.0, 3.5)
3.5 L V6
(2GR-FE)
engine
With filter 6.4 (6.1, 5.4)
Without filter 6.0 (5.7, 5.0)
Engine oil type P. 485

Navigation menu